Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
Plumbing - Kennedy
PRODUCT DATA FOR VERTICAL OUNTING AND SENSORHORIZONTAL INSERTION FOR SUFZFACE MOUNTING WITH RE OTE BULB 4006,7 and 6 provide spst fling for hi ll crr love it or circulator control,, 4006G includes two spst swvltehes that provide hir h limit and circulator control, 4046,7; L6006,7 models are available far insertion mt vertical or horizontal Immersion er ell vertical or horizontal direct immersion, and surface rnountin L4008, L6446 include remote Bulb for<r rr unt ne controller at a location away frorn the sensing element Totally enclosed 14fioro witoh snap -acting switches operate on temperature rise to set point, Models calibrated for high limit use are also writable for low limit control if a separate high limit corn tier is arsed 'risible control i romrrt sale and e t ural ad$ustrrrent scr'er perrmt easy setting, emote bulb models may be used to sense air temperature in ducts and in outside air sensing applioaions:> Aquastatkid Centirc liens ars stalme type devices fur l�nirifing or regulating the t her Lure of liquids lea !dins, sterge tubs. and other applications tnrl ere te tu control Is required, Genesi Futures ~ pr IpsatIons C)rden110 tnfr rnlation Installation pra#ion stun Adjustrhent Checkout Material Safety Da the All r i,rjt :fC off L4006,7,6 L66106,7 8 A OUASTARN CONTROLLERS SPECIFICATIONS illOPORTANT The sidedificialions dikteit in this puelicatiott Cc not incittrie rtornial theittifastuditg tolerances, Therefore, ii,VS unit they not exactly rnatcl? the listed specifica- tions, Aisd, product tasted and callhitated (alder- closely pitntitoiled conditions, and some nano"- differecc,es in pt-forrnerthe can b9 expected if those , rtoridftiorts ere changed, SUPER TRADELINE®/TRADELINE® MODELS SUPER TRADELINE controls offer features not available on TRADELINE or standard models, and are designed to regMcip a eiide range of Honeywell and conspetikve controls. TRADELINE nkociels are selected and packaged to p)rovide ease of stocking, ease ofriandliiiid. and imaximunk - replacement value_ Specifications of SUPER TRADELINE and TRADELINE corttrols are the same as those of standard ntiodels except as hated below. SUPER TRADELINE Model. 1,6008A Autiastat IDurffroller, SUPER TRADELINE Features: SUPER TRADELINE package \frith cross reference label and special instructions Factory -set stop at 24011F t1181C). Vertical or horizontal nffaunt Tube of heatkcooductive compound, Insulation: 1-1/2 to 3 ire (38 to 70 rem), TRADELINE ridioclets: L4008A.B,E: b4008E; L60080: L6008A Aquastat Controllers ORDERING INFORMATION TRADELINE Features Available: TRADELINE package with cross reference label and special „ instruGUOns. Sonrie Tradeline models include well, Factory -set stops at 130°F, 240l'F, or 250"0 (82'0, 118-10, or 121"01. Vertical or horizontal rogurit. Tube of heat -conductive compound. Insulation depths of 1-1,12 or 3n. (38 or 76 mutt NOTE: The followeig specifications are standard. Variances,. available as options, are sted w Tables 1 and 2. Electrical Ratings (A)' Models with 2 0Ci fixed differential: 120 \lac 24OVac Full Load 12,6 1,3 Locked Rotor 115,6 17,8 Models with 5 F (3'01 fixed differential or 5"0 to 301F (31I0 to ir 0) adjustable differential: I 110/120 Vac 200/240 Vac 277 Vaca IFNI Load 80 51 4,2 LicIted Rotor 148 0 30 6 125,2 -- IliAilliitioltasfe if). 25 at 0 25 to 12 Nes 2 060080 only -NI Switchitig: L4006, L4007, L4008: Spat, L6006, L60017, l-60016.: Spilt (breaks RB and hi:lakes RW or temperature rise at setuoirit), When fiurchasintd reniacemerkt and modernigetieri products from your TPADELINEe, wholesaler or distributor refer to the TRADELINEGli Cataiod or price sheets for codtplete order ng nurober If you have additional stuestIons, need Fu he inforroation, or would like to comment on otir products or services, p[ease write or phone: 1, Your local Hoine and Building Control Sales Office. (check wrists pages of your phone directory) 2. Home and Buildinet Control Custoeter Reliations florievrwell, 1885 Douglas DrIve North Minneapolisi Blionesota 55422-4386 In CanagaineHonoyikiell LirrlitedtHoneywell Limitee, 33 Dynamic Drive, Scarborough. Ontario M1V 4Z9i, . , , In national Sales and Servicie Offices in all principal cities of ttie world. Nlanutactunrig in rkustralia, Canada, Exiladdi France, Germany, Japan, Mexlco, Netherlands, Spain, Taiwan, United Kingdon:i, U.D.A, 2 Pressure Rating. Capillary Butb (0irec In`4n"4er lon$: 20 p (1379 14F Inimp r non Well 255 psi (1758 kPaN,; ens6ng Bulb Material: Coppet ensing crib FM Liquid toNorene or silicone rail Sensing Bulb Dimernsions. 2-715 int. (73 viral Icer 31 10 mm)diameter 4Ir ng: Screw ierrrtnnais fia drnLrrrr Ambient Te derail rre: 15x0"r (F ' ) Approvals:: Underwriters Lab ordtories lr c k4 4Cif10 ;' L6006, 7Et 4LI,t 7A 7t r CONTROLLERS Remote dull, devices and well- nnca Acted devices shipped r.r without well are component recognized:, File No, litilP456, Guide Niko, MNRPR3 00o ahi peo` wait well, L 00h . L4007A. ; L60080 scar surface rnoun5ng, L8006S for direct immersion r`oorntuc- and L8007A are listed: File No, 1111F466, wide No) MBPR LFs108G is listed: File No, 54435, Grande No. XAPX, anadiah Standards Association', mile No. LR16 f4, Guide No. 400-E-0, l ANSl Nsvv`srirage Models t rtl Appliance Miswiring Stand ousting;- Horizontal and veriscal models rncaunt directly to an irrirnaersion� well installed iia a E'oiler fatting. L40061 -i and L600 contasrn bracket and damp for surface mai.rri4ing on pipe of tank Remote bulb diarleis have three mounting Navies in rear of case for scretti iinctiinitrig to a icial surface The L60066 direct iraarrsersiorn model also mounts directly to a dower fitting r4 in h terrdir al rnneel ANSI Finish: xray, Dimensions: lrastabailon: See Fiat 1 r. aid Im ersiork Well. See Fig4 Roildr Fitting and Nota- See Fig Accessories and Pa 137336A Swale Lock Assennhiy laciudes one 137536-7 7 Scale Lock and one 50844C-757 Screw No, 348 x 3116 f 15A100 Weatherproof Enclosure (tor remote duly devices ply). 10740E3 Heat -Conductive ComCompound i4 az oar t. 04488 Spring Clip (stainless steel), 124904 Well Adapter Nrn rr ersion We Assemblies and Compressror itti s See form 68-0040, Wells and Fittings for Temperature Controllers, for Inst arid ordering information. a ,tare 0 ae?rTUN Ta: 0 Fig. 1, Appro Nm rate case installation dimensions in in. (mitt) or direct insertion modals. 4 r s� Fig. . Approximate installation dimensions in in. drnrd for remote bulb mod&Ns. Other dimensions are the same as Fig 1.; 400 ,7.c8. i.;6906, r B A UA, TA1®. CONTROL ES. rCAPt SV..K,.'�j'T Fig. 4. Approximate mate irrrtirersior well dimensions in in rr rrr ; for a I models dept L4006C and L600613, Fig 6. Approxi ate boiler fittin6 and bulb ensions in in. f fir L4606C and L6006., Fig. 3. Approxi a e installation dir tensic in in. jmm for surface mount models. L4006,1,8, L6006 7,8 AQUASTA Te CONTROLLERS Standard Models: Table 1. L4006, L4007, L4008 Controller (Spst Siovitching) Specifications. Model I, Application Midscale Svvitching On Range Differential Temperature '6 (*C1 *F ('C) InsertionRise Available Options L4006A High or low 40' to 180' 2' or 5' fixed I Horizontal Ihnljt to 82') (11 or gra I or 01 11001 to 2401 151 to 30' (38' to 116') adjustable a31 M 176) Breaks I -- 11_4006B irre Circulator 100' to 2401F 15')F (3'0't fixed Horizontal Niakes r381 to 116/01L I or b 2305 1(3- to 17- cij „ „, adjustisbl° - TRADELINE rTlOdPlS available, — NET brass spud V2 nr 3/4 in — Special capillary assembly, - Insertion 3..3/8 or 5 in. (86 or 127 nim) --- Celsius scale markings, - Factory -set stops at 1601, 150', 185 200', 220', or 230'F (71', 82', 85') 9D', 104', or 110'0). — lnsulalion depths of 1-1/2, 3 ear 4 in, (38, 70, or 1 (I2 mrte, Screw and mounting brackets, - Plasto tubing over Well - ModIeb rilal with store, - Special cover and knobs, - 14611 prettitel screw TRADELINE rnocial ovallattie , — Insulation depth 1-1/2 for 3 kit, (38 or 75 rrim), - NPT brass spud 3/4 in, Screw in front of rase on dial suitable to Powe 31e control, --- Factory -set stop at 2405(160 1_.40060 High or low 1651 to 200"6 3-112r5 (2tC) Horizontal Breaks 1(18' to 9310.) flx red direct I'. irnmekirsion 64006EHgh Ides 1301 m 300°F Manual reset Horizontalor Break,c, 134 to 141 "Cj vertical L4006G High lipid and circulator control TRADELINE model available --- Less cover. Capillary 10 in, (254 mat), - NPT brass spud 3/4 in, - TRADELINE model availiable. - lSUIatlOfl depth 1-1M or in, (38 or 7(3 rnrn). - NPT brass spud 112 — Factory -set stop at 250'F (121'C), Capillary 8 in. (203 mmj„ 100 let 200fF 110 IP (1 CI Horizontal. Tvvo stalicttes 7 — External adjustment (38' to 93/0J 'fixed break knob sirriultansbusly InsulatIon depth 4 tn (102 rnrn) Factory -set stop m 160/F (71'C). - Delsitis scale markings, - Without well. 60-21 04-9 L40067,8,. 56006 7 8 AQUASTATE, CONTROLLERS Table 1 54806, 64007, 54008 Controller (Sest Switching). Specifications, Model L4007A midsoale Sevitening On Range Differential Temperature °F (i'C) 1088111011a Rise 2or ft'F (1' or Horizontal or Breaks 3liC3fixed, 5 to vertical 3275 (3' to adjustable 5"5 (3 C( fixed Vertical Makes Application fF (C) High or law 100' to 240ili5 liefit (38' to 116'C) 540070 Clreulaticir 100' to 240li5 (38' to 1167C) iL400275 Higbor loknhiti 100"i to 2405 1(38' to 116'32) or 130 to 270"F (542 to 132'0) or 5' to 30ilF (3' to 17"C) adrustable Available Options - Insulation depth 1-1/2 or 311 (30 or 78 mire). - Celsius scale markings. (3'0) fixed, Remote bulb 185ii to 30'F (3' direct lin 17"C) limrnerslari adjustable l Breaks ---- Remote capillary 5-1/2 ft (1,7 tic), B-112 rt (2,6 rro or10 ft (3,0 my Factoryi-set scam stops at 120"„ 170', or 200"5 (49'. 77', or 93"C). ---- Celsius scale markings, — Front cover screw, — Capillary 5-12 (1.7 IL 40080 Circulator L4,008Ei High limit 40" toBOF (4' to 2732) or 130' to 270"F (54e to 132'C) 5illF (3'C) 'fixed Remote INA 'Makes (3' to 17'C) idle-tiers:on adjustable 100' to 240'5 i38' to 116' 2) or 5 5.30 F direct Manual reset Remote bulb Breaks 1 I ft, 1710(r 6,1 m), Factory -set scale stops at 1427, 200', or 250'F (60', 53', or 121C). --- Capillary 5-1/2 ft. or 20 Sunu 11005.5 inc ude copper well or fittirlihj: specify when ordering, Also specifik boiler tapping size trisuiatirin depth, Marlal reset (ino-free) switch breaks hdrcuii and locks outwhen controlled ri cdiur reaches setablat Controlled teiniiiiieraturn must clrofii 20 F (11°C) below setpoitit before contacts can be manually reset 1/2 or 3/4 lc, NPT and 60-2104-9 Model 6906A 4006, ` L6t 06 78 A aUA T COW R LLE "able , L6006, L 007, L600 Cortir aiier {SpiltS e in } pe ifIcati rrr Range Application 'F f f ) Circulator and Icicle .. 100 to 246°F li cit or high lirnit l`66' tc 116"fit to 100' tea 9Lt` 6" to 143`°C1 Midada Differential °F ((l) Mae lo a"F (3'0) IHan znntai, fixed or 5" tta bt F (3 to 17 0t addtrstable Aarailla le Options SUPER TRADELINE model available. Modified dial with stop NPT brass spud 112 yrs. or 3/4 in, (-318 in t86 rrirnt insertion Vithout well, Adapater for horizontal or vertical mutat, gnsulati n depth 1-1/2 or ; k it1 a6 or 76 nem), 6fB66 ircLila tor and low. 1g6`;tn i46a0 ; 5 F (3'0) I Ho on irent rnirnersrc n Iiirlit or itrgh limit(38 to 116'01 'fixed or 5'1, ; Insulation depth 141/2 in. {60'F (3 to ? f 6 mm), 17'0) _ 314 ira brass compression adliastataie br Fitting. 0F(17"C) lmod btitl60 I rr ulatcr, ln; r line6 to 260' 57F (3'0) horizontal or i ADELINE rno e6 avail— and high i 0) 'fixed or 6" t oartinal suriane able, 66'F t2' to r rauntad — fraa�org sur€acd rrraaunt, 117'01 dlustable 6607A 1clatcar and tr 4u tr ls0 F Fazed Ho on or lnaulatian clepfl 1 142 br irmit or high limit (4° to 82"C) re i nI rn 126 anri76 rrip `a f3 ...._ ..._ rRermote bulb — TAD LIf^4rm odels 6008A Circulator and low 1ttC1� ;ca 240°"F , �,� Iirritt cc alrrtg iib" a 116'04 or ,1 xed or 6` tt ^ailabl . g to 7 °'8 66"6 (3 to -- h odt0 d`dial vitt; stop '0) 117 } — i`apillar)/ 5-112 ft. adgtastable Two stage Aq uastatl?F r nr ata cva tv1r stat e'gas{ v t e . 164` tc 11 } o 3 faxed' 60' to 't66'F i16 to 71`6;) Cahilltsr Aditistab e intorstacao differ- erntralt g'tn 10 F (2' to 6008H rnarrarurrn rilperature of Ietl er t 405"s0 50 in 200 F 16' 66' 0 6,1` fi red' rr7e rncrde rr�aivae pf er° well dr rittr€tgl epee en orderrrarg. Ats sp cGtyr ober tapping size 1i''2 r r 6,°4 rr. NFT d nulateor'r depth, L4006,7,8: L.6006.7,6 AQC/AST'?,T. CONTROLLERS ERS INSTALLATION When Installing This Product.,. 1. Read these instructions carefully. Failure to follow them could damage the product or cause a hazardous condition. 2. Check the ratings given in the instructions and on the product to mate sure the product is suitable for your application.. 3. Installer must be .a trained, experienced service technician, 4. After installation is complete, cf eck root product operation as provided in these instruns. WARNING Explosion Hazard,. Can cause serious injury., death or property damage. This product is intended for use only in s pressure relief valve. ,�► WARNING Electrical Shock Hazard. Can cause serious injury or death. Disconnect power supply before beginning to prevent electrrcat shock or equipment daln,ge. ms with a CAUTION Equipment Damage Hazard, Use of incorrect device or improper installation can damage the system. I. EX rloi replace Im rmersion-type Aouastat Controller p -on Aquastat Controller 2. Do not secure draw nut so 'tightly that retainer clamp can collapse tubing. IMPORTANT '1. Terminals on these Aquastat relays ate approved for copper wire only. 2. Controller may be used with or, withou well. If used. well must snugly fJt sensin: nest thermal response. Inset bulb Lint; if against the bottom of the welt. Use well o, length and bend the tuning. if necessary, fr enough force t0 bo!d the buI1 against the bottom of the web. Avoid 'taking a sharp ben©` irr Pear luufrirmg that it can ,_produce a break in this tLr;ur.r;g' and nice lass of fii7. This condition causes the high and low limit controls to be made cantirauuusly .. /f welt does not smugly fit on bulb, use the heat - conductive compound. included will' Super Trade/ine and Traileline models, as foliow.s: Fold the plastic bag sof ;compound lengtnwise and twist gently Snip i0e end of the hag and insert tote the welt Slowly pull Out the oag while squeezing firmly to distribute compound evenly in the well insert the bulb into, tbi' welt Bend the tubing. if necessary, to ,torovlde 'foa'^e to nuld the bulb against the bottom of inc well and to hold the outer end of the bull:' firnby io contact with The side of the wen Wipe off excess compound. t�""•� Ua :i The manufacturer usually provides a tapping for insertion of the controlie'' sensing element.. This tapping is located at a point where typical water temperature can be measured. Depending on Inc model, the element is inserted in an immersion well, through a boiler fitting. or directly immersed. Installation should be made by aqualified service technician. Follow the instructions furnished by the system nia.nufacturer, it ovariitable Otherwise, refer to appropriate procedure listed below. Mounting Immersion Well and Direct Immersion Models (L4006A,B,C,BrG; L4007A,B; L6406A,B; L6007A) Installing Immersion Well Models. (L4006A,B,E,.G; L4007A,B; L6006A; L6007A) On an existing installation, shut off t.ne power and remove the. old control. If true old immersion well appears suitable, and if t'nc adapter ctalnp on lite Aquastat Controller fits the old well spud.. this well does not. need to be replaced. To repace the well: 1. if the system is filled, drari the systema tea a porn' beioyw Inc boiler tapping, Remove the old well from, the boiler tapping. the immersion well included with the controller If the Broiler tapping is greater than 1'2 in., use a reduction fitting to adapt. the boiler opening to the 1,2 in. threads that are standard with the well or fitting Fittings witn 34 in, threads are also available 4. Fill the system_ Make sure; that the well is screwed in tightly enough to prevent leaf;age. Do not use the case as e rra.ndlE. to tighter' the well atter Inc'controller is secured to the well, To install the controller: 1. Loosen the screw tat the top of the case, abovcthe scale setting), and remove the coves. Loosen the; two screws that secure the adapter clamp (Firm. 6). 2. Insert the sensing element into the immersion well. 3- Fasten the case o1 the Aquastat Controller to tine well with the adapter clamp. Make certain that the clamp is properly positioned over the groove 0t the well spud. Also. be sure the flange at the opening of the well 'fits snugly into the opening of the case. The sensing bulla must bottom in 'the well_ NOTE Some models include up to 3 in. (7o mrt�;r extra capi tare t dhing inside the, case. In these models, pull Out tt'aaa extra tubing, if needed. �rt� rarn� rvdCIC fIN ti3A LaiP'FE`�'.FR" A A,Cr,LJ59 rvirN NT T�: T Fiig. g;: interna! view of L 6006A, Direct imm Si011 Models (L4006C,L lr oriels that provide for Mr irrirrier aon of the sensing olortrent into the boiler include :a bulb cornpre ion lrtking assembly instead df an immersion we weiii install the Ei ti ig in th boiler tapping as follows. 1, Be sure tragi sealirrp wssr"xer is in place ds show~~ lit Fig 7 Make sure that the spud of the bulb comores sso fitting is screwed in tigrhtly enough to prevent lr of rng Fig. 7. Direct on ~nodi tnrlth fitting partially removed. 4006 7 6 LIAST" 0 t N'R iL.L i S insert the it it torsion sensing bulb through tt e bulb compression bg. Adjust the adapter clamp so that ri t=its aver the groove at the opening of the bulb cs rnpression fitting, tighten the adapter damp screws so that the ouastat a troller is firmly attached to the bulb cr rnpression °untied Remote Bulb Modets (14008Ai,i ,r H) The rs vate ternperaturewspnsing bulb can'erther be installed in an immersion well (Fig ) that extends into the boiler or rar7ik, or it pan be directly immersed in the controlled medium. Siad Fig. ca For installations that do not use a well, secure the rerr�c,te Bulb wbh a bulb compression filling; (Fig 10) or a i1 ary rornpsesston fitting (Fig, 11). Order well, well adapter, L ulb co re, f'ittinpt or capillary cornpression fitting separately, see Torr 68-0040 Wells and Fittings tar Temperature Controllers. used, well must snugly fi# sensirs hulb Mr the best thermal: response, insert bulb until it rests against the bottom of the welt Hold.. it there while tiglhwwning the tubing clamp See Fig, 8 7kTs boder rtaant.utacturer usually prtvrdes a tapping For the drtion of the Apuastat Controller 'sensrrr efermient. To taupwrig should be located at a point vtrors tyioal water teniporaturd can be measured Never locate the bulb or protecting irnmersinn well close to a hist or sod water in at o a steam coil.: pa: f19 d.drawnS+StTn�t harever the sensing bu point belcav 'tne bui9er Tile bulb can also be insin the supple,~' lins raf dig indir crater beater, r, in the direct rater heater itself. or in thou lead riser, about 6 in. ( tag milli above the boiler. 11 the rlsnr valved, trio bulb carr be installed between the boner and tf rt valve. NOTer Do rant make sharp /cures rar kticks tri the capula~, Make bends n sharper the 1 in, l F n r'tr radius, After ii stalling the omrtrokior caroiu' at Niel the c'ortroller case; ou ing ImrnerIn ell e1155 S aptl 0 is Screw the well mntio tete twoil or O K. or pipe tapping, lrrsert the bulks ushing the tubing unt/l the bulb Patterns in the troll, Attach the retainer clomp err trio end of the well spud, Looser trio draw~ nut and spread the jaws of the Marino wi111 file screwdriver if riecres ary. See Fig, 8 4. 1rv`ith the retainer clamp attached to the well spud the wire the taws of the caarttp dcioir r var the ridge at the end ref tyre spud, as showin at parr itsA in Fig, 8(, adjust tete trrbii^dcg tra 01 tltmorign the retainer ejdam groove, as showai0, F}. i rhterr ti-rc draw nut so drat the ratase; olarrttt rs trrtnlw' attacting tca the well 1ud and lite tubing rs he s c ~rely L4008 7 EL. L6006 7 8 AOUASTATT, CONTROLLERS Mounting With Bulb Cortipressiort Fittng 1. Screw ttie fitting irito the boiler or pice teoptrie 2, Slide the sealing washer caste the bulb 3 lased tile bulb tritto the tiding Until the bulb bottoms 4, Skrte the spirt sleeve into the fitting See Fig 10 CL AMP SCSREVVS IS1 CL AMP 4 MOUNTING CLAMP BULP CON4PRESSRON SEAL. IN'S VVASHER DRAVY LSI-Ak",,AP S Btit, tttak NSE RnoN LE NGTIS VII' • ' PPPO, NAM SPSil SLEEVE mo•sP. tila)as A Fig, 8. Immersion well Fig, 10, Bulb compression fitting. Use with 84006A,B; L6008A, 5. Place damps A and 8 on Me assembly so that the sIeeve is drawn into the fittbig when the screwis are NDTCHES CAPLSAR TUBS SS, 7,6 [NI S2.2 ri IAM EP "S`,. SOT • tigtttened NOTE Make sure that the ratite on clamp A engages space between the sleeve and tlitie glaring, 6. Tighteri the o1amp screws evenly, Mounting With Capillary Compression Fitting 1, Scree,/ the fittirig into the holier or pipe tapping, 2. Place the packing nut on the tubing_ 3. Slide the bulb competely through the fiting, 4. Place the composition disk and four slotted brass wash- ers on the, tubing e the order shown in Fig 11, Turn the ,, brass washes so the slots are 180 degrees egad. kkiiiir snap it, swircu (to ,—ti) 4S.D lus ,(7:,1±,',4P.,31E1-S4SSY RIGHT SNAP SVOTCH (NC( I• \ .tSSDUN11NG sQLES SiEL EST coccus HAVE SIX TERMNASS. Fig. 9. internal view of L40088 or 86008G, khAAETPSI•ON BULB' ss,,, 50.11-t=1S C.SF'SLAR)' UBINtS s""s 41 COM POSil N` DVSS {•Si, CO -TEES, ss,„ F XMAPLE OP SLO—rEo teksficos f ASSEI,AUS.ED r, Ask hle, NL1T koflt:-.,If•I Fig. 11. Capillary compression fttting, Use tivith L4008. 5. Slide the seal assembly into the fittinG and tighten the packing nut. 4 1 DUCT MOUNTING 1. Drib a 1i4 in, f19 m11) hole in the duct wail large enough tc acintit the sensing bulb into the ho dor 2. Using the holder as a template. nriark and drill itioles for the bub holden mounting screws, See Fig. 12, Fig. 12. Bulb support. 3. Break the holder to the desired length. See Fig, 13, NOTE: The kindlier must be long enough to hold the sensing bulb in freely circulating air away from the duct walk . Neatly coil the excess capillary althe controller case or at the bulb hoiden, 4006 778„ L6005,7 8 A QUASTAM79 CONTROLLERS 5. Insert the bulb holder into the controlled area through the hole prepared in step 1 e 6 Fasten the bulb holder to the duct wail with the is rws fumistied, Mounting Remote Bulb Models For Outdoor Air Sensing These models have a 5 ft (1,5c-ki capillary that establishes the makirkiLim cilstanne between the case and the outdoor mounting, install the bulb on the outside of the building the shield provided (Fig, 16) where it gait be exposed to neoresentatree air -temperature, but not to direct surilight. Mount the butts enough so that acckindrilated snow, [eaves, or other debris cannot obstruct circulation of air around it, and where children cannot roach IL Avoid vents from the building install the case at the indoor iocatian selected. fastening the screws through holes in the back of the case. Bang out the nulta and tubing through a 14 in. 619 mm) hole in the outside wki avoiding sharp bends or lsinks, Leave excess tuitirig grilled near the case Du net matte sharp bends near the case or bulb. Slip the bulb through the supports in the, stkield. Pinch the sokt supporting olio until it iiiollis the bulb 14 T1!\ In position if tite seal -off tube protrudes from under the shield, bend it under as shown in Fie101 „- Hold the shield never the mounting position and forth a srnaii- radius bend in the tubing. Place the split plug around tree tubing and move the shield into the mounting location as a unit. Push the split plug litto the hole until 1 is wedged securely in place, Fasters the shield in place on the the screws provided. NOTE: if the tubing is properly shaped and the split plug iiiistalleci as directed. the shield oak cover the split plug, and the hole in title wat wi0 be hidden from sight. Fig. 13. Removing excess bulb support. Et,,E,.`„H"TEET-, EfERELE cEF HO- F.:1EP T OG E THE P ECE EA'OEEI SEEMENT i-- , API:. LAIR. TU5NEEE r 41 BOES 41 CLAEAP` DOEEE SEENSENG rEE EPL LT 1NOOD El_LJE3 314 4. -.."\E-HE • seer -OFF FU.EiE TLIBOEIG ro UNDER KE E HEE FEER SEEEWN Fig. 14. Securing capillary in bulb holder 4. Place the ciapillary in the half) holder channel Pinch the top edges or the holder together at each segment Sere Fig. 14. E,t8.86,4 auL 4 WO Fig. 15. Mounting bub in shield outside building, 64 to t . L itso, +,., ACJLi, TAM) CONTE ERS un ing L6008A Remoto Bulb Controller Mounting i 1 Guard Br kt Mount the bulb in the guard bracket as shown; in Fig. 16. t °nate the bulb and bracket combination in freely circulating air In the controlled area. With screws provided, fasted the brae&tet rr ohne oratan on Suctton Line .' In swoollrata dnh injure than one suction 11tae niece the sarising bulb on the nornmion line Make portaon the bulb s at least 2 ft (0,6m) frown the laoint at wluich the suction fine leaves the cooler Ties preventoutside temperature from being transmitted to the remote bush through the copper tubing of the suction line. Place the remote sensing bulb on tlae side of the horizontal suction line between the coil and trap loot o the trap! 4. Attach the sensing bulb to ttae suctrean lohc with clips or strafes. See Ftt, 17. Coil the excess length f capillary tubing neat° the 146008A case Ti Fig. 16. securing re u tote bulb in clop when mounting with guard bracket, COIL r Fl 7, Attaching remote bulb to f'aort ontat sr ebb ut tone ountirig SurfaceMount Mcfdels The 44006H and 46006C are designed for surtace rnpung on prprnq or tanks Mount the controller directly an the tank surface using the adjustable mounting bracket as shown in Fig; 16 Thf controller can be naourtted in any position, Uf ten moulting the 44006H or 4.60060 on piping the pipe should be 1 in. t2 taaraat dhan eter or larger for accurate ternperature se isungg, Remove arty insulation. from the pope,; Thoroughly scrape off all scale, rust or paint Mount the controller using adjustable brattketfr.urrtfsheh TuHrrn on power ln, tis'uonnect bowler suphlt,r before oeuin aieuq Instal atior piant electrical shock or equipment at darrtdgo 1+ wiring must oOR �ply wrkh tt nal cedes and ordinances rectdrding Sarre slc e type of-rosuenclosure, etc Fids, tg through 26, show typical hookup Vhen part nu or apo firing r or. tsar 2-2d anent, suvrtdh equipped with 1 7 to 22 gauge wire 2 -2 fully insulated fl< in, tab term rnal h ori AMP Mc e+r=eptable, connector Ff ;TAT untan lv. 0O6-4 6006C directly on surface,:, 001.7=, AQ A TA TT C T Lttitxl+ �iI�iIT t�.�:4R RIL+"l'p''t�T. PPa im TiV�TJ,+F[a RNc�TR F �yL7ta.'w. Fr„7r{ MiFa7.itdG r%F_Sem.T' Fig. t9. Typical ga aired syst rn with do m stic hot wato I,IFF"L',' PROVIDE rkw,PCwtaNFC? EC ,t T "~ It } fl T'"�ke:fh4 r.S FIP.::3lro C T CC iYr P a,Tt ;TL Tr VIP Fig. 22. "typical ndlbfdr d by ronic system with d arr sfic hot water, �rF Fig. 2t1. Typical o system T.rT,rt, ,rt` U NT TC,tk2 acfV(` fF, P4+VNP.rta:..tPRL'41r.7T f' 1,4 A k,t T,Tt ssaNTR, Fig. Fig, t. L60094 used to control cooling adultsnt nt and indicating light. N F2 Fig, 2 . Typical e hydronac heatinstem that provide year-round domestic hot water aasIng, AB 2a L4006 7 6008a7 AOUASTAT CONTR ERS ENSH LIMIT PN v-#t;7Tt, rf wor, f.d 91`r ;'ttpi a F. . T 4YC TLu, F9FU Yr (t A y° T f , {N Fl .24, Typical connection diagram for an oil- lrad, hydronic heating system that provides year-round domestic hot water using RA817A. F'itT:TS t�'7.:. Lihie 4" 41: 7'iary T` C31;.?k.(e� Fig.26, Typical systems uvfth 20 electric heat primariesw Fig. 7, TypMcal Po exon System lrldual NEP r -?ENA ,,v473`dTt"",CBL 2-8t, `wrJ? TAUT;. TE'f�kut6Nlr a.„s� tiafiFS+hr,kt-r=+k,v iREN,."Tr . a=Ss+".k,tort';Ma:S�3'S:�-Ed Cfifn'wTi£bS� �,+§=�T t.T SIJ Fig. 2 , Typlcal'oll burner lnst Nation using t. 4008G, Fig, 2 Typical uviring hookup using L6006 or L6007 w 8148A, OPERATION For proper selertion of set:Enos follow the boiler manufacture recommendations High Limit Controller ontac RB terrninaN provide high limg switching tunction (c ,(s open at set point on temperature rise), See Fig, 30 and 31. Shuts off humeri if water temperature exceeds high setting, Burner restarts when temperature drops to high Net , , setting less differentiae NOTE: On manual reset models, the reset button on the front of the case must be pushed in to about the burner th operate after a high lught shutclowil migesierune RISE SETROW IADTUIT ABDO • L6008G OPERATION BREAKS VETO MAKE:81VA — - t EIRIT WF'', ON RITE' DIFFERS rfroT, Y L2 aREAKS MAIRES ON EATL, BREAKS R,D MAKES PEW Am RIGHT SvI,,mso:AR ON RISE s.=5 DITECRENTIM V 'BREAKPEA --- MAKES R -E, ON F AT L, INTE,ROTAGE DIFFEREAMT1AT 11\ ,11 e CHEF ERENCE 0ARTi-11111M11 TEENIEFERATURES AT VA IICTI THE .51YESCHEE MAKE RAN ALITIMS1 1S11 E FROIEI OE 7 (1 5 'ITO S L11 IEN STANDARD MODELS 1.114 FROM S TO 1E M 2 TD AMICIf ,N4 TE1 175 7 1a To 7,4 CI moDELE T11ID sPrTT 511EITCHES DETSTSIMIRE IN SEQUENCE E6,C151 sT,yrrET- DIFFEREWIER IS FIXER AT APEROMPVIAIELY 1'4170 Or,/ STANC'IARD MOLEOLS OR AO 'REEF. Ea ODER, ON 5,5 10 115m 79 I111 MODELS k:',23r4'3 Fig. 29, Operation of Le008a L4006.7,8: L6906,7,80U4S TA Tflikti CONTROLLERS iEmPEE1ATOR,S1 RISE TIE rPOlfFr 0"0.[US1 ABLE, L40081. OPERATION BREAKS a ON RISE E -E1 LEFT SWITCH MET ERENTIAL ,,LEN TAKE C/N FAL! A BREAKS RIDS,EIT s,,,,,przl.„ 10 RISE SMAKES r ALL BETWEEN THE TEMPERATuRES AT v,,HIDH TIRE TWO SWITCSIES BREAK ON TawERATuRE RISE 51PATOTES °PERRI E SEQUENCE RIGHT $1NI1EI1 FIRST -ON TEMPERATURE RISE, moot Figi 30. Operation of L4008Li. Low Limit Controller R 31 ternftrials provide low limit. switching function (contacts open at set point on temperature rise), Ma 101 minimum boiler temperature for domestic Itiot water, Turns eh boiler at terriperature setting,. Ie SS differential_ Circulator Controller R-Viit terminals provide circulation control function (contacts close at set point on temperature rise), Preveigts circulation of water that is below the desired heating temperature, Breaks circulator circuit on temperature drop below setting less differential: rernakes on rise to setting, L60080 Adjustable Interstage Differential When the termeeratigre at the sensing element nses above the set point, of the controller, the switch on the right linakes R -W the 'temperature continues to rise through Inc preselected interstage differential of the coritroller,, titre switch on the loft makes Conversely, en a temperature fall, the switch on the left makes R -E. providing first stefs swtci pg lfthr tenleerature ontinues to fail, the switch on the right makes k -B to provide sequencing of equipment, 15 6C -2104-5i 4086,7,8, L6006 i, A LIASTAT, CO TROLLERS ADJUSTMENTS Adjusting Differentii het tltie differential to correspond with the boiler menufactureM recommendations, To adjust models with adjustable dfferentiai, rotate the wheel on the back, of the snap switch, see Fig 32, until the desired reading is aligned with the V notch in the frame The wheel provides an adjustment front; 8°F to 30'F (3'C to 1711 1. Replace the cover on the Aquastaf ntr ±ll 7Cr+rP Table 3. Temperature AdjusAdjustment FA T ti.,�'c TrH Fig. 32nte age differentiae adjustment on an L6008 .. 6008A Location i erential Calibration The L6008A10tt3 i calibrated tor applicatidhs where the bulb and controller case are located in the same control' gace. If the bulb and controller case are located in separate roon�d and if the temperature in they two roorns is ditferent, ori adjustment is required, Adjust the dial setting (control space terperature setting) to compensate for the difference @r tart porature. the Lro0 8 case" is located in a roan with higher tentpdratisre than indicated edit: the diel setting, raise tl did sdttrriq the nurnbdr ni degrees listed €n la,lt 3 2. if the ratLi A: case is located Gn a rooter mitt' d Icaweer tart pdrature than anatdated on the dial setting lowor tib sial setting the i s air bait of degrees listed in lab o Fig. 31. Adjusting the ttifferenttat.DifferenceBetween Desired I d ____________T tt Adstist the ccl�tr al prink ter correspond aEth the toiler Reduce Dial Setting Room %rrtperaiuren manufacturer recarnrlsrends tkaes. To adjust, insert a 'F F ° screwdriver in thu sEotted screw fvpe head located beneath the 0wiindow in the cover Tu rrfi the scale to the desired 'ponied i 3 f crtrrt. Adjusting L6008G in tenstage Differential i to L6088 'Controller has an adjustable inters 20 11 . differentsal. The set point adjustment t knob determines Inc ternldrature at which the right switch operates The left switch 1 t cart be adjusted to operate Iran 3''r to 10'F f1.7'10 to 5.611 30 17 above the point of operation of the right switch. See Fig. 30 tor 20 the operation of the 1...80080. The interstage differential is w adjusted 04 turning the star wheel with a narrow screwdriver f.i 22 inserted into the rectangular hole in the chassis (Fig 33), I tB 25 128 131 12 2 ,2 4 88 EXAMPLE In the example shown it r Fig g, the L000A case is 6ocated in a room with a lowar temperature than trig con tioIliad space. Adjusting toe controlled space setting (drat setting) is necessaryi to compensate for the temperature difference of 3 (20 t between the two rooms. Table 3 indicates that the dial setting should be lowered 5tiF to compensate for the 35°F t o t terpdrsture difference nue! Reset if tho devrc includes rrwsr u l reset (1t4.006E, L4008Eroo stir to or the red reset button on the front of the case to ittrke sure that the controller' is not locked out on safety. `Where cd ett no out the system, adjust the iimht setting love enough s the temperature of the controlled mod um reaches the high irnirt setting. Wren the lirrut setting is reached, the ilitiguastat or trcalier locks out and the burner SIVAS down. 1 When the terr tporature of the c rdroilkd medium" drops to the high limit setf net less the differentials push the rnanuai reset button to CHECKOUT al ,the systems operative again. Reset the corttroi to the protter high iimit settilti L 00 x 8. L tp06 4,3 U4 ' 4 T ?N ` wt Fig. 3 L6008Acalibration AWARNING E piosion Hazard. Gan cause serious injury death gar property damage, Thls product IS Intended for use only r'n sf rer as w lth pressure re6rel valvar heck to rusks cerrair teat ilia Aastat liar trotrei is proper nsrallcd and adjusted l u into per ion and ttiserve tree action alti vero3 cycles to a eke certain it provides proper control of tine s °ste la as tdscrrhed in the Operatkun section: Make ai1t, addihonar adtustnrents necessary for a sewing minted rcgulrontents. L4000 7 L5 0t0.%,5 AQUA TAPE C NTR LLE ATER1AL SAFETY DATA SHEET Section 1. Product And Company f. a rufacturdr Honeywell Eng . 1985' ougtas Drive North' Identification #inrsaancairs, N a4; Product Nana: Heat mon luctive crrrpiact C3at e6easad: October 5, 1999 f DS Iii: DS90 1 NEPA Ratings. ynonyras° tvt °9 Jg Health 0; F(ar a abi(i# t. P ac#ivity r ersdnak Pretectic Product Lie e; Heat u. inductive material used to enshar cranted alar neat tear ter in t nperat ro sensar appH Section 2.C i n, nforniation on ingredients In re ier CAS Num ber P r ent 2 Lithium L°midiear reaxe (7tf°f }, 164742-65-0 54742®5g-7 Lithivant Hydros tearatel eba ate 6881 4 - Complex Zinc Atkyld'ititiicpt ostahate ; 55549 42-5 Aluminum Paste tadsvi: Aluminum, as Al 17420490 A 'rhati etraleur D s hate 8052 `I ngrip' 00 rogirn Petroleum Distillates 64742-9 - 5 t=a 15 Adrauinrat Inf rrna€ivah: mart No. t20650 (0.5 oz tubes, Part No: 107405 (4 a. cda) rt No. 1975-07 {i -a gallon container ) contain nt mate anicrunts at° lithium and molybdenum lubricant compounds, Section 3. Hazard identifica ion Carcinogenicity: Not csonside€red to be a either OSHA N `P. ARC, or ACGIH. Acute Health eion 4. F s Aid Measurep Skins Excessive contact may cause skin irritation aril utdtraiatikis nye 5:0 na `i. Plur to eves with water for nuat s Iemuvs airy c refect i+uses and continue to f@us@mi, Cibttir Eye Direct contact vurth ey will cause irntdiiori medical attentoon 9 irr°itatton develops and persists Inhalafiors No adv sr= effects are eectart Skin Contact: Remove eucess uvitls cloth or taapet, A+'esti thoroughly with mild scraps and water Obtain mediae! atte - Ingesiion, Ingestion of proct nPia r cause riau ata. vtarait tion 4 irritation develops and persists. ing and diarrhea:_ Ii gestion: Conuact piaysrciait cae I cal poison control onto Chronic Health Effects r artaptftafatt. P istinq slain rash or derrai titin may er9 kir lnhRerraove pati air nncl obtain redid rccweatsd contact a a yrnptorras de ielop OSHA Hazard C lassifnoatitans No L4008,7',8; L6006,7 8 A QUASTATS CONTROLLERS Section 5. Fire Fighting Measures Section 9. Physical and Chemical Properties Material Fiasti Point > 383 F (195 Wburn if exposed Appearance/CI-dor: Aluminum color. semitsolid material, to flame, pleasant odor, Extinguishing Media; Carbon dioxide, dry chemical or toast., Special Fire Fighting Procedures: fdlone, Explosion Hazaridis: None. Aluminum powder can react wifri water to release hantrriable hydrogen gas in the forret cif this. product, this reaction is not expected. Section 6, Accidental Release Measures Scrape up and dispose of as solid viieste in accordance with state and federal regulations,. Section 7. Handling and Storage Store in dry place. Keep ccirilainer closed when not in list, Section B. Exposure Controls and Personal Protection. Ver -dilation: No special ventilation is required when working with this product. Respirator!' Protection; None required Eye Protection: Not normally required However, use cringe! safety goggles or faceshlehe if potential for eye contact exists, especially if material is heated, Solubility in Vtiater: Negligible. Spiecific Gravity: 0.86, Secti‘art 16. Stability and Reactivity Stability: Stable, id:arid/Clothing Protection: Not normally required Protec- tive gloves and clothing are recommended, as rnaterial rs difficult to reniove from skin and clothing Other Protective Eguitnnent: None required Reactivity: Hazardous uolymerizatic)rwill idol:cc:cur incompatibilities; Strong oxidizing agents and halogens, Hazardous Decomposition Frc)ducts: Cartier! dioxide, carbon monoxide. Section 11. Toxicology Information. No date Section 12. Ecological Information Chenticial Fats information: islydrocarbon corriponenfs will . biodegrade in soil; relatively persistent in water. Section 13. Disposal Consideration Dispose of es solid waste accordance welt local, state and federal regulations. Section 14. Transportation information DOE Classifigrilticiin: Not classified as hazardous, Section 15, Regulatory itirfornitation SARA Ellie 111 Supplier Notification: Include in Section 311/ 312 inventory reports if amounts exceed 10,000 pounds. Altirnintint compounds are stiblect to the reporting requirements under Sectiori 31:3 of Emergency Planning and Corrinninify Right -To -Knott! Act of 1986 (40 CFR 372). ingredients listed in TSCA Inventory, Section 16. Other information This information is furnisfied without warranty, expressed or Implied, except that is is accfirafe to the tiesf our kr:tole/ledge, Prepared by: PROSAFE. 1295 Bandana Boulevard. Suite 335, „st, Paul, MO 55108 (6E1-917-61001, PLT-5 PLT-12 PLT-20 Order No. Order No. Order No. Description 0067370 0067371 0067372 Max. Pressure - psi 150 150 150 Max. Temp. - °F 200 200 200 Tank Volume - gal. 2.1 4.5 8.5 Tank Acceptance - gal. 1.26 2.8 3.4 Air Pre-charge - psi 20 20 20 Connections Size - in. 3⁄4 male 3⁄4 male 3⁄4 male Diameter - in. 8 10.5 121⁄2 Length - in. 11 13.5 193⁄16 Weight - lbs. 5.5 10 15 Models: PLT-5, PLT-12, PLT-20 Potable Hot Water Expansion Tank Installation Instructions Certified to ANSI/NSF 61 (73°F/23°C) Listed by IAPMO Acceptance Volume Air Side Water Side Volume at 150psi Pre-pressure (10.3 bar) (gallons) (psi) (bar) PLT-5 PLT-12 PLT-20 20 (1.4) 1.48 3.42 7.102 40 (2.8) 1.26 2.88 5.882 60 (4.1) 1.0 2.49 4.705 80 (5.5) .80 1.85 4.009 Figure 1 (Optional Location)Support Tank in Optional Horizontal Position (Optional Location) Watts Pressure Gauge Watts Backflow Preventer Water Supply Watts Shutoff Valve Watts Pressure Reducing Valve Expansion Tank Water Heater To System Watts T&P Safety Relief Valve Floor Drain Discharge LineIS-PLT ! WARNING! Improper installation, adjustment, alteration, service or maintenance can cause property dam- age, serious bodily injury or death. Read instructions completely before proceeding with instal- lation. Only qualified personnel may install or service this equipment in accordance with local codes and ordinances. Do not exceed 80psi (5.5 bar) air charge. Air charge pressure exceeding 80psi (5.5 bar) could become hazardous and will void any and all warranties, either written or implied. Failure to fol- low these instructions will result in the possibility of property damage, serious bodily injury or death. This Expansion Tank is designed and intended for water storage at a maximum pressure of 150psi (10.3 bar) and a maximum temperature of 200°F (93ºC). Any use other than for potable water or a sustained or instantaneous pressure in excess of 150psi (10.3 bar) or 200°F (93ºC) is UNSAFE and can cause property damage, serious bodily injury or result in death. Disclaimer: The manufacturer of this tank does not accept any liability or other responsibility for personal injury or property damage resulting from improper use, installation or operation of this tank or the system of which it is a part. Notice: The expansion tank, piping and your connections may in time leak. Select a location to install the expansion tank where a water leak will not damage the surrounding area. The manu- facturer is not responsible for any water damage in connection with this expansion tank. Installation 1. Before beginning installation determine the system pressure. a. Open a faucet to allow the system pressure to equalize. b. Close faucet. c. Read the system pressure at the pressure gauge (Figure 1). 2. The expansion tank pre-charge must be set to the system pressure as determined in Step 1. Pre-charge prior to installation in the system. Caution: Pre-charge prior to installation in the system. Do not adjust the air pre-charge of the expansion tank with the system under pressure. The air pre-charge should only be adjusted under zero system pressure. Note: The normal pre-charge is 20psi (138 kPa). Do not exceed 80psi. If system pressure exceeds 80psi (5.5 bar) it will be necessary to either: A. Add a pressure reducing valve to the system or, B. Locate the expansion tank in a riser where the static pressure is below 80psi (5.5 bar). a. Unscrew the protective cap from the air inlet valve. b. Using a tire pressure gauge, check the tank pre-charge pressure. c. If necessary, pressurize the tank to the proper setting using a manual bicycle tire pump. Caution do not exceed 80psi. d. Replace the protective air cap. 3. Shut off the water supply valve. 4. Shut off power source to the water heater, (electricity, gas, oil burner switch) and drain system following water heater manufacturer recommendations. 5. Install the expansion tank in the system (refer to Figure 1). a. The weight of the expansion tank filled with water is supported by the system piping. Therefore, it is important that, where appropriate, the piping has suitable bracing (strapping, hanger, brackets). b. The expansion tank may be installed vertically (preferred method) or horizontally. Caution: The tank must be properly supported in horizontal applications. c. This expansion tank, as all expansion tanks, may eventually leak. Do not install without adequate drainage provisions. 6. Turn on the water supply valve. 7. Open a hot water fixture and allow water flow until all air is removed from the system. 8. Reapply power to the water heater. 9. Open a hot water fixture to allow a slight flow until the hot water has reached operating temperature. 10. Recheck system pressure following Step 1.a through c. Caution: Pre-charge prior to installation in the sys- tem. Do not adjust the air pre-charge of the expan- sion tank with the system under pressure. The air pre-charge should only be adjusted under zero sys- tem pressure. If necessary, adjust the pressure reducing valve to the expansion tank pre-charge as determined in Step 2. Important! • A pressure relief valve sized and installed in accor- dance with local codes must be incorporated in the systems requiring a combined temperature and pressure safety relief valve. The temperature and pressure safety relief valve should be sized and installed in accordance with local codes. • Never plug a safety Relief Valve. Figure 1 (Optional Location) Support Tank in Optional Horizontal Position (Optional Location) Watts Pressure Gauge Watts Backflow Preventer Water Supply Watts Shutoff Valve Watts Pressure Reducing Valve Expansion Tank Water Heater To System Watts T&P Safety Relief Valve Floor Drain Discharge LineAir Inlet Valve IS-PLT 0932 EDP#2915054 © 2009 Watts USA: 815 Chestnut St., No. Andover, MA 01845-6098; www.watts.com Canada: 5435 North Service Rd., Burlington, ONT. L7L 5H7; www.wattscanada.ca Limited Warranty: Watts Regulator Co. (the “Company”) warrants each product to be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal usage for a period of one year from the date of original shipment. In the event of such defects within the warranty period, the Company will, at its option, replace or recondition the product without charge. THE WARRANTY SET FORTH HEREIN IS GIVEN EXPRESSLY AND IS THE ONLY WARRANTY GIVEN BY THE COMPANY WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT. THE COMPANY MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. THE COMPANY HEREBY SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. The remedy described in the first paragraph of this warranty shall constitute the sole and exclusive remedy for breach of warranty, and the Company shall not be responsible for any incidental, special or consequential damages, including without limitation, lost profits or the cost of repairing or replacing other property which is damaged if this product does not work properly, other costs resulting from labor charges, delays, vandalism, negligence, fouling caused by foreign material, damage from adverse water conditions, chemical, or any other circumstances over which the Company has no control. This warranty shall be invalidated by any abuse, misuse, misapplication, improper installation or improper maintenance or alteration of the product. Some States do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, and some States do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages. Therefore the above limitations may not apply to you. This Limited Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may have other rights that vary from State to State. You should consult applicable state laws to determine your rights. SO FAR AS IS CONSISTENT WITH APPLICABLE STATE LAW, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES THAT MAY NOT BE DISCLAIMED, INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO ONE YEAR FROM THE DATE OF ORIGINAL SHIPMENT. A Watts Water Technologies Company INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR 897 SERVICE SINK FAUCET INSTRUCCIONES PARA LA INSTALACIÓN DEL GRIFO 897 PARA FREGADERO DE SERVICIO DIRECTIVES DE POSE DU ROBINET MÉLANGEUR DE POSTE D’EAU 897 Last As Long As the Building INSTALLATION SHOULD BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH LOCAL PLUMBING CODES. FLUSH ALL PIPES THOROUGHLY BEFORE INSTALLATION. LA INSTALACIÓN DEBE EFECTUARSE EN CONFORMIDAD CON LOS CÓDIGOS LOCALES DE PLOMERÍA. LAVE CON ABUNDANCIA DE AGUA TODAS LAS TUBERÍAS ANTES DE LA INSTALACIÓN. L'INSTALLATION DOIT ÊTRE CONFORME AUX CODES LOCAUX EN MATIÈRE DE PLOMBERIE PURGER SOIGNEUSEMENT TOUS LES TUYAUX AVANT L'INSTALLATION. ADA Compliant INDEX 897 Service Sink Faucet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 “Quaturn”Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Care and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11 ÍNDICE Grifo 897 Para Fregadero de Servicio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Cartuchos “Quaturn” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Cuidado y Mantenimiento . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Notas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11 INDEX Robinet Mélangeur de Poste D’eau 897 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Cartouches “Quaturn” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Entretien . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11 3 897 Service Sink INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS REFER TO PAGE 6 FOR ILLUSTRATION. 1. Water supplies must be shut off. Supply lines must have 1/2" NPT male threaded ends and should protrude 5/8" – 7/8" from the finished wall on 8" centers. Supply lines must be secured to support the faucet. 2. Apply pipe sealant to the 1/2" NPT threads of the supply lines. 3. Remove supply arms from faucet and screw onto supply lines. (See Fig. 1) Position the supply arms so they line up with the faucet inlets (8" center to center). NOTE: The faucet must be mounted level, adjust supply arms as necessary. 4. Place the flanges over the supply arms and against the finished wall. (See Fig. 1) 5. Make sure inlet gasket is sitting in place within the union nut. (See Fig. 1) Attach faucet to supply arms and tighten union nut securely. 6. Remove the set screw from the brace rod. Place the brace rod in the slot on the spout and reattach the set screw using 3/32" hex key wrench. (See Fig. 2) 7. Place brace flange against the finished wall and center it with the spout. Secure the flange to the wall using (2) wood screws provided. NOTE: Finished wall must be supported where the brace flange mounts to the wall to provide maximum support. 8. Turn on water supply and check supply lines and faucet connections for leaks. SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS 1. The faucet is furnished with integral supply stops. To shut off water supply, screw stops in using 5/16" hex key wrench until water is shut off. Open the supply stop no more than three (3) complete turns. NOTE: Stop can unscrew completely causing water to spray out from the stop opening. 2. For adjustment of cartridges, refer to page 7. 4 Grifo 897 Para Fregadero de Servicio INSTRUCCIONES PARA LA INSTALACIÓN EN LA PAGINA 6 HALLARÁ LA ILUSTRACIÓN. 1. Asegure que el suministro ha sido interrumpido / cerrado. Las líneas de suministro de agua tienen que tener una rosca de cabo macho de 1/2" NPT (12.7 mm) y tiene que sobresalir 5/8"–7/8" (15.87 mm – 22.2 mm) desde la pared acabada en centros de 8" (203 mm). Las líneas de suministro de agua tienen que estar aseguradas para sostener el grifo. 2. Aplique sellador de cañerías en la rosca de 1.2" NTP (12.7 mm) de las líneas de suministro de agua. 3. Quite los tubos de suministro de agua desde el grifo y sujete con los tornillos en las líneas de suministro de agua. (Vea la figura 1) Coloque los tubos de suministro de agua de manera que estén alineados con los agujeros de entrada del grifo (8" [203 mm] centro a centro). NOTA: El grifo tiene que estar montado en nivel, por favor ajuste los tubos de suministro de agua si es necesario. 4. Instale el reborde conector sobre los tubos de suministro de agua y contra la pared acabada. (Vea la figura 1) 5. Asegure que el empaque de entrada está asentado en su lugar dentro de la tuerca de unión. ((Vea la figura 1) Conecte el grifo a los tubos de suministro de agua y apriete firmemente la tuerca de unión. 6. Quite el tornillo de ajustamiento desde la varilla abrazadera. Ponga la varilla abrazadera en la ranura del surtidor y vuelva a conectar los tornillos de ajustamiento usando la llave de 3/32" (1.59 mm) para tuercas Hex. (Vea la figura 2) 7. Ponga el reborde conector de la abrazadera contra la pared acabada y en el centro con el surtidor. Asegure el reborde conector en la pared usando los dos (2) tornillos suministrados. NOTA: La pared acabada tiene que estar soportada donde el reborde conector se monta con la pared para proveer un soporte máximo. 8. Abra la llave de paso del suministro de agua y compruebe las líneas de suministro y el grifo para detectar si existe alguna fuga. INSTRUCCIONES PARA EL SERVICIO 1. El grifo viene con interruptores de paso del suministro integrales. Para interrumpir el suministro del agua, en tornille los interruptores usando un llave tipo Hex de 5/16"(7.94 mm) hasta que el suministro de agua es interrumpido. Abra el interruptor de suministro de agua no más que tres (3) vueltas completas. NOTA: Los interruptores de suministro de agua pueden ser destornillados completamente causando que el agua salga desde la abertura del interruptor. 2. Para ajustar los cartuchos, refiérase a las páginas 7. Robinet Mélangeur de Poste D’eau 897 DIRECTIVES DE POSE REPORTEZ-VOUS À LA PAGE 6 POUR ILLUSTRATION. 1. Couper l’alimentation en eau. Les conduites d’alimentation doivent avoir des extrémités à filetage mâle de 12,7 mm (1/2 po) NPT et doivent saillir de 15,87 mm à 22,2 mm du mur fini, 203 mm centre à centre. Fixer les conduites d’alimentation pour soutenir le robinet mélangeur. 2. Appliquer du produit d’étanchéité sur les filets de 12,7 mm (1/2 po) NPT des conduites d’alimentation. 3. Déposer les embouts d’alimentation du robinet mélangeur et les visser sur les conduites d’alimentation. (Voir fig. 1) Positionner les embouts d’alimentation pour qu’ils soient alignés avec les orifices d’admission du robinet mélangeur (203 mm centre à centre). NOTA : Le robinet mélangeur doit être à l’horizontale ; au besoin, régler les embouts d’alimentation. 4. Placer les brides sur les embouts d’alimentation et contre le mur fini. (Voir fig. 1) 5. S’assurer que le joint d’admission est en appui dans l’écrou-union. (Voir fig. 1) Fixer le robinet mélangeur aux embouts d’alimentation et bien serrer l’écrou-union. 6. Déposer la vis d'arrêt de la tige de renfort. Placer la tige de renfort dans la fente du support et reposer la vis d’arrêt avec une clé hexagonale de 1,59 mm (3/32 po). (Voir fig. 2) 7. Placer la bride contre le mur fini et la centrer par rapport au support. Fixer la bride au mur au moyen des deux vis à bois fournies. NOTA : Soutenir le mur fini à l’endroit où la bride y est fixée, pour assurer un soutien maximal. 8. Ouvrir l’alimentation en eau et vérifier l’étanchéité au raccordement des conduites d’alimentation et du robinet mélangeur. DIRECTIVES D’ENTRETIEN 1. Le robinet mélangeur fourni est équipé de butées d’alimentation intégrées. Pour couper l’alimentation en eau, serrer les butées avec une clé hexagonale de 7,94 mm (5/16 po). Dévisser la butée d’alimentation d’au plus trois tours complets. NOTA : La butée peut se dévisser complètement et provoquer le jaillissement de l’eau. 2. Pour le réglage des cartouches, consulter les pages 8. 5 6 FIGURE 1 FIGURA 1 FIGURE 1 FIGURE 2 FIGURA 2 FIGURE 2 1) FINISHED WALL PARED ACABADA MUR FINI 2) FLANGE REBORDE DE CONECCIÓN BRIDE 3) GASKET ARO DE EMPAQUETADURA JOINT 4) SUPPLY ARM TUBO DE SUMINISTRO EMBOUT D’ALIMENTATION 1) BRACE ROD ASSEMBLY MONTAJE DE LA VARILLA ABRAZADERA TIGE DE RENFORT 2) SPOUT SURTIDOR SUPPORT 3) SET SCREW TORNILLO DE AJUSTAMIENTO VIS D’ARRÊT 2 1 3 4 1 2 3 7 “Quaturn” Cartridges INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS REFER TO PAGE 8 FOR ILLUSTRATION. 1. Always place a new cartridge in the closed position when installing into valve body. 2. TO INSTALL RIGHT HAND CARTRIDGE, push cartridge into body until it seats. Add cap nut and tighten HAND TIGHT. Add handle. 3. Hold handle in CLOSED POSITION and fully tighten cap nut to 15-25 FT. LB. torque. 4. TO INSTALL LEFT HAND CARTRIDGE, push cartridge into body until it seats. Add cap nut and tighten HAND TIGHT. Add handle. 5. Hold handle in OPEN POSITION and fully tighten cap nut to 15-25 FT. LB. torque. 6. Return handle in closed position and check handle alignment. NOTE:Cartridges are stamped “LH” to designate left hand and “RH” to designate right hand. Cartuchos “Quaturn” INSTRUCCIONES DE INSTALACIÓN EN LA PAGINA 8 HALLARÁ LA ILUSTRACIÓN. 1. Coloque siempre un cartucho nuevo en la posición cerrada al instalarlo en el cuerpo de la válvula. 2. PARA INSTALAR UN CARTUCHO DERECHO, empuje al cartucho hacia dentro del cuerpo hasta que quede completamente alojado en él. Añada la tuerca tapa hasta que quede apretada al tacto. Añada el mango. 3. Sostenga el mango en la POSICION CERRADA y apriete totalmente la tuerca tapa con un efecto de torsión de 15-25 FT/LB (2-3.45 kilográmetros). 4. PARA INSTALAR UN CARTUCHO IZQUIERDO, empuje el cartucho hacia dentro del cuerpo hasta que quede completamente alojado en él. Añada la tuerca tapa y déle vuelta hasta que quede APRETADA AL TACTO. Añada el mango. 5. Sostenga el mango en la POSICIÓN ABIERTA y apriete totalmente la tuerca tapa con un efecto de torsión de 15-25 FT/LB (2-3.45 kilográmetros). 6. Regrese el mango a la posición cerrada y compruebe la alineación del mango. NOTA:Los mangos llevan grabadas las letras "LH" para designar el lado izquierdo y las letras "RH" para designar el lado detecho. 8 Cartouches “Quaturn” INSTRUCTIONS D'INSTALLATION REPORTEZ-VOUS À LA PAGE 8 POUR ILLUSTRATION. 1. Placez toujours une nouvelle cartouche en position fermée lors de son installation dans le corps de la valve. 2. POUR INSTALLER UNE CARTOUCHE À DROITE, poussez la cartouche dans le corps jusqu’à ce qu’elle soit bien en place. Ajoutez l’écrou du haut et serrez À LA MAIN. Ajoutez la poignée. 3. Maintenez la poignée en POSITION FERMEE et vissez complètement l’écrou du haut à 15-25 PIEDS/LB (2-3,45 kg) de torque. 4. POUR INSTALLER UNE CARTOUCHE À GAUCHE, poussez la cartouche dans le corps jusqu’à ce qu’elle soit bien en place. Ajoutez l’écrou du haut et serrez À LA MAIN. Ajoutez la poignée. 5. Maintenez la poignée en POSITION OUVERTE et vissez complètement l’écrou du haut à 15-25 PIEDS/LB (2-3,45 kg) de torque. 6. Faites revenir la poignée en position fermée et vérifier son alignement. REMARQUE :Les cartouches sont marquées “LH” pour dEesigner le côté gauche et “RH” pour désigner le côté droit. EXPOSED 1-100XT LEFT HAND 1-099XT RIGHT HAND EXPUESTO I-100XT IZQUIERDO I-099XT DERECHO À DÉCOUVERT 1-100XT GAUCHE 1-099XT DROIT CONCEALED 377XTLH LEFT HAND 377XTRH RIGHT HAND OCULTO 377XTLH IZQUIERDO 377XTRH DERECHO DISSIMULÉ 377XTLH GAUCHE 377XTRH DROIz MARK MARCA MARQUE “QUATURN” Care and Maintenance All Chicago Faucet fittings are designed and engineered to meet or exceed industry performance standards. Care should be taken cleaning this product. Do not use abrasive cleaners, chemicals or solvents as they can result in surface damage. Use only mild soap with warm water for cleaning and protecting the life of Chicago Faucet fittings. Cuidado y Mantenimiento Todos los accesorios de Chicago Faucet son diseñados y fabricados para satisfacer o superar las normas de calidad de la industria. Se debe tener cuidado al limpiar este producto. No use limpiadores abrasivos, químicos o solventes, puesto que pueden dañar la superficie. Sólo use un jabón suave y agua tibia para limpiar y proteger la vida útil de los accesorios de Chicago Faucet. Entretien Tous les produits de robinetterie Chicago Faucet sont conçus et fabriqués de manière a’ atteindre et dépasser les normes de l'industrie. Le nettoyage de ce produit nécessite certaines précautions. Ne pas utiliser de nettoyant abrasif, de produit chimique ni de solvant: le fini du produit pourrait être altéré. Nettoyer les produits de robinetterie Chicago Faucets avec de l'eau tiède et un savon doux afin de prolonger leur vie utile. 1-800-TEC-TRUE For installation questions or other technical assistance call, 1-800-TEC-TRUE. Si tiene alguna pregunta respecto a la instalación o si desea asistencia técnica llame al 1-800-TEC-TRUE Pour toute question concernant l'installation ou d'autres détails techniques, composez 1-800-TEC-TRUE 9 The Chicago Faucet Company 2100 Clearwater Drive Des Plaines, IL 60018-5999 Phone 847/803-5000 • Fax: 847/298-3101 Last As Long As the Building T-297 11/00 CHICAGO FAUCET LIMITED WARRANTY The CHICAGO FAUCET COMPANY (“Chicago Faucets”) extends to the original consumer the following warranties for Genuine Chicago Faucets manufactured products and components, or other components under the Chicago Faucets Warranties, (collectively, the “Products”) used in commercial or residential applications: Lifetime Faucet Warranty The “Faucet”, defined as any metal cast, forged, stamped of formed portion of the Product, not including electronic or moving parts or water restricting components, or other components covered under the Chicago Faucet warranties, is warranted against manufacturing defects for the life of the Product. Five Year Cartridge Warranty - Commercial The “Cartridge”, defined as the metal portion of any Product typically referred to by the product numbers containing 1-099XT and 1-100X, excluding any rubber or plastic components, is warranted against manufacturing defects for a period of five (5) years from the date of Product purchase. All Cartridges included in Chicago Faucet’s Single Control or Shower Products are also warranted against manufacturing defects for a period of five (5) years from the date of Product purchase. Lifetime Cartridge Warranty - Residential For products used in residential applications, the “Cartridge”, as described above, is warranted for the lifetime of the faucet. One Year Finish Warranty - Commercial For Products used in commercial applications, the finish of the Product is warranted against manufacturing defects for a period of one (1) year from the date of Product purchase. Five Year Finish Warranty - Residential For Products used in residential applications, the finish of the Product is warranted against manufacturing defects for a period of five (5) years from the date of Product purchase. Other Warranties All other Products not covered above are warranted against manufacturing defects for a period of one (1) year from the Product purchase. Restrictions Apply For complete warranty details, contact your Chicago Faucets sales representative or Chicago Faucets, Consumer Affairs, 2100 S. Clearwater Drive, Des Plaines, Illinois, 60018. GARANTIA LIMITADA DE CHICAGO FAUCETS La CHICAGO FAUCET COMPANY ("Chicago Faucets") le otorga al comprador original las siguientes garantías para los productos y componentes auténticos fabricados por Chicago Faucets o demás componentes vendidos bajo las Garantías de Chicago Faucets (colectivamente denominados los "Productos") utilizados en aplicaciones comerciales o residenciales: Garantía de los Grifos de por vida El "Grifo" (definido como cualquier porción fundida, forjada, estampada o formada en metal del Producto, sin incluir piezas electrónicas o móviles ni tampoco los componentes que restrinjan el flujo del agua u otros componentes cubiertos bajo otras garantías de Chicago Faucets) está garantizado contra defectos de fabricación durante toda la vida del Producto. Garantía de los Cartuchos por cinco años - Aplicaciones Comerciales El "Cartucho" (definido como la porción metálica de cualquier Producto al que se le denomina típicamente por los números de producción que contienen 1-099XT y 1-100XT, excluyendo cualquier componente de plástico o de caucho) está garantizado contra defectos de fabricación durante un período de cinco (5) años contados a partir de la fecha de compra del Producto. Todos los Cartuchos incluidos en los Productos para Ducha (Shower) o los Productos de un Solo Control (Single Control) de Chicago Faucets también están garantizados contra defectos de fabricación durante un período de cinco (5) años contados a partir de la fecha de compra del Producto. Garantía de los Cartuchos de por vida - Aplicaciones Residenciales Para los Productos usados en aplicaciones residenciales, el "Cartucho", tal como se le describió en el párrafo anterior, está garantizado durante toda la vida del Grifo. Garantía del Acabado por un año - Aplicaciones Comerciales Para los Productos usados en aplicaciones comerciales, el acabado del Producto está garantizado contra defectos de fabricación durante un período de un (1) año contado a partir de la fecha de compra del Producto. Garantía del Acabado por cinco años - Aplicaciones Residenciales Para los Productos usados en aplicaciones residenciales, el acabado del Producto está garantizado contra defectos de fabricación durante un período de cinco (5) años contados a partir de la fecha de compra del Producto. Otras Garantías Todos los demás Productos que no están cubiertos por las disposiciones anteriores están garantizados contra defectos de fabricación durante un período de un (1) año contado a partir de la fecha de compra del Producto. Pueden Aplicarse Restricciones Para obtener detalles completos sobre las garantías, póngase en contacto con su representante de ventas de Chicago Faucets o directamente con Chicago Faucets, enviando una carta a: Consumer Affairs, 2100 S. Clearwater Drive, Des Plaines, Illinois, 60018. GARANTÍE LIMITÉE DU ROBINET CHÍCAGO FAUCETS CHICAGO FAUCET COMPANY ("Chicago Faucets") offre au consommateur original les garanties suivantes pour les produits et éléments voir authentiques fabriqués par Chicago Faucets, ou les autres éléments sous min. Garanties de Chicago Faucets, (ensemble, les "Produits") utilisés à des fins commerciales ou résidentielles: Garantie à vie du robinet Le "Robinet", defini comme toute partie en métal coulé, forgé, matricé ou ouvré du Produit, à l'exclusion des pièces électroniques ou mobiles ainsi que les éléments de restriction d'eau ou les éléments mentionnés dans les garanties de Chicago Faucet, est garantie à vie contre tout vice de fabrication. Garantie de cinq ans de la cartouche - utilisations commerciales La "Cartouche", defini comme la partie en métal de tout dont les numeros de référenca Produit contiennent 1-099XT et 1-100XT, à l'exclusion des éléments de caoutchouc ou de plastique, est garantie contre tout vice de fabrication pour une période de cinq (5) ans à compter de la date d'achat du Produit. Toutes les cartouches incluses dans les Produits à contrôle unique ou Produits pour la douche sont garanties aussi contre tout vice de fabrication pour une période de cinq (5) ans à compter de la date d'achat du Produit. Garantie à vie de la cartouche - utilisations résidentielles Pour les produits à usage résidentiel, la "Cartouche", defini ci-dessus, est garantie à vie contre tout vice de fabrication. Garantie d'un an - utilisations commerciales La finition des Produits utilisés à des fins commerciales est garantie contre tout vice de fabrication pour une période d'un (1) an à compter de la date d'achat du Produit. Garantie de cinq ans - utilisations résidentielles La finition des Produits à usage résidentiel est garantie contre tout vice de fabrication pour une période de cinq (5) ans à compter de la date d'achat du Produit. Autres garanties Les Produits qui ne sont pas mentionnés ci-dessus sont garantis contre tout vice de fabrication pour une période d'un (1) an à compter de la date d'achat du Produit. Certaines restrictions s’appliquent Pour obtenir des renseignements détaillés sur les garanties, contactez votre revendeur Chicago Faucets ou Chicago Faucets, Consumer Affairs, 2100 S. Clearwater Drive, Des Plaines, Illinois 60018. STORAGE TANK INSTALLATION and OPERATION MANUAL The information contained in this manual is intended for use by qualified professional installers, or service technicians. Consult your local expert for proper installation or service procedures. Save this manual for future reference. LST-I-O Rev E LOW LEAD CONTENT WARNING 2 Hazard definitions The following defined terms are used throughout this manual to bring attention to the presence of hazards of various risk levels or to important information concerning the life of the product. CAUTION CAUTION NOTICE DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury. CAUTION used without the safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in property damage. NOTICE indicates special instructions on installation, operation, or maintenance that are important but not related to personal injury or property damage. Contents CONTENTS........................................................................ 2 HAZARD DEFINITIONS ..................................................... 2 1. GENERAL INFORMATION ........................................... 3 Tank construction ...................................................... 3-4 2. INSTALLATION ............................................................. 5 Transporting and unpacking the unit ............................ 5 Examining the unit ....................................................... 5 Anchoring the unit ......................................................... 5 Recommended service clearances ............................. 5 Connecting the hot water source ............................... 5-6 Cold water supply ..........................................................6 Hot water outlet ............................................................ 6 Mixing valve .................................................................. 6 Aquastat / bulbwell ........................................................7 Piping the relief valve ................................................... 7 Drain ............................................................................. 7 Completing the installation ........................................... 7 3. OPERATION ................................................................. 8 Startup procedure ..........................................................8 Shutdown procedure ......................................................8 4. INSPECTION ................................................................ 9 5. MAINTENANCE .......................................................... 10 Flushing the tank ........................................................ 10 Cleaning the tank ................................................... 10-11 Magnesium anode rod inspection ............................... 12 Water piping and valve replacement ..................... 12-13 Temperature and pressure gauge replacement ......... 13 Notes ............................................................................14-15 Revision Notes .................................................. Back Cover Hot Water Can Scald! • Water heated to temperatures for clothes washing, dish washing, and other sanitizing needs can scald and cause permanent injury. • Children, elderly, and infirm or physically handicapped persons are more likely to be permanently injured by hot water. Never leave them unattended in a bathtub or shower. Never allow small children to use a hot water tap or draw their own bath. • If anyone using hot water in the building fits the above description, or if state laws or local codes require certain water temperatures at hot water taps, you must take special precautions: • Use lowest possible temperature setting. • Install some type of tempering device, such as an automatic mixing valve, at hot water tap or water heater. Automatic mixing valve must be selected and installed according to valve manufacturer’s recommendations and instructions. • Water passing out of drain valves may be extremely hot. To avoid injury: • Make sure all connections are tight. • Direct water flow away from any person. Protection Must Be Taken Against Excessive Temperature and Pressure! --Installation of a Temperature & Pressure (T&P) relief valve is required. WARNING DANGER Storage Tank Installation and Operation Manual This manual is intended to cover installation, operation, and maintenance procedures for Lochinvar’s Hot Water Storage Tank. Some storage tanks are built to meet customer specifications. Instructions may not be specific to every system. If questions are not answered by this manual, or if specific installation, operation, and/or maintenance procedures are not clearly understood, contact Lochinvar for clarification before proceeding. Most Hot Water Storage Tanks are designed for indoor use only, unless otherwise constructed by design specifications. It should be located on a level surface (no more than one-half degree of slope), capable of supporting the total weight of the unit when filled to capacity. The unit should be mounted to the floor following applicable architectural and local code requirements for the specific installation site. NOTE: Tanks do not come standard with floor tie downs. Seismic tie downs are available upon request. The high quality enamel paint, applied to the jacket of the unit, will provide years of protection against corrosion. If it is necessary to clean the outside of the unit, a mild cleaning agent should be used that will not damage the paint. For all piping connections, the use and/or type of joint compound or sealer on the joints should be determined by referring to local codes, accepted standards, and/or the requirements of the installing contractor. Tank construction Hot Water Storage Tanks are pre-engineered and pre-assembled complete with all fittings. And like every Lochinvar product, they are thoroughly tested to ensure proper performance from the moment they are installed. Gallon Capacities -- Lochinvar tanks are available in gallon capacities from 120 to 5000 gallons. Standard construction tanks from 120 to 940 gallons are maintained in regular inventory. Tanks over 1000 gallons are custom manufactured per order. Tank Orientation -- Lochinvar tanks are available in vertical or horizontal orientation. Tank Lining -- Lochinvar tanks are available in glass (standard) or cement (optional) linings, and unlined. ASME -- All Lochinvar storage tanks are constructed per ASME Section IV requirements, or Section VIII. Pressure Rating -- Lochinvar tanks are available in 125 psi working pressure (standard) or 150 psi working pressure (optional). Cathodic Protection -- All glass lined tanks are equipped with magnesium anodes to provide protection against corrosion. • Before using product, read and understand instructions. • Save these instructions for future reference. • All work must be performed by qualified personnel trained in the proper application, installation, and maintenance of the water systems in accordance with all applicable codes and ordinances. • To prevent serious burns, wear heat resistant gloves when handling hot equipment. Failure to follow this warning could cause property damage, personal injury, or death. 1 General information The following chart (Table 1A) details the relationship of water temperature and time with regard to scald injury and may be used as a guide in determining the safest water temperature for your applications. APPROXIMATE TIME / TEMPERATURE RELATIONSHIPS IN SCALDS 120°F More than 5 minutes 125°F 1 1/2 to 2 minutes 130°F About 30 seconds 135°F About 10 seconds 140°F Less than 5 seconds 145°F Less than 3 seconds 150°F About 1 1/2 seconds 155°F About 1 second Table 1A Approximate Time / Temperature Scald Chart 3 WARNING Storage Tank Installation and Operation Manual 4 Manway - A 12" x 16" manway is provided as an option on glass lined tanks and is standard on cement lined tanks. Four by six inch (4" x 6") hand holes are available on tanks under 300 gallons. Manways may not be installed on tanks under 30" diameter. Jacketing -- Lochinvar tanks are available as “Bare”, having no jacket or insulation. Tanks with a round sheet metal jacket are insulated with a 2" thick foam mixture that has an R value of R-16. Square sheet metal jacketed tanks are insulated with a 3 1/2" thick fiberglass wrap that has an R value of R-13. These tanks are for indoor installation only. Outdoor rated tanks are available with 2" thick foam insulation with no exposed metal surfaces. All jacketed storage tanks meet the energy efficiency requirements of the latest edition of ASHRAE 90.1. Relief Valve Tapping -- A tapping is provided for the installation of a field supplied ASME safety relief valve. Hot Water Recirculation Tappings -- Lochinvar storage tanks will have two (2) tappings on the tank to provide recirculation piping between the tank and a hot water source. These tappings may be ordered in custom sizes, either threaded or flanged. Extra tappings are also available upon request. Hot Water Outlet -- A Hot Water Outlet Tapping is positioned on the top of the tank for connection to the building system. This tapping may be ordered in custom sizes, either threaded or flanged. Extra tappings are also available upon request. Drain -- A tapping or drain pipe will be connected to a low point on the tank for drainage. Temperature and Pressure Gauge (optional) -- Lochinvar tanks may be fitted with an optional temperature and pressure gauge. Aquastat Bulbwell -- All Lochinvar tanks are provided with a bulbwell for the location of control sensors. Five-Year Limited Tank Warranty -- Provides warranty protection against tank failure (see warranty for details). One-Year Limited Warranty -- Parts and accessories (see warranty for details). Areas of potential danger: 1. All water lines, joints, and valves. 2. All power connections and cables. 3. If the unit has been in operation, allow the water in the heater and all components and surfaces (tank surface, water piping, etc.,) to cool before starting the procedure. 4. Assure that all power to associated water heating equipment has been shut off and disconnected before attempting any procedures. 5. Assure that all incoming and outgoing water lines have been shut off at the manual shutoff valves. WARNING Heated water presents situations that can be very dangerous due to the fact they are under pressure and at very high temperatures. To avoid possible injury or death, use common sense and follow all accepted and recommended procedures when performing installation, operation, and maintenance procedures. The combination of electricity and water can pose a very dangerous situation. Assure that all power has been shut off / disconnected before attempting any installation or maintenance procedures. 1 General information WARNING WARNING Storage Tank Installation and Operation Manual Transporting and unpacking the unit Each jacketed Lochinvar Hot Water Storage Tank is crated as necessary at the factory. The crating is designed to provide protection for the unit during transportation, and to provide a safe means by which to lift and move the unit with a fork lift or hand truck. Examining the unit After the unit has been uncrated and set in place, it should be carefully examined to assure the tank has not been damaged during shipping. If any evidence of damage is detected that could affect the safe operation of the unit, contact Lochinvar , LLC., or your authorized sales representative, to report the damage and to receive instructions on how to proceed. After the unit and all components have been inspected for damage, it is suggested that all optional or independent pressure and temperature control components be checked to assure that they meet or exceed design specifications. If any discrepancy is found, contact Lochinvar, LLC., or your authorized representative, before proceeding with the installation. Anchoring the unit The unit should be anchored to the floor, following applicable architectural / local code requirements, or accepted standards for the specific installation site. The unit should be installed in a location with sufficient clearance for service and repair. Check local codes for Seismic anchoring requirements. If further assistance is needed, call the Lochinvar Technical Service Department and request a Seismic Report. On horizontal tanks, the saddles should be located 6" to 12" from the head/shell seam. Both saddles must be placed using the same dimensions (FIG. 2-1). If there are tappings in the recommended space or if there are any concerns about the proper location for the saddles, please contact the manufacturer. Before making any connections of water inlet or outlet to the unit, assure that all piping is clean and free of foreign material or scale. This can usually be accomplished by “blowing out” the pipe. Any foreign material or scale entering the unit can adversely affect operation and performance. The two (2) tappings on the lower side of a vertical tank or the two (2) tappings on the bottom of a horizontal tank shall provide recirculation between the tank and the water heating source. See example piping diagram between a storage tank and an indirect gas fired water heater (FIG’s 2-2 and 2-3). NOTICE See the Water Heater’s Installation and Operation manual for specific piping diagrams that match the inlet / outlet water tappings on the tank to the inlet / outlet water tappings on the water heater. Tapping locations on the water heater may vary by product or manufacturer. Figure 2-2_Vertical Tank Piping Diagram, Non-Condensing COPPER-FIN WATER HEATER BUILDING RETURN BUILDING HOT WATER SUPPLY STORAGE TANK COLD WATER SUPPLY MIXING VALVE DRAIN OUTLET RELIEF VALVE RELIEF VALVE INLET THERMOMETER EXPANSION TANK 2 Installation Connecting the hot water source WARNING The upper side tapping on a vertical storage tank is the tank’s water recirculation inlet. The lower side tapping on a vertical storage tank is the tank’s water recirculation outlet. On a horizontal tank, either recirculation tapping can be used for recirculation inlet or outlet. Recommended service clearances: • 24 inches around the magnesium anode rod(s) • 24 inches around the manway or hand hole Figure 2-1_Saddle locations SADDLES 6” MIN TO 12” MAX 5 Storage Tank Installation and Operation Manual 6 Hot water outlet The next step in the installation process is to connect the hot water system piping to the hot water outlet port. The hot water supply tapping is located on top of the tank. A manual shutoff valve should be installed downstream on the hot water outlet line as an isolation device in case the unit must be disconnected from the system. The shutoff valve should be in the closed position and remain so until the installation is complete. Mixing valve Field supplied. An anti-scald mixing valve is recommended when storing domestic hot water above 115°F. 2 Installation NOTICE For all piping connections, the use and / or type of joint compound or sealer on the joint should be determined by referring to local codes, accepted practices, or the requirements of the installing contractor. Figure 2-4_Vertical Tank Piping Diagram, Condensing Cold water supply The next step in the installation process is to connect the cold water supply to the recirculation piping between the heater(s) and the tank(s). NOTICE If the cold water supply to the system is equipped with an in-line check valve or backflow preventer, a suitable expansion tank must be installed in the cold water supply line. The location of the cold water supply connection will vary based on the type of water heater installed. If a non-condensing water heater is installed, connect the cold water supply to the recirculation pipe on the water heater’s outlet. This allows the cold water to mix with the stored water, so tempered water is recirculated back into the non-condensing water heater. If a condensing water heater is installed, connect the cold water supply to the recirculation pipe on the water heater’s inlet. This allows the cold water to enter the condensing water heater fi rst for high-effi ciency condensing operation. Review the water heater’s installation manual to confi rm the ideal connection for the cold water supply. Figure 2-3_Horizontal Tank Piping Diagram - Non-Condensing COPPER-FIN WATER HEATER BUILDING RETURN BUILDING HOT WATER SUPPLY STORAGE TANK COLD WATER SUPPLY MIXING VALVE DRAIN OUTLET INLET RELIEF VALVE RELIEF VALVE THERMOMETER EXPANSION TANK Storage Tank Installation and Operation Manual 7 Do not install a manual shut off valve between the relief valve and the discharge. Doing so could cause serious injury or death if the relief valve released and the manual valve was closed. This would cause excessive buildup of pressure in the storage tank which could result in an explosion. Drain The tanks’ drain connection must be piped to a suitable floor drain. Brass drain cocks are acceptable. A brass full port ball valve is recommended to improve water flow. Completing installation Installation of the Lochinvar Hot Water Storage Tank is now complete. All documentation supplied with the unit should be passed along to maintenance personnel for future reference. Piping the relief valve (Relief valve is field supplied) All Lochinvar Hot Water Storage Tanks are equipped with a relief valve tapping on the tank. The valve should be piped to a discharge line leading to a suitable drain. Piping the pressure relief valve to a suitable drain will prevent both water and heat damage to the unit, as well as reduce the risk of injury from released heated water. The pipe must be of adequate size to properly handle the capacity of the relief valve and discharge line. Check local codes to assure compliance. If a check valve has been installed on the inlet water line, thermal expansion may take place causing build up of excessive pressure when the water is being heated. This expansion will cause the relief valve to open, releasing hot water to the discharge line. A properly sized expansion tank must be installed to protect the system from water expansion. WARNING 2 Installation (continued) Aquastat bulbwell Review the controls for the hot water source equipment. Some equipment or systems designs will require an independent aquastat (field supplied) to control the equipment. The aquastat may be surface mounted onto the sheet metal jacket of the tank or a nearby surface. The water sensing probe may be installed in the dry bulbwell supplied with all Lochinvar Hot Water Storage Tanks. The equipment may employ a water sensing thermistor. The thermistor would be installed into the dry bulbwell and wired back to the hot water equipment. In installations with more than one water heater, more than one probe may need to be installed in the storage tank. A field supplied brass or stainless steel bulbwell may be installed to accommodate multiple sensing probes. The standard bulbwell has a bulb area depth of 2 15/16" and can accommodate a sensor/bulb that is 3/8" in diameter. An optional “Super-Bulbwell” has a two chamber bulb area. The inner chamber depth is 3" and can also accommodate a 3/8" diameter sensor/bulb. The outer chamber has a 3 5/16" depth and can easily fit a 3/8" diameter sensor/bulb plus the wires or capillary tube from the inner chamber sensor/bulb. Contact Lochinvar customer service for information on special, oversized bulbwells. Storage Tank Installation and Operation Manual 8 After all installation procedures have been completed, and all water piping to the energy source and power connections have been double checked, the unit is ready for operation. The following Startup Procedure focuses on the storage tank. Check the Installation and Operation Manual of the hot water source for additional startup and shutdown procedures. Startup procedure 1. Assure that all manual shutoff valves are closed. 2. Slowly open the manual shutoff valve on the cold water supply line and the valves in the hot water source recirculation piping. Check to assure that there are not leaks at the valve or any joints. Allow the tank to fill with water. As the tank is filling, hold the relief valve open to allow air to bleed out of the tank. Hot water faucets at the highest location in the building should also be opened. This will speed the filling process. Make sure the tank is full of water and free of air. 3. Open the manual shutoff valves. 4. Turn on the recirculation pump between the water heater and the tank. After the power to the pump is turned on verify that the pump is working. If the pump is an oil lubricated unit, verify proper oiling. Heated water presents situations that can be very dangerous because of the high temperatures and pressures. Use common sense and follow all accepted and recommended procedures when performing installation, operation, and maintenance procedures to avoid possible injury or death. Shutdown procedure 1. Turn off all power to the circulating pump and the hot water source controls. 2. Close all valves in the system in the following order: • the hot water outlet line; • the recirculation water piping 3. Relieve the pressure where possible. 4. After the system has cooled, drain the unit by opening the tank drain valve and holding the relief valve in the open position. This will prevent the formation of a vacuum and increase the drainage flow. 5. Proceed with the required maintenance or repairs. 6. After performing the required maintenance or repairs, return the unit to operation by following the Startup Procedure. 5. Follow the Startup procedure for the water heater to initiate a call for heat. Adjust the operating temperature control to the desired operating temperature and set the safety high limit. 6. As the unit is heating the water, carefully re-inspect water recirculation piping and the tank hot water outlet for signs of leakage. 7. After the unit has reached operating temperature, re-inspect all joints for signs of leakage. In addition, check all gauges and controls to verify that the water temperature and pressure are within design specifications. 8. The unit is now ready for normal operation. 3 Operation WARNING It is recommended that the tank be flushed before startup in order to clear the vessel of loose particles and material from the installation process. This is strongly recommended for cement lined tanks. To flush the tank, see “Flushing the storage tank” instructions in the “Maintenance” section of this manual. NOTICE Tank Pre-Start Flush Storage Tank Installation and Operation Manual 9 The following table summarizes the recommended time intervals for inspections of the tank, components, water piping and power connections. RECOMMENDED INSPECTIONS To Be Inspected Time Interval Per Manufacturer Specs Weekly Monthly Quarterly Annually Circulating Pump 9 Gauges - Pressure & Temperature 9 Lines - Inlet, Outlet, & Return 9 Pressure Relief Valve 9 Shutoff Valves - Manual 9 Temperatures - Water & Operating 9 Thermometer 9 Magnesium Anode Rods 9 Interior for Sediment or Scale 9 Flush tank at six (6) month intervals 9 4 Inspection Storage Tank Installation and Operation Manual 10 5 Maintenance Figure 5-2_Horizontal Tank T&P GAUGE CONNECTORS (OPTIONAL) 3" NPT COLD WATER INLET **MANWAY (OPTIONAL) LIFTING LUGS (OPTIONAL) 1 1/4" T&P RELIEF VALVE OPENING 2" NPT* HOT WATER OUTLET DRAIN VALVE 9" *3" NPT HOT WATER OUTLET ON 1250 GALLON AND UP. ** STANDARD ON CEMENT, AND REQUIRED ON TANKS WITH BUNDLES 48" AND LONGER. END VIEW SIDE VIEW Cleaning the storage tank The mineral accumulation in an un-fired tank will be in a soft sediment form that can be removed by a regular cleaning of the lower portion of the tank. Many tanks will have a hand hole or a larger manway to allow access to the interior of the tank for complete removal of accumulated sediment. An access opening to remove the manway or hand hole is provided in the exterior jacket. The sheetmetal jacket components are removed with hand tools. The opening will be in the bottom portion of a vertical tank and on the end of a horizontal tank (see FIG’s 5-1 and 5-2 below). Figure 5-1_Vertical Tank C A 1 1/4" T&P RELIEF VALVE OPENING T&P GAUGE CONNECTORS (OPTIONAL) 3" NPT AQUASTAT 2" NPT* HOT WATER OUTLET **MANWAY (OPTIONAL) **Manway standard on cement and required on tanks with bundles 48” and larger. A new tank installation should have a regular inspection program set up. The first inspection should be within the first three months of operation. Once the tendency to accumulate sediment has been established, the inspection program can be modified to suit the water conditions. Typical inspection programs flush the tank at six-month intervals and clean the tank in yearly intervals. Deliming solvents or acid type flush agents are not recommended for use in lined storage tanks. These chemical cleaners are usually designed for use in non-potable systems such as heating boilers. These chemicals may be aggressive and cause damage to the tank lining and deteriorate the magnesium anodes supplied in glass-lined storage tanks. Hot water will be released under pressure. Avoid contact with the hot discharge water to prevent the risk of severe scald injury. Flushing the storage tank Since mineral accumulation occurs in an un-fired tank it will be in a soft sediment form. This soft sediment can be removed by a regular flushing of the lower portion of the tank. To flush the tank, follow these steps: 1. Turn off electrical power to the circulating pump and any other tank accessories. 2. Close the valve on the hot water outlet on top of the storage tank. 3. Ensure that the drain located on the bottom of the tank is routed to a floor drain with adequate capacity to allow the tank to be flushed. 4. Open the drain valve and allow the incoming cold water to flush the soft sediment out the bottom of the storage tank. Use extreme caution, as the water exiting the tank drain may be very hot. Avoid contact with the hot discharge water to prevent the risk of severe scald injury. 5. Observe the color of the water initially discharged from the tank drain. This water will generally be milky or slightly discolored by the sediment discharge. Allow the drain to run until the water runs clear. 6. Close the drain valve on the tank. 7. Open the hot water outlet valve on top of the tank. 8. Open an adjacent hot water tap to purge any air that may have entered the storage tank during the draining process. Close the hot water tap if no air discharge is observed. 9. Turn on electric power to the circulating pump and other electrical components if necessary. 10. Observe tank and piping to ensure all components are functioning properly. WARNING 11 Storage Tank Installation and Operation Manual 5 Maintenance (continued) 10. Replace the jacket cover over the manway or hand hole. Over tightening can result in cutting the gasket and allowing a water leak to occur. CAUTION To clean the tank, follow these steps (reference FIG.’s 5-3 and 5-4): 1. Turn off electrical power to the circulating pump and other electrical components if necessary. 2. Close the valve on the hot water outlet on top of the storage tank and the cold water supply to the system. 3. Ensure that the drain located on the bottom of the tank is routed to a floor drain with adequate capacity to allow the tank to be drained. 4. Open the drain valve and open a vent to allow the air to enter the tank (manually opening the relief valve will usually accomplish this). Use extreme caution, as the water exiting the tank drain may be very hot. Avoid contact with the hot discharge water to prevent the risk of severe scald injury. 5. Allow the tank to drain completely. 6. Remove the jacket cover over the manway or hand hole. Remove the bolt(s) securing the tank access opening. Use a flashlight to observe the sediment collected in the tank. 7. Use hand tools to remove all sediment from the interior of the tank. Use care not to damage the interior lining of the storage tank. 8. Use a water hose to flush the remaining sediment from the interior surfaces of the tank and ensure that all debris is removed. Scale or sediment allowed to reach the potable system can foul valves, pumps, strainers, and other water fixtures. Ensure that the tank interior is clean before refilling the vessel. 9. Install a new gasket on the manway or hand hole to prevent any possible leaks. Tighten the gasket properly to prevent leaks. NOTICE For this procedure, a new manway gasket or hand hole gasket should be acquired before beginning this procedure. 11. Close the drain and open the cold water supply and hot water outlet. If the relief valve was used for a vent ensure that it is now closed. Open the closest hot water valve to allow the air in the tank to vent as water enters the vessel. Close the valve opened for a vent when water flows from the valve. 12. Check the manway or hand hole and all related piping for any water leaks. 13. Turn on electric power to the circulating pump and other electric components if necessary. 14. Turn on the water heater. 15. Open the valves in the hot water source recirculation piping. 16. Observe tank and piping to ensure all components are functioning properly. Water piping and valve replacement If any of the inlet, outlet, return lines, or shutoff valves are damaged and must be replaced, follow the steps outlined in this section. The combination of electricity and water can pose a very dangerous situation. Turn off / disconnect all electric power before attempting any maintenance procedure. 1. Follow Steps 1 through 5 of the Shutdown Procedure on page 8 to take the hot water source off-line before attempting to replace damaged lines or shutoff valves. 2. Make certain that the hot water source recirculation valves and hot water outlet valves have been shut off; that the tank has been completely drained; that the pressure has been bled from both the water and energy source systems; and that all components and surfaces have cooled. 3. Carefully break the joint between the unit and the line or valve to be replaced. 4. Remove the section of the line or valve to be replaced. 5. Replace the damaged section of the line or valve. 6. Reconnect the line or valve to the unit. Follow recommendations contained in the manufacturer’s documentation, local codes, or accepted contractor practices as to the use and /or type of joint compound or sealer at the connections. 7. Follow the Startup Procedures on page 8 to place the unit back on-line. Carefully check all connections for any sign of leakage. While it might seem feasible to replace inlet and outlet water lines, and shutoff valves without shutting down the entire unit, it is not advised. Unless the unit is completely shut down, and the water and the energy source are isolated from the system, failure of a manual shutoff valve during the replacement process could result in serious injury. ANODE RODS FRONT VIEW Figure 5-4_Vertical Storage Tank w/Anodes NOTICE Anode rods showing excessive decomposition may indicate electrolysis. An earth ground should be attached to the vessel to divert stray current and prevent tank damage. Service Note: Replace the anode(s) when more than six (6) inches of the core wire is exposed at either end of the rod. WARNING WARNING 5 Maintenance Storage Tank Installation and Operation Manual Magnesium anode rod inspection Glass lined storage tanks have a magnesium anode(s) to provide cathodical protection of the lining and minimize corrosion. Aggressive water conditions in some areas of the country may accelerate the deterioration of the anode(s). The anode(s) should be periodically removed and inspected to determine if replacement is necessary. The tank must be valved off from the system and fully drained to remove an anode for inspection. Anodes are supplied in threaded fittings on the top head of small vertical storage tanks. Top mounted anodes may be accessed by removing the plastic plugs in the jacket top. Medium sized tanks with round jackets provide an opening for individual anode rod access. Large vertical storage tanks and horizontal storage tanks have multiple anodes installed in threaded tappings along the length of the tank. These anodes may be accessed by removing a jacket panel and/or corner post corresponding to the mounting point of the anodes. Adequate service clearance is required to allow removal of an anode. Field insulated tanks should make considerations for access to the anode rods. T & P RELIEF VALVE HOT WATER OUTLET ANODE RODS COLD WATER INLETS DRAIN MANWAY OPTIONAL Figure 5-3_Horizontal Storage Tank w/Anodes 12 13 5 Maintenance Storage Tank Installation and Operation Manual The combination of electricity and water can pose a very dangerous situation. Turn off / disconnect all electric power before attempting any maintenance procedure. 1. Follow Steps 1 through 5 of the Shutdown Procedure on page 8 to take the unit off-line before attempting to replace the water temperature / pressure gauge. 2. Carefully unscrew the water temperature / pressure gauge from the port in the tank. 3. Install the new gauge into the port in the tank in place of the old one removed in Step 2. Follow recommendations contained in the manufacturer’s documentation, local codes, or accepted contractor practices as to the use of joint compound or sealer at the connections. 4. Follow the Startup Procedures on page 8 to place the unit back on-line. Carefully check all connections for any sign of leakage. Temperature / pressure gauge (optional) replacement If the temperature / pressure gauge for the water tank is not functioning correctly and must be replaced, follow the procedure outlined below. WARNING Notes 14 Storage Tank Installation and Operation Manual 15 Notes Storage Tank Installation and Operation Manual Revision Notes: Revision A (ECO #C04161) initial release. Revision B (ECO C12972) reflects the addition of the CSA Low Lead logo to the manual cover. Revision C (ECO C13309) reflects the addition of FIG. 2-1 on page 5 and a note about saddle location. Revision D (ECO C16201) reflects the update of the logo and removal of the gas warning on the manual cover, as well as the addition of the “Tank Pre-Start Flush” notice on page 7. Revision E (ECO C16466) reflects the addition of four pages to the manual, a cold water supply section on page 6, the renaming of FIG.’s 2-2 and 2-3 as well as the addition of FIG. 2-4 on pages 5 and 6. LST-I-O Rev E 10/14 The HydroGuard® XP LFSH1430 series is a temperature actuated mixing valve designed for use in hot water distribution systems, in compliance with ASSE 1017. Description Q Maximum Operating Pressure ...................... 125 psi (861 kPa) Maximum Hot Water Temperature ............... 200°F (93°C) Minimum Hot Water Supply Temp. .............. 5°F (3°C) Above Set-Point* Hot Water Inlet Temperature Range ............ 120 -180°F (49 - 82°C) Cold Water Inlet Temperature Range .......... 40 - 80°F (4 - 27°C) Temp. Adjustment Ranges ** Standard: ....... 90 - 160°F (32 - 71°C) Low: .................. 60 - 90°F (16 - 32°C) Listing ........................................ ASSE 1017 Certified .................................... CSA B125 * With Equal Pressure ** Low limit cannot be less than the cold water temperature. For best operation, hot water should be at least 5°F (3°C) above desired set point. Specifications Q HydroGuard® XP Master Tempering Valves Series LFSH1430 Technical Instructions IS-P-SH1430 Advanced Thermal Actuation WARNING! Read this Manual BEFORE using this equipment. Failure to read and follow all safety and use infor- mation can result in death, serious personal injury, property damage, or damage to the equipment. Keep this Manual for future reference. You are required to consult the local building and plumb- ing codes prior to installation. If the information in this manual is not consistent with local building or plumbing codes, the local codes should be followed. Inquire with governing authorities for additional local requirements. WARNING! Need for Periodic Inspection and Yearly Maintenance: Periodic inspection and yearly maintenance by a licensed con- tractor is required. Corrosive water conditions and/or unauthor- ized adjustments or repair could render the valve ineffective for service intended. Regular checking and cleaning of the valve’s internal components and check stops helps assure maximum life and proper product function. Frequency of cleaning and inspection depends upon local water conditions. FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH PROPER INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS COULD CONTRIBUTE TO THE VALVE FAILURE. This Hot Water Master Tempering Valves cannot be used for tempering water temperature at fixtures. Severe bodily injury (i.e., scalding or chilling) and/or death may result depending upon system water pressure changes and/or supply water temperature changes. ASSE standard 1016, 1069 or 1070 listed devices should be used at fixtures to prevent possible injury. These Hot Water Tempering Valves are designed to be installed at or near the boiler or water heater. They are not designed to compensate for system pressure fluctuations and should not be used where ASSE standard 1016, 1069 or 1070 devices are required. These valves should never be used to provide “anti-scald” or “anti-chill” service. The components of the system must be of materials with a construction capable of withstanding the high limit output tem- peratures of the water heating source. WARNING! WARNING! 1. Installation should be in accordance with acceptable plumbing practices. Flush all piping thoroughly before installation. Installation and field adjustment are the responsibility of the installer. 2. Valves are to be installed as close to building inlet supply as possible to prevent/minimize pressure fluctuations. 3. Valve body can be rotated to install in multiple positions due to union inlets (see Figure 2). Make sure that union nuts are tightened securely. 4. Connect inlets and outlet and check for leaks. 5. When the HydroGuard supplies tempered water to self-closing and/ or solenoid valves, provide a shock absorber (Powers Part No. 460- 353) on the discharge line. 6. Before use, check discharge temperature. Reset if necessary. OPERATION CHECK: After HydroGuard is installed, make certain the supply stop valves and strainers are free of debris, clean and ready for operation by disas- sembling checkstops as shown in servicing. Typical Flow Hot and cold water supplies enter HydroGuard at indicated ports, (see Figure 1) then flow past their respective seats. Next, hot and cold water flow is directed to the mixing chamber where the thermostatic motor is located. Temperature Change With a rise in discharge temperature due to pressure or temperature fluctuation on the inlet, the actuator expands, decreasing flow of hot water. The reverse occurs with a drop in discharge temperature. Responses Temperature adjustment screw moves the actuator to the desired discharge temperature. t$PMEXBUFSTVQQMZGBJMVSFoDBVTFTBDUVBUPSUPFYQBOEESBTUJDBMMZ reducing the flow of hot water*. t)PUXBUFSTVQQMZQSFTTVSFGBJMVSFoDBVTFTBDUVBUPSUPDPOUSBDU drastically reducing the flow of cold water*. *When tested in accordance to conditions described in ASSE 1017. Installation Instructions Q Operation Q Figure 2 Back Outlet Front Outlet Top Outlet 2 Figure 1 Temperature Adjustment Screw Temperature Adjustment Locknut Actuator Mixing Chamber Cold Water Seat Hot Water Seat Cold WaterHot Water Plunger Flow Capacity at 50-50 mixed ratio Pressure Drop Across Valve Model Min. Flow Min. Flow CV 5psi 10psi 20psi 30psi 45psi 60psi 70psi Rate* to ASSE 1017 (34 kPa) (69 kPa) (138 kPa) (207 kPa) (310 kPa) (414 kPa) (517 kPa) LFSH1432 0.5 gpm 1 gpm 8.54 19 gpm 27 gpm 38 gpm 47 gpm 57 gpm 66 gpm 71 gpm 1.89 lpm 4 lpm 72 lpm 102 lpm 144 lpm 178 lpm 216 lpm 250 lpm 269 lpm LFSH1434 0.5 gpm 1 gpm 19.00 42 gpm 60 gpm 85 gpm 104 gpm 127 gpm 147 gpm 159 gpm 1.89 lpm 4 lpm 159 lpm 227 lpm 322 lpm 394 lpm 481 lpm 556 lpm 602 lpm LFSH1435 0.5 gpm 5 gpm 30.00 67 gpm 95 gpm 134 gpm 164 gpm 201 gpm 232 gpm 251 gpm 1.89 lpm 19 lpm 254 lpm 360 lpm 507 lpm 621 lpm 761 lpm 878 lpm 950 lpm * Minimum flow when HydroGuard is installed at or near hot water source with recirculated tempered water with continuously operating recirculating pump. Capacity Table, presents the HydroGuard discharge capacity in gpm and lpm for various pressure drops across the valves (the difference Capacity Q between the lowest inlet pressure and the discharge pressure at the HydroGuard.) CAUTION!NOTICE Parts List - LFSH1432, LFSH1434 Q Parts List - LFSH1435 Q Index Description LFSH1432 LFSH1434 1 Checkstop Rebuild Kit LF390 800 LF390 801 2 Plunger Kit 390 802 390 803 3 Adjusting Screw 390 688 390 688 4 O-Ring 390 805 390 806 5 Actuator - Standard Temperature 390 807 390 809 6 Actuator - Low Temperature 390 808 390 810 7 Funnel Kit LF390 829 LF390 830 8 Locknut 1051117 1051117 Index Description LFSH1435 1 Checkstop Rebuild Kit LF390 811 2 Plunger Kit 390 812 3 O-Ring 390 813 4 Actuator - Standard Temperature 390 814 5 Actuator - Low Temperature 390 815 6 Funnel Kit LF390 831 7 Adjusting Screw 390 688 8 Locknut 105 1117 3 1 2 3 4 & 5 6 7 8 1 2 4 5 & 6 3 8 7 Before disassembling, make certain both hot and cold water supplies are shut off. Checkstop Disassembly 1. Remove bonnet with socket wrench. 2. Lift out strainer screen. 3. Reassemble in reverse order. Valve Disassembly To Remove Thermal Actuator from Top 1. Loosen locknut. 2. Remove bonnet and pull out overload assembly by using standard pliers. 3. Lift out thermal actuator by using a needle nose plier. 4. Reassemble in reverse order. Servicing Q 5. When desired temperature is set, tighten the locknut. Turn re-circulation pump back on. Close open fixtures. Temperature Adjustment Q Temperature setting for LFSH1430 Series Valves: 1. Turn off re-circulation pump (if one is in the system). 2. Open up enough fixtures to meet minimum flow requirement of: LFSH1432 = 1 gpm (4 Lpm) LFSH1434 = 1 gpm (4 Lpm) LFSH1435 = 5 gpm (19 Lpm) 3. Loosen locknut (see Fig. 1) 4. Turn temperature adjusting screw counterclockwise to increase or clockwise to decrease the outlet temperature. (see Fig. 1) Please allow valve temperature to settle in before making your next adjustment. USA: 1IPOFt'BYtwww.powerscontrols.com Canada: 1IPOFt'BY.888..tXXXQPXFSTDPOUSPMTDB IS-P-SH1430 1336 EDP# 6512307 © 2013 Powers Warranty Q The Seller warrants that the equipment manufactured by it and covered by this order or contract is free from defects in material and workmanship and, without charge, equipment found to be defective in material or workmanship will be repaired, or at Seller’s option replaced F.O.B. original point of shipment, if written notice of failure is received by Seller within one (1) year after date of shipment (unless specifically noted elsewhere), provided said equipment has been properly installed, operated in accordance with the Seller’s instructions, and provided such defects are not due to abuse or decomposition by chemical or galvanic action. THIS EXPRESS WARRANTY IS IN LIEU OF AND EXCLUDES ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, GUARANTEES, OR REPRESENTATIONS, EXPRESS OF IMPLIED. THERE ARE NO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. The Seller assumes no responsibility for repairs made on the Seller’s equipment unless done by the Seller’s authorized personnel, or by written authority from the Seller. The Seller makes no guarantee with respect to material not manufactured by it. A Watts Water Technologies Company WARNING: This product contains chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. For more information: www.watts.com/prop65 WARNING! Any changes in supply condition could effect the out- let water temperature. Check and adjust the valves accordingly to prevent injury to the users. After com- pleting repairs, check discharge temperature, (105°F [41°C]). Reset if necessary. Failure to perform this operation could result in unsafe discharge tempera- ture, which may cause injury or death. What to look for if: t5IFnPXPGXBUFSJTMFTTUIBOEFTJSFE a. Stop valves or supply to HydroGuard not fully open. b. Clogged checkstop strainer screens. c. Accumulation of lime deposits around valve seats. d. Low supply pressures. t5IFnPXPGXBUFSJTDPNQMFUFMZTIVUPGG a. Stop valves or supply valves are completely closed. b. Valves downstream from HydroGuard fully closed. c. Loss of either hot or cold water supply pressure. t%JTDIBSHFUFNQFSBUVSFWBSJFT a. Very large restriction in outlet flow. b. Very large drop in inlet pressure. c. Very large fluctuation of hot water supply temperature. d. Worn valve seats. e. Minimum flow requirement not achieved. f. Lime deposits around motor, poppets and/or seat. Maintenance and Troubleshooting Q 5. Temperature setting must be checked by an installer before use. See temperature adjustment below. To Remove The Plunger Assembly Or Funnel from Bottom 1. Remove the bottom cap. Spring is under tension. 2. Pull out spring. 3. Pull out plunger using a pair of pliers. 4. To remove Funnel, you will need a deep socket wrench and funnel removal tool. 5. Reassemble in reverse order. 6. Temperature setting must be checked by an installer before use. See temperature adjustment below. After reassembling go back to thermal actuator section and make sure it is sitting in its holder properly. NOTICE CAUTION! NOTICE Page 1 of 5 SHOWER & TUB/SHOWER INSTALLATION Rev. #: 2/24/2014 Please consult all local and state building codes and read the entire installation instructions prior to beginning the installation of this unit to ensure that the installation is performed correctly. Clarion Bathware’s tub/showers are to be stored in a dry area prior to installation to prevent moisture from attacking the reinforcement material which could cause warpage to the unit. WARNING: FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS COULD VOID THIS PRODUCTS WARRANTY. A licensed plumber is required to install or supervise the installation of these units. These units are thoroughly tested in the plant to ensure their ability to drain water properly. Failure to follow these handling and installation instructions may cause improper drainage, thus voiding the unit’s warranty. Pocket dimensions and drain location can be obtained from your retailer or at www.clarionbathware.com/search (1) enter model number of the unit then click search, (2) select the product picture, (3) select product cut sheet (pdf) at bottom right of the page. Clarion Bathware’s products are designed to be self-supporting. However, in cases where the occupant of the home has excessive weight, we recommend that the unit be installed on a bedding material of cement or casting plaster. Use of a bedding material is required if the unit is being installed in a high use facility. (ie: dormitory, locker room, nursing home, motel, hotel, etc.) The use of a bedding material however is optional and done at the discretion of the customer. If a bedding material is used, be sure to place a moisture barrier, such as plastic, between the bedding compound and the unit Suggested Tools Page 2 of 5 Step #1 Figure 1 Framing the Pocket Frame a square and plumb pocket to dimension of the unit. If the unit being installed has a whirlpool option installed, future access to the pump and parts should be considered when installing. It is advised, and is required by many local and state building codes that an access area be incorporated into the framing for a whirlpooled tub/shower Page 3 of 5 Step #2 Figure 2 Setting the Unit Plumbing fixture can be installed prior to setting the unit into the framing pocket or after. Install the drain and make sure that it is sealed properly and not leaking. Set the unit into the framed pocket. Check that the drain is not resting on anything which can force the unit floor upwards. Plumb and level the unit. The legs of the unit must contact the floor for proper support. Shims may be placed under the legs to maintain solid contact where needed. Use appropriate size shims to fill any gaps between the flange and the framing members. Once the unit is plumb and level and any gaps are shimmed, secure the vertical flanges every 6” or as necessary and the horizontal flanges wherever they come into contact with the studding with galvanized nails or screws. Pre-drilling for the fasteners may be desired to reduce the risk of damaging the unit. (In an application where the unit is installed over wall board and will be installing a Clarion Bathware Trim Kit, for best results your fasteners will need to be flush with the nailing flange. Clarion Bathware recommends centering and counter sinking a corrosion resistance fastener on the nailing flange. Raised fasteners will result in a problematic finishing process of the trim kit.) Final Notes: You can finish off your new unit with a variety of materials which are accepted by local building codes. Some ideas are tile, drywall caulking, drywall mud, plaster, wood or plastic trim. Clean your new tub with a liquid detergent and warm water. Do not use any abrasive cleaners such as scouring powder or liquid abrasive cleaners. Page 4 of 5 IF A BEDDING MATERIAL IS USED UNDER A UNIT; CEMENT SLURRY, THIN MORTAR MIX, PLASTER OF PARIS, OR A COMPARABLE FLOOR FILLING COMPOUND THAT IS NOT WATER SOLUBLE ARE PROPER BEDDING COMPOUNDS. WATER SOLUBLE MATERIALS, FOAM AND OTHER EXPANDING MATERIALS ARE NEVER TO BE USED AS A BEDDING COMPOUND. NOTE: ANY BATHING WELL CAN BE WHIRLPOOLED. IT IS IMPORTANT TO DETERMINE WHERE YOU WILL HAVE ACCESS TO THE PUMP IF IT NEEDS SERVICED IN THE FUTURE. ACCESS TO THE WHIRLPOOL PUMP AND PARTS SHOULD BE CONSIDERED PRIOR TO PURCHASING AND/OR INSTALLING A WHIRLPOOLED UNIT. AN ACCESS AREA ON WHIRLPOOLS IS REQUIRED BY MANY BUILDING CODES. ALL WHIRLPOOLS MUST BE WATER TESTED PRIOR TO BEING INSTALLED. FAILURE TO WATER TEST CAN VOID THE WARRANTY. IF YOU HAVE ANY QUESTIONS REGARDING INSTALLATION OF YOUR CLARION BATHWARE PRODUCT, PLEASE CALL OUR CUSTOMER SERVICE DEPARTMENT AT 1 (800) 576-9228 EXT. #818 OR BY E-MAIL AT CUSTOMERSERVICE@CLARIONBATHWARE.COM JOB SITE INSTALLATION OF OWNER SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES All Clarion Bathware units purchased with supplied grab bars are custom reinforced at the factory to accommodate the mounting of said bars. Any grab bars installed on a Clarion Bathware unit at the job site must have proper reinforcement (wood support and backing plates) at all mounting areas and should comply with ANSI A117.1, Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (UFAS) and ASTM F446 specifications for grab bars in the bathing area. Job-site installation of third party supplied grab bars is entirely at the risk and full responsibility of the owner. Any damage to Clarion Bathware units or the property during or after grab bar installation, or any injuries due to improper installation remain the sole responsibility of said owner and cannot be attributed to Clarion Bathware, Inc. ***WE SUGGEST THAT THE CUSTOMER AVOIDS USING A BATH MAT IN THE UNIT, AS IT COULD CAUSE WATER STAINS OR BLISTERING TO THE FINISH SURFACE OF THE UNIT. CLARION BATHWARE PRODUCTS ARE CERTIFIED TO MEET NAHB STANDARDS, HUD/FHA, BOCA, HUD UM-73A, ANSI Z124.1 AND ANSI Z124.2. FOR DETAILS, REQUEST NAHB RESEARCH CENTER CONFIRMATION. 44 Amsler Avenue Shippenville, PA 16254 (814) 226-5374 (800) 576-9228 Customer Service: Ext. #818 Fax: (814) 226-0730 www.clarionbathware.com Page 5 of 5 CLARION BATHWARE 44 Amsler Avenue Shippenville, PA 16254 Phone (800) 576-9228 Fax (814) 226-5568 Customer Service: Ext.#818 WARRANTY PLEASE READ YOUR WARRANTY VERY CAREFULLY All merchandise is guaranteed for a period of six (6) years from the date of initial acceptance of the product by the contractor or the owner against defects in material and workmanship in the merchandise. All claims must have proof of purchase. If within the warranty period any such product shall prove defective of material defects, manufacturing defects, labor defects, it shall be repaired or replaced at the manufacturer’s option. EXCLUSIONS: 1) This warranty shall not apply to incorrect operating procedures, breakage or damages caused by fault, carelessness, negligence, abuse, misuse, misapplication, improper maintenance, alteration, or modification of the unit by or for the buyer, as well as chemical or natural corrosion, fire, act of god, or any other casualty. 2) The buyer of the product covered by the present warranty is entirely responsible for its proper installation and connection. Clarion Bathware neither installs nor supervises or contracts for the installation and consequently cannot be held responsible for it. 3) This warranty does not apply to units or equipment not installed and connected in accordance with manufacture’s instructions and in conformity with all local and state for such installations. 4) CLARION BATHWARE IS NOT LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGE, LOSS OF TIME, INCONVENIENCE, INCIDENTAL EXPENSES, LABOR OR MATERIAL CHARGES OR ANY OTHER COSTS RELATED TO THE APPLICATION OF THE PRESENT WARRANTY OR IN CONNECTION WITH REMOVAL OR REPLACEMENT OF EQUIPMENT OR TUB. 5) All Clarion Bathware modules have slip-resistant textured floors. The use of “suction-cup” bathmats can cause surface damage. 6) Clarion Bathware makes no express warranty and no warranty of merchantability. No warranty of fitness for particular purposes or any other warranty implied or statutory for its products other than specified above. “Clearly A Difference” ADAAG & ANSI-A117.1 COMPLIANT & BARRIER FREE ¾” THRESHOLD SHOWER INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS Rev. #: 12/20/12 Key Points to remember during installation 1. The subfloor must be 100% flat, level and free from obstructions of any kind. 2. When installed, the drain of the shower and the piping must be centered on the core or box out prepared in the subfloor. Check to make sure that the core is drilled deep enough (At least 2”) for the drain fitting that you are using, and that nothing will prevent it from allowing the floor of the unit to rest on the subfloor as designed. Please note that the drain pocket of this shower will protrude below the subfloor as shown in Figure 2 in this manual. 3. In buildings with a poured in place floor, make sure that there is no lip at the edge of the drain box out area. 4. If installing the drain fitting prior to installation of the shower, precautions must be taken to keep the shower from resting on the drain fitting. Failure to do this may cause warping or cracking of the shower floor. 5. When plumbing, there should be no fittings installed on the drain pipe within 2 ½” of the top of the subfloor. This will interfere with the drain fitting and cause the floor of the unit not to rest on the subfloor as designed. 6. To meet full compliance with ADA the front edge of the seat must be within 3” [76mm] from the edge of the finished shower pocket. This must be considered when framing the pocket for the unit WARNING: FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS COULD VOID THIS PRODUCTS WARRANTY. The 3/4” threshold is a very sensitive unit to properly install. It is very important that the procedures are followed exactly during the installation process to create the ideal barrier free access area. A licensed plumber is required to install or supervise the installation of these units. These units are thoroughly tested in the plant to ensure their ability to drain water properly. Failure to follow these handling and installation instructions may cause improper drainage, thus voiding the unit’s warranty. Clarion Bathware’s Barrier-Free Showers with ¾” Threshold are to be stored in a dry area prior to installation to prevent moisture from attacking the reinforcement material which could cause warpage to the unit. Additionally, the units cannot be stored in a manner where the bottom of the unit and the drain are forced upward. Unit Preparation Remove all factory-shipping packaging and braces. On the bottom of the back wall there is a piece of OSB board for shipping purposes. This needs to be cut down so that it will not interfere with leveling the shower stall properly. To do this, set a circular saw to cut a 7/16” deep cut. Cut the OSB that extends past the bottom of the unit. Use caution when cutting, there are wood blocks that are secured with metal staples on the inside edge of the board. ***This board should not be removed until the unit is ready to be installed. Removal of the board before installation may void the warranty.*** Figure 1 Frame a square and plumb pocket to dimension of the unit. The floor of the pocket must be prepared perfectly flat and level to obtain proper drainage. If there are any obstructions, you will need to chisel or cut the concrete out to create a surface that allows for proper slope to the drain. Depending upon the core opening in the concrete slab, the installer may find it necessary to core a larger and/or deeper opening permitting adequate clearance for the drain. An 8” core at least 2” deep may be desirable. If the core cut is larger than 8” x 8” or 8” diameter, we recommend back filling the core cut, sloping the fill to the drain. This will assure that the area of the floor around the drain receives proper support For ADA Compliant 36” Transfer Showers: The front edge of the seat must be no more than 3” [76mm] from the compartment entry. To achieve this with Clarion Bathware’s units, the front gelcoat surface of the unit must be no more than 1-1/2” [38mm] from the finished wall in front of the shower. This will need to be taken into consideration when framing the pocket. (See Figure 1.1 & Figure 1.2) Pocket dimensions and drain location can be obtained from your retailer or at www.clarionbathware.com/search (1) enter model number of the unit then click search, (2) select the product picture, (3) select product cut sheet pdf at bottom right of the page. Figure 2 & 3 Install the drain and make sure that it is sealed properly and not leaking. Test fit the unit into the framed pocket. Check that the drain is not resting on anything which can force the unit floor upwards. Level and plumb the unit. Attach the front two vertically flanges with one fastener. Using a pencil mark all flanges on the studding. This will assist when setting the unit into the bedding compound. Remove the unit and prepare a bedding compound for the unit to be set into. **FOAM SHOULD NEVER BE USED AS A BEDDING MATERIAL. ** A proper bedding compound would be cement slurry, thin mortar mix, setting type drywall compound, or lightweight gypsum plaster. Although all the listed products are acceptable, Clarion Bathware recommends using lightweight gypsum plaster for optimal results. In addition to being a user friendly product to use it also has a slow curing time and a compression rating of about 700 PSI. Two brands of this plaster to look for are Gold Bond Gypsolite Plaster and US Gypsum Structo-Lite Plaster. Mix the bedding compound to a manageable consistency. If the bedding material is too thick it may not spread out properly and can cause the unit floor to be forced up. If the bedding material is too thin it may seep out from under the unit. This can cause improper support of the unit floor. After mixing the bedding material to a consistency of “cool-whip”, place it onto the floor in mounds keeping in mind the area around the drain will be thinner due to the slope of the shower floor. Placing the bedding material in mounds reduces waste and over application which may cause the unit to drain improperly or not at all. When the unit is set onto the mounds, they will spread out easier than trying to completely cover the entire floor. Small void areas of 2”-3” are not a problem as the shower floor has sufficient strength to bridge them. Set the unit in the bedding compound. Align the flanges of the unit with the pencil marks. Check that the unit is plumb and level then attach each vertical flange with a fastener so that the unit won’t shift. Check the floor of the shower for high spots that could restrict the water drainage. High spots in the bedding compound under the floor can be worked out by applying pressure to the area. The threshold of the unit should be fairly flat with no depressions. A slight rise is acceptable as long as proper slope to the drain is maintained. This unit has an integral floor-nailing flange. This flange was designed to eliminate floor warpage that is common with most ¾ inch shower units. This flange must be attached to the floor, before the bedding material cures, to allow the unit to drain properly. If the floor nailing flange was shimmed, insure that the shims are still in place and that the floor nailing flange is still level. A screw should be inserted in the middle of the flange, and screws should be placed every 12” to each side, or as necessary to make sure that there are no bows or bumps in this flange. To attach the nailing flange to a cement floor, predrill and counter sink the fiberglass flange to accommodate concrete anchor screws. Tapcon cement screws may be used but be careful not to over tighten them. Anchor screws with expansion adaptors are the preferred method to secure the flange to the floor. Please note that the use of any mechanical nailing gun can cause damage to the fiberglass flange and is not a recommended means of securing this flange to the floor. Use of any mechanical nailing gun may result in voiding the unit’s warranty. After securing the floor flange re-check that proper slope has been achieved in the shower floor. Assure that there are no dips, humps, or other restrictions in the shower floor which will prevent proper water drainage Figure 4 When the unit is plumb and level, and the slope to the drain is assured, finish securing the flanges with galvanized nails or screws. ;/ŶĂŶĂƉƉůŝĐĂƚŝŽŶǁŚĞƌĞƚŚĞƵŶŝƚŝƐŝŶƐƚĂůůĞĚŽǀĞƌǁĂůů ďŽĂƌĚĂŶĚǁŝůůďĞŝŶƐƚĂůůŝŶŐĂůĂƌŝŽŶĂƚŚǁĂƌĞdƌŝŵ<ŝƚ͕ĨŽƌďĞƐƚƌĞƐƵůƚƐLJŽƵƌĨĂƐƚĞŶĞƌƐǁŝůů ŶĞĞĚƚŽďĞĨůƵƐŚǁŝƚŚƚŚĞŶĂŝůŝŶŐĨůĂŶŐĞ͘ůĂƌŝŽŶĂƚŚǁĂƌĞƌĞĐŽŵŵĞŶĚƐĐĞŶƚĞƌŝŶŐĂŶĚ ĐŽƵŶƚĞƌƐŝŶŬŝŶŐĂĐŽƌƌŽƐŝŽŶƌĞƐŝƐƚĂŶĐĞĨĂƐƚĞŶĞƌŽŶƚŚĞŶĂŝůŝŶŐĨůĂŶŐĞ͘ZĂŝƐĞĚĨĂƐƚĞŶĞƌƐǁŝůů ƌĞƐƵůƚŝŶĂƉƌŽďůĞŵĂƚŝĐĨŝŶŝƐŚŝŶŐƉƌŽĐĞƐƐŽĨƚŚĞƚƌŝŵŬŝƚ͘Ϳ Final Notes: A floor-leveling agent can be used to smooth the transition between the shower unit and the floor. A smooth transition between the shower unit and the floor is a requirement for ADA compliance. We recommend Feather Finish for all vinyl applications or grout for tile installations. You can finish off your new unit with a variety of materials which are accepted by local building codes. Some ideas are tile, drywall caulking, drywall mud, plaster, wood or plastic trim. Clean your new tub with a liquid detergent and warm water. Do not use any abrasive cleaners such as scouring powder or liquid abrasive cleaners. IF A BEDDING MATERIAL IS USED UNDER A UNIT; CEMENT SLURRY, THIN MORTAR MIX, PLASTER OF PARIS, OR A COMPARABLE FLOOR FILLING COMPOUND THAT IS NOT WATER SOLUBLE ARE PROPER BEDDING COMPOUNDS. WATER SOLUBLE MATERIALS, FOAM AND OTHER EXPANDING MATERIALS ARE NEVER TO BE USED AS A BEDDING COMPOUND. IF YOU HAVE ANY QUESTIONS REGARDING INSTALLATION OF YOUR CLARION BATHWARE PRODUCT, PLEASE CALL OUR CUSTOMER SERVICE DEPARTMENT AT 1 (800) 576-9228 EXT. #818 OR BY E-MAIL AT CUSTOMERSERVICE@CLARIONBATHWARE.COM JOB SITE INSTALLATION OF OWNER SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES All Clarion Bathware units purchased with supplied grab bars are custom reinforced at the factory to accommodate the mounting of said bars. Any grab bars installed on a Clarion Bathware unit at the job site must have proper reinforcement (wood support and backing plates) at all mounting areas and should comply with ANSI A117.1, Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (UFAS) and ASTM F446 specifications for grab bars in the bathing area. Job-site installation of third party supplied grab bars is entirely at the risk and full responsibility of the owner. Any damage to Clarion Bathware units or the property during or after grab bar installation, or any injuries due to improper installation remain the sole responsibility of said owner and cannot be attributed to Clarion Bathware, Inc. ***WE SUGGEST THAT THE CUSTOMER AVOIDS USING A BATH MAT IN THE UNIT, AS IT COULD CAUSE WATER STAINS OR BLISTERING TO THE FINISH SURFACE OF THE UNIT. CLARION BATHWARE PRODUCTS ARE CERTIFIED TO MEET NAHB STANDARDS, HUD/FHA, BOCA, HUD UM-73A, ANSI Z124.1 AND ANSI Z124.2. FOR DETAILS, REQUEST NAHB RESEARCH CENTER CONFIRMATION. 44 Amsler Avenue Shippenville, PA 16254 (814) 226-5374 (800) 576-9228 Customer Service: Ext. #818 Fax: (814) 226-0730 www.clarionbathware.com CLARION BATHWARE 44 Amsler Avenue Shippenville, PA 16254 Phone (800) 576-9228 Fax (814) 226-5568 Customer Service: Ext.#818 WARRANTY PLEASE READ YOUR WARRANTY VERY CAREFULLY All merchandise is guaranteed for a period of three (3) years from the date of initial acceptance of the product by the contractor or the owner against defects in material and workmanship in the merchandise. All claims must have proof of purchase. If within the warranty period any such product shall prove defective in material defects, manufacturing defects, or labor defects it shall be repaired or replaced at the manufacturer’s option. EXCLUSIONS: 1) This warranty shall not apply to incorrect operating procedures, breakage or damages caused by fault, carelessness, negligence, abuse, misuse, misapplication, improper maintenance, alteration, or modification of the unit by or for the buyer, as well as chemical or natural corrosion, fire, act of god, or any other casualty. 2) The buyer of the product covered by the present warranty is entirely responsible for its proper installation and connection. Clarion Bathware neither installs nor supervises or contracts for the installation and consequently cannot be held responsible for it. 3) This warranty does not apply to units or equipment not installed and connected in accordance with manufacture’s instructions and in conformity with all local and state codes for such installations. 4) CLARION BATHWARE IS NOT LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGE, LOSS OF TIME, INCONVENIENCE, INCIDENTAL EXPENSES, LABOR OR MATERIAL CHARGES OR ANY OTHER COSTS RELATED TO THE APPLICATION OF THE PRESENT WARRANTY OR IN CONNECTION WITH REMOVAL OR REPLACEMENT OF EQUIPMENT OR TUB. 5) All Clarion Bathware modules have slip-resistant textured floors. The use of “suction-cup” bathmats can cause surface damage. 6) Clarion Bathware makes no express warranty and no warranty of merchantability. No warranty of fitness for particular purposes or any other warranty implied or statutory for its products other than specified above. “Clearly A Difference” Shower Head/Arm/ Flange 42916GR Chrome 42916BNGR Brushed Nickel Flange AT2 199 Chrome AT2 199BN Brushed Nickel Sleeve 162204 Chrome 162204BN Brushed Nickel Escutcheon 168190 Chrome 168190BN Brushed Nickel Escutcheon Screws 41002 Chrome 41002BN Brushed Nickel Valve Trim 40316C Chrome 40316CBN Brushed Nickel Handle Only 40015 Chrome 40015BN Brushed Nickel Set Screw 40057 Shower Arm 10154 Chrome 10154BN Brushed Nickel Tub Spout 40911 Chrome (slip fit) 40911BN Brushed Nickel (slip fit) 40914 Chrome (IPS) Shower Head 42018GR Chrome 42018GRBN Brushed Nickel PART S SH EET $-&7&-"/%'"6$&5(3061t"-.0&/%3*7&t/035)0-.45&% 0)*0tŷŸűt888$'(0/-*/&$0. $'(ű3&7 COR NERSTONE™ Single-Handle Tub/Shower Cycling Trim w/Water Saving Showerhead Tub/Shower Trim Model Finish $(3 $ISPNF $#/(3 #SVTIFE Nickel Shower Trim Only Model Finish $(3 $ISPNF $#/(3 #SVTIFE Nickel Previous Style Service Kits (Prior to 1/17/13) #/ (Prior to 3/26/13) (Prior to 1/17/13) #/ (Prior to 3/26/13)(Sleeve)(Escutcheon) One Handle Pressure Balancing Cycling Tub/Shower Trim • Trim de un maneral para ducha/ bañera, presión balanceade de ciclo • Garniture de douche/baignoire à fonctionnement cyclique, équilibrage de pression Installation Instructions • Manuel d’installation • Instrucciones de instalación Turn on water supply Ouvrez les conduites d’eau Prenda la agua 3 0 Sec. 30 45 15 Off Arrêt Apage 4 cold froid frio hot chaud caliente cold froid frio hot chaud caliente 5 INS10296 - 7/14 1 2 1 THINWATHINWALLTHCK ALL 1 4 1 2 2 3 25300 Al Moen Drive North Olmsted, OH 44070 (888) 450-5522 Note: Spout, shower head and handles vary by model. Nota: El surtidor, cebolleta y las manijas varían por el modelo. Note : Le bec, pomme de douche et les poignées varient par le mod- èle. Model Number/Número de modelo/Numéro de type Installation Date/Fecha de instalación/Date d'installation For Warranty Support/Para la ayuda de la garantía/Pour l'appui de garantie Cornerstone Models Tub/Shower: 40311C, 40311CGR, 40314C Shower Only: 40315C, 40315CGR Valve Only: 40316C Capstone Models Tub/Shower: T41311C, T41311CGR Shower Only: T41315C, T41315CGR Edgestone Models Tub/Shower: 46301CGR, 46301CBNGR Shower Only: 46302CGR, 46302CBNGR Baystone Models Tub/Shower: T42311C, T42311CGR Shower Only: T42315C, T42315CGR Thread seal tape Cinta para sellar roscas Ruban pour joints filetés 10 5/32" SLIP FIT / SALIDA CON DESVIADOR / GLISSEMENT RAPIDE11A IPS 2 1 Thread seal tape Cinta para sellar roscas Ruban pour joints filetés 11B Thin Wall Installation/Instalación para pared fina/ Installation sur un mur mince 8 Thread seal tape Cinta para sellar roscas Ruban pour joints filetés 9 7 A 12 On Marche Prenda 3 THINWATHINWALLTHCK ALL 1 2 1 6 INS10296 - 7/14 or o ou 14 19 1 2 17 Gray Gris Gris 1816 1200F (480C) 1200F (480C) 15 INS10296 - 7/14 20 1 2 3/32" 13 3/32" 1 2 2 to 3 turns 2 a 3 vueltas 2 à 3 tours 10-year Limited Warranty • Cleveland Faucet Group (CFG) warrants to the original consumer purchaser for a period of ten (10) years from the original date of purchase (the “Warranty Period”) that this faucet will be free from defects in materials and manufacturing workmanship. If this faucet should ever evidence a defect in materials or manufacturing workmanship during the Warranty Period and under normal installation, use and service, CFG will provide a replacement or repair part FREE OF CHARGE. • Damage due to installation error, product abuse, product misuse are excluded from this warranty. CFG will not be responsible for labor charges and/or damage incurred in installation, repair or replacement, nor for any indirect, incidental or consequential damages, losses, injury or costs of any nature relating to this faucet or any replacement or repair part. • Except as provided by law, this warranty is in lieu of and excludes all other warranties, whether expressed or implied, statutory or otherwise, including without restriction those of merchantability or of fitness for use. Some states, provinces and nations do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state, province to province, nation to nation. Simply write or call, and CFG will advise you of the procedure to follow in making warranty claims. Proof of purchase (original sales receipt) must accompany all warranty claims. Garantía Limitada de por 10 Años • Cleveland Faucet Group (CFG) garantiza al consumidor-comprador original por un período de diez (10) años desde la fecha original de compra (el “Periodo de Garantía”), que esta mezcladora será libre de defectos de material y mano de obra de fabricación. En caso que esta mezcladora empiece en algún momento a gotear, fugar agua o demonstrar que tiene cualquier defecto bajo instalación, uso y servicio normal, CFG le enviará GRATIS las partes necesarias para dejar la mezcladora en buen condición de funcionamiento. • Sin embargo, los daños causados por un error de instalación, abuso del producto, mal uso del producto o el uso de limpiadores que contengan abrasivos, alcohol u otros solventes orgánicos, se excluyen de esta garantia. CFG no será responsable de costos laborales y/o daños producidos durante la instalacion, reparación u cualquier daño incidental o consiguiente, pérdidas, herídas u costos de caulquier naturaleza relacionados con esta mezcladora, su reemplazo y sus partes. • Salvo como previsto por la ley, esta garantiá reemplaza y excluye todas las otras garantías, condiciones y afirmaciones, ya sea expresadas o implicítas, legales u otras, incluyendo sin restricción alguna aquellas de comercialización o aptitud para el uso. Algunos estados, provincias y naciones no permiten la exclusión o limitación de daños incidentales o consiguientes y por este motivo las sobrecitados limitaciones posiblemente no le afectan. • Esta garantía le otorga derechos legales específicos y Ud. posiblemente también tiene otros derechos que cambian de un estado a otro, de una provincia a otra, de una nación a otra. Solamente llame o escriba y CFG le avisará cual procedimiento debe seguir en cuanto haga una reclamación bajo garantia. El comprobante de compra (recibo original de la venta) del consumidor debe acompañar todas las reclamaciones de garantia. Garantie Limitée de 10 Ans • Le groupe Cleveland Faucet (GCF) garantit à l’acheteur original, pour une période de dix (10) ans à partir de la date d’achat (la “Période de Garantie”), que ce robinet sera exempt de tout défaut de matériaux et de fabrication. Si ce robinet devait avoir un défaut de matériaux ou de fabrication durant la Période de Garantie, et sous installation, usage et service normaux, GCF procurera un remplacement ou les pièces de réparation gratuitement. • Des dommages dus à une erreur d’installation ou à un usage abusif ou incorrect, sont exclus de cette garantie. GCF ne sera pas responsable des frais de main- d’œuvre, et/ou de dommages encourus pendant l’installation, la réparation ou le remplacement, ni pour des dommages, pertes, blessures ou coûts indirects ou accessoires, reliés à ce robinet ou tout remplacement ou pièce de réparation. • Excepté là où la loi le permet, cette garantie remplace et exclut toute autre garantie, qu’elle soit exprimée ou légale, statuée ou autre, incluant sans restrictions celles de valeurs commerciales ou d’utilisation juste. Certains états, provinces ou nations ne permettent pas l’exclusion ou la limitation de dommages- intérêts accessoires, donc les limitations et exclusions ci-dessus peuvent ne pas s’appliquer à vous. Cette garantie vous donne des droits légaux spécifiques et vous pouvez aussi avoir d’autres droits qui varient d’état à état, de province à province, et de nation à nation. Écrivez ou appelez, et CGF vous avisera de la procédure à suivre pour faire une réclamation de garantie. Une preuve d’achat (reçu d’achat original) doit être annexée à toute réclamation de garantie. If you need installation assistance, replacement parts or have questions regarding our warranty, please call our product consultants at: US: 1-800-450-5522 Canada: 1-800-465-6130 Mexico: 01-800-718-4345 ©2014 Cleveland Faucet Group A Moen Incorporated Brand 25300 Al Moen Drive North Olmsted, OH U.S.A. 44070 1-888-450-5522 www.cfgonline.com INS10296 - 7/14 Shower heads: Standard 9.5 L/min (2.5 gpm) max. and High Efficiency 7.6 L/min (2.0 gpm) max. or less For use with automatic compensating valves rated at 4.2 L/min (1.1 gpm) or less Roseta: estándar 9.5 L/min (2.5 gpm) máx. y alta eficiencia 7.6 L/min (2.0 gpm) máx. o menos Para usarse con válvulas de compensación automática de 4.2 L/min (1.1 gpm) o menos Pommes de douche : standards 2,5 gpm (9,5 L/min) max. ou à haute efficacité 2,0 gpm max. (7,6 L/min) ou moins À utiliser avec des soupapes de compensation automatiques dont le débit nominal est de 4,2 L/min (1,1 gpm) ou moins PARTS SHEET CLEVELAND FAUCET GROUP • 25300 AL MOEN DRIVE • NORTH OLMSTED, OHIO 44070 • (888) 450-5522 • www.cfgonline.com Rev. 12/12 Order by Part Naumber Pressure Balancing Tub/Shower Cycling Valve, 4 Port MODEL CONNECTION STOPS 45311 IPS-exterior yes CC-interior yes 45312 IPS-exterior no CC-interior no 45313 PEX-inlets & shower outlet no tub outlet-8” x 7” copper tube 45317 IPS-female yes 45318 IPS-female no 45319 PEX-inlets & shower outlet no tub outlet-IPS, CC 45320 PEX-inlets & shower outlet yes tub outlet-IPS, CC 45321 CPVC-inlets yes female-outlets-IPS 45322 CPVC-inlets no female-outlets-IPS Cartridge Cup 162203 Sleeve 162204 Cartridge 40069 Stop Valve Kit 136123 1” Extension Kit 162205 Chrome 162205BN Brushed Nickel 162205OWB Old World Bronze Handle Adapter with Handle Screw 40079 Check Valve Kit 162202 There is more than 1 version of this model. Page down to identify the version you have. After 1/2012 PARTS SHEET CLEVELAND FAUCET GROUP • 25300 AL MOEN DRIVE • NORTH OLMSTED, OHIO 44070 • (888) 450-5522 • www.cfgonline.com Rev. 12/12 Order by Part Naumber Pressure Balancing Tub/Shower Cycling Valve, 4 Port MODEL CONNECTION STOPS 45311 IPS-exterior yes CC-interior yes 45312 IPS-exterior no CC-interior no 45313 PEX-inlets & shower outlet no tub outlet-8” x 7” copper tube 45317 IPS-female yes 45318 IPS-female no 45319 PEX-inlets & shower outlet no tub outlet-IPS, CC 45320 PEX-inlets & shower outlet yes tub outlet-IPS, CC 45321 CPVC-inlets yes female-outlets-IPS 45322 CPVC-inlets no female-outlets-IPS Dome 40094 Cartridge Sleeve 44094 Cartridge 40069 Stop-Check Valve Kit 12318 1” Extension Kit 40073 Chrome 40073BN Brushed Nickel 40073OWB Old World Bronze Handle Adapter with Handle Screw 40079 Cartridge Nut 40101 Before 1/2012 Illustrated Parts TO ORDER PARTS CALL: 1-800-BUY-MOEN www.moen.com8343pt: Rev. 11/12 COMMERCIAL Order by Part Number H C OFF Lever Handle Kit 14732 (Metallic)Chrome 14732CBN Classic Brushed Nickel Escutcheon Screws 93455 Chrome 93455CBN Classic Brushed Nickel Escutcheon 96885 Chrome 96885CBN Classic Brushed Nickel Stop Tube Kit 96987 Chrome Escutcheon 163128 Chrome 163128CBN Classic Brushed Nickel Replacement Cartridge 1222HD 3-Function Cartridge 163127 Function Labels 100087 Handle Screw Kit 100078 Chrome 100078CBN Classic Brushed Nickel Handle Repair Kit 100079 Chrome 100079CBN Classic Brushed Nickel Mounting Sleeve 100080 Chrome 100080CBN Classic Brushed Nickel Retainer Clip 96914 1" Extension Kit 162649 Cartridge Repair Kit (Contains grommets grease pack, and all necessary O-Rings) 96988 * See Additonal Parts Chart on Next Page Temperature Limit Stop Kit 106479 Stop Valve Kit 12639 Prior to 2/07 1" Handle Extension Kit 96945 Chrome 2" Handle Extension Kit 96955 Chrome Posi-Temp Valve 8371HD CC Connections w/stops 8370HD CC Connections w/out stops 8372HD IPS Connections w/stops 8373HD PEX Connections w/out stops 8374HD CPVC Connections w/stops 8375HD UPONOR Connections w/stops Stop Valve Kit 136123 There is more than 1 version of this model. Page down to identify the version you have. COMMERCIAL TUB/SHOWER SYSTEMS MODEL 3-FUNCTION TRANSFER VALVE HANDSHOWER TUB SPOUT SHOWERHEAD VACUUM BREAKER DROP ELL SLIDE BAR WALL BRACKET 8360 Three-Function Transfer Valve X 8370 Posi-Temp® Valve Control 8375 Posi-Temp® Shower X 8389 Posi-Temp® Tub/Shower X X 8341 Posi-Temp® Tub/Shower System X X X X X X 8342 Posi-Temp® Shower System X X X X X X 8343 Posi-Temp® Tub/Shower System X X X X X X X 8346 Posi-Temp® Hand Shower System X X X X 8348 Posi-Temp® Hand Shower System X X X X 52710 Hand Shower System without Valve X X X X 52715 Hand Shower System without Valve X X X X 52740EP17 Three-Function Hand Shower System without Valve X X X X Models beginning in T are trim kits and do not include valve(s). Models ending in CBN are identical to base but have a Classic Brushed Nickel finish. Illustrated Parts TO ORDER PARTS CALL: 1-800-BUY-MOEN www.moen.com COMMERCIAL Order by Part Number Shower Arm & Flange A704 Chrome A704CBN Classic Brushed Nickel Shower Arm 10154 Chrome 10154CBN Classic Brushed Nickel Hand Held Shower Wand 8349 2.5 gpm, Chrome 8349CBN 2.5 gpm, Classic Brushed Nickel 8349EP17 1.75 gpm, Chrome 8349EP17CBN 1.75 gpm, Classic Brushed Nickel 8349EP15 1.5 gpm, Chrome 8349EP15CBN 1.5 gpm, Classic Brushed Nickel Metal Hose A726 69" Metal, Chrome A726ST 69" Metal, Classic Brushed Nickel A780 80" Metal, Chrome A723 59" Plastic Slidebar & Clamp 101629 Chrome 101629CBN Classic Brushed Nickel Clamp 100686 Chrome 101686CBN Classic Brushed Nickel Wall Bracket 104414 Chrome Vacuum Breaker 52703 Chrome A714ST Classic Brushed Nickel Drop Ell A725 Chrome A725CBN Classic Brushed Nickel Tub Spout 15856 Chrome 15856CBN Classic Brushed Nickel 8343pt: Rev.7/12 Hand Held Shower Wand 3863 Chrome Shower Head 5263 2.5 gpm, Chrome 5263CBN 2.5 gpm, Classic Brushed Nickel 5263EP17 1.75 gpm, Chrome 5263EP17CBN 1.75 gpm, Classic Brushed Nickel 5263EP15 1.5 gpm, Chrome 5263EP15CBN 1.5 gpm, Classic Brushed Nickel There is more than 1 version of this model. Page down to identify the version you have. Illustrated Parts TO ORDER PARTS CALL: 1-800-BUY-MOEN www.moen.com COMMERCIAL Order by Part Number Order by Part Number 8343pt: Rev. 7/12 H C OFF MODEL Handshower Tub Filler Showerhead Vacuum Breaker Drop Ell Slide Bar Wall Bracket 8360 3 Function Transfer Valve 8341 Posi-Temp & 3 Function Transfer Valve x x x x x 8342 Posi-Temp & 3 Function Transfer Valve x x x x x 8343 Posi-Temp & 3 Function Transfer Valve x x x x x x 8348 Posi-Temp x x x x 8346 Posi-Temp x x x x 52710 Less Valves x x x x 52710BN Less Valves x x x x Lever Handle Kit 14732 (Metallic) Chrome Escutcheon Screws 93455 Chrome Escutcheon 96885 Chrome Stop Tube Kit 96987 Chrome Escutcheon 100081 Replacement Cartridge 1222HD 3-Function Cartridge 100040 Cartridge O-Rings 100031 Function Labels 100087 Handle Screw Kit 100078 Handle Repair Kit 100079 Mounting Sleeve 100080Retainer Clip 96914 1" Extension Kit 106321 Cartridge Repair Kit (Contains grommets grease pack, and all necessary O-Rings) 96988 Temperature Limit Stop Kit 106479 Three-Function Commercial Tub/Shower System Stop Valve Kit 12639 Prior to 2/07 1" Handle Extension Kit 96945 Chrome 2" Handle Extension Kit 96955 Chrome Posi-Temp Valve 8371HD CC Connections w/stops 8370HD CC Connections w/out stops Stop Valve Kit 136123 Illustrated Parts TO ORDER PARTS CALL: 1-800-BUY-MOEN www.moen.com COMMERCIAL Order by Part Number Hand Held Shower Wand Metal Hose Slidebar & Clamp Shower Head, Arm, Flange Shower Head, Arm, Flange 12894 Hand Held Shower Wand 8349 Metal Hose A726 Slidebar & Clamp 101629 Clamp 100686 Wall Bracket 104414 Vacuum Breaker Vacuum Breaker 52703 Drop ell Drop ell A725 Tub Spout Tub Spout 3804 Parts Chart* Clamp Wall Bracket 8343pt: Rev. 8/07 Installation Guide Guía de Instalación Guide d’installation Please Contact Moen First For Installation Help, Missing or Replacement Parts(USA) 1-800-BUY-MOEN (1-800-289-6636) Mon - Fri 8:00 AM to 7:00 PM, Eastern Sat. 9:00 AM to 3:00 PM Eastern WWW.MOEN.COM (Canada) 1-800-465-6130 Mon - Fri 7:30 AM to 8:00 PM, Eastern WWW.MOEN.CA Shower heads: Standard 9.5 L/min (2.5 gpm) max. and High Efficiency 7.6 L/min (2.0 gpm) max. or less For use with automatic compensating valves rated at 5.7 L/min (1.5 gpm) or less Automatic Compensating Valves: Posi-Temp® and CFG®: For use with Showerheads rated at 5.7 L/min (1.5 gpm) or higher ExactTemp® and ioDigital™: For use with Showerheads rated at 9.5 L/ min (2.5 gpm) or higher Moentrol®: For use with Showerheads rated at 4.9 L/min (1.3 gpm) or higher Por favor, contáctese primero con Moen Para obtener ayuda de instalación, piezas faltantes o de recambio 01-800-718-4345 Lunes a viernes de 8:00 a 20:00 hs. (Costa Este) Sáb. 8:00 a 18:30 hs. (Costa Este) WWW.MOEN.COM.MX Roseta: Estándar 9.5 L/min (2.5 gpm) máx. y alta eficiencia 7.6 L/min (2.0 gpm) máx. o menos Para usarse con válvulas de compensación automática de 5.7 L/min (1.5 gpm) o menos Válvulas de compensación automática: Posi-Temp® y CFG®: para usarse con rosetas de 5.7 L/min (1.5 gpm) o más ExactTemp® y ioDigital™: para usarse con rosetas de 9.5 L/min (2.5 gpm) o más Moentrol®: para usarse con rosetas de 4.9 L/min (1.3 gpm) o más Veuillez d’abord contacter Moen en cas de problèmes avec l’installation, ou pour obtenir toute pièce manquante ou de rechange 1-800-465-6130 Du lundi au vendredi: de 7 h 30 à 20 h, HE WWW.MOEN.CA Pommes de douche : Standards 2,5 gpm (9,5 L/min) max. ou à haute efficacité 2,0 gpm max. (7,6 L/min) ou moins À utiliser avec des soupapes de compensation automatiques dont le débit nominal est de 5,7 L/min (1,5 gpm) ou moins Soupapes de compensation automatique : Posi-Temp® et CFG®: À utiliser avec des pommes de douche dont le débit nominal est de 5,7 L/min (1,5 gpm) ou plus ExactTemp® et ioDigitalMC : À utiliser avec des pommes de douche dont le débit nominal est de 9,5 L/min (2,5 gpm) ou plus Moentrol® : À utiliser avec des pommes de douche dont le débit nomi- nal est de 4,9 L/min (1,3 gpm) ou plus INS1987A - 8/14 HANDSHOWER SLIDEBAR ASSEMBLY MODEL 8300, 52710 Series ENSAMBLE DE HANDSHOWER CON BARRA MODELO Serie 8300, 52710 ASSEMBLAGE DE BARRE À GLISSIÉRE MODÈLE 8300, 52710 5/8” 7/64” 5/16” HELPFUL TOOLS For safety and ease of faucet replacement, Moen recommends the use of these helpful tools. HERRAMIENTAS ÚTILES Para que el cambio de la llave sea fácil y seguro, Moen le recomienda usar estas útiles herramientas. OUTILS UTILES Par mesure de sécurité et pour faciliter l’installation, Moen suggère l’utilisation des outils suivants. Drill pilot hole to determine if there’s a stud. If no wood stud, go to step 2. Perfore el agujero experimental para determinarse si hay de madera. Si ninguna madera, diríjase al paso 2A. Forez le trou pilote pour déterminer s’il y a en bois. Si aucun bois, aller à l’étape 2A. 36 5/8" 30 5/8" 7/64" 7/64"1 36 5/8" 5/16" 5/16"2 36 5/8" 30 5/8" 5/8" 5/8" 2A A B D x2 x2C x2 x2 E F optional/opcional/facultatif not included/no incluido/non inclus Parts List Lista de piezas Liste des pièces A. Brackets B. Slide Bar & Clamp C. Bracket Adapter D. Toggle (x2) E. Plug Button (x2) F. Toggle Screws (x2) A. Ménsulas B. Barra deslizante y abrazadera C. Adaptador de la ménsula D. Articulación (x2) E. Botón tapón (x2) F. Tornillos de la articulación (x2) A. Support B. Barre coulissante et pince C. Adaptateur de support D. Dispositif d’ancrage (2) E. Bouton de bouchage (2) F. Vis de dispositif d’ancrage (2) CAUTION — TIPS FOR REMOVAL OF OLD FAUCET: Always turn water supply OFF before removing existing faucet or disassembling the valve. Open faucet handle to relieve water pressure and ensure that complete water shut- off has been accomplished. PRECAUCIÓN — CONSEJOS PARA CAMBIAR LA LLAVE MEZCLADORA: Siempre CIERRE la toma de agua antes de quitar la llave existente o desmontar la válvula. Abra la llave para liberar la presión, y asegúrese de que esté bien cerrada el agua. ATT ENTION — SUGGESTIONS POUR ENLEVER L’ANCIEN ROBINET: Toujours couper l’alimentation en eau avant d’enlever ou de démonter le robinet. Ouvrir le robinet pour libérer la pression d’eau et pour s’assurer que l’alimentation en eau a bien été coupée. INS1987A - 8/14 C A B 2 1 3 A B G Wood screw option Opción de madera del tornillo Option en bois de vis 4 B F Wood screw option Opción de madera del tornillo Option en bois de vis 5 B D A * optional/opcional/facultatif not included/no incluido/non inclus 6 B 1 2 7 E x2 8 INS1987A - 8/14 ©2014 Moen Incorporated Moen Limited Lifetime Warranty Moen le otorga Garantía limitada de por vida Garantie à vie limitée de Moen Moen Incorporated 25300 Al Moen Drive North Olmsted, Ohio 44070-8022 U.S.A. Moen de Mexico, S.A. de C.V. Carretera Saltillo-Monterrey KM 14.7 Ramos Arizpe, Coahuila Mexico 25900 Moen Inc. 2816 Bristol Circle Oakville, Ontario L6H 5S7 Canada Moen products have been manufactured under the highest standards of quality and workmanship. Moen warrants to the original consumer purchaser for as long as the original consumer purchaser owns their home (the “Warranty Period” for homeown- ers), that this faucet will be leak- and drip-free during normal use and all parts and finishes of this faucet will be free from defects in material and manufacturing workmanship. All other purchasers (in- cluding purchasers for industrial, commercial and business use) are warranted for a period of 5 years from the original date of purchase (the “Wa rranty Period” for non-homeowners). If this faucet should ever develop a leak or drip during the Warranty Period, Moen will FREE OF CHARGE provide the parts necessary to put the faucet back in good working condition and will replace FREE OF CHARGE any part or finish that proves defective in material and manufac-turing workmanship, under normal installation, use and service. Replacement parts may be obtained by calling 1-800- 289-6636 (Canada 1-800-465-6130), or by writing to the address shown. Proof of purchase (original sales receipt) from the original consumer purchaser must accompany all warranty claims. Defects or damage caused by the use of other than genuine Moen parts is not covered by this warranty. This warranty is applicable only to faucets purchased after December, 1995 and shall be effective from the date of purchase as shown on purchaser’s receipt. This warranty is extensive in that it covers replacement of all defective parts and finishes. However, damage due to installation error, product abuse, product misuse, or use of cleaners containing abrasives, alcohol or other organic solvents, whether performed by a contractor, service company, o r yourself, a re excluded from this warranty. Moen will not be responsible for labor charges and/ or damage incurred in installation, repair or replacement, nor for any indirect, incidental or consequential damages, losses, injury or costs of any nature relating to this faucet. Except as provided by law, this warranty is in lieu of and excludes all other warranties, conditions and guarantees, whether expressed or implied, statutory or otherwise, including without restriction those of merchantability or of fitness for use. Some states, provinces and nations do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state, province to province, nation to nation. Moen will advise you of the procedure to follow in making warranty claims. Simply write to Moen Incorporated using the address below. Explain the defect and include proof of purchase and your name, address, area code and telephone number. Los productos Moen son fabricados bajo las más estrictas normas de calidad y mano de obra. Moen le garantiza al comprador original que durante el tiempo que la tenga su casa (el “periodo de garantía”, para los propietarios), esta llave no tendrá ni goteras ni fugas duran- te el uso normal, y que todas las piezas y acabados estarán libres de defectos en material y mano de obra. Asimismo, a todos nuestros otros consumidores (industriales, comerciales y empresariales), les otorgamos 5 años de garantía a partir de la fecha original de compra (el “periodo de garantía” para usos no domésticos). Si en esta llave mezcladora se llegara a producir alguna fuga o gotera durante el periodo de garantía, Moen le proporcionará SIN COSTO ALGUNO las piezas necesarias para que vuelva a funcionar en perfectas condiciones y reemplazará también SIN COSTO para usted, cualquier pieza o acabado que pudiera tener algún defecto en la fabricación o mano de obra, bajo condiciones normales de instalación, uso y servicio. Las piezas de repuesto se pueden obtener llamando en la República Mexicana al 01-800-718-4345 o si escribe en la dirección que aparece aquí. Para que el comprador original pueda hacer efectiva la garantía, cualquier reclamación deberá ir acompañada por el comprobante de compra (nota de venta origi- nal). La garantía no cubre los defectos o daños causados por el uso de otras partes que no sean piezas originales Moen. Esta garantía es aplicable sólo para las llaves compradas después de diciembre de 1995, y entrará en vigencia a partir de la fecha que aparece en la nota de compra. Esta garantía es amplia en el sentido que cubre el reemplazo de todas las partes y acabados defectuosos. Sin embargo, se excluyen de esta garantía los daños causados por un error de instalación, abuso del producto, mal uso del mismo, o uso de limpiadores que contengan abrasivos, alcohol u otros solventes orgánicos, ya sea por parte del contratista, compañía de servicio o usted mismo. Moen no se hace tampoco responsable por los gastos de mano de obra ni por los daños incurridos en la instalación, reparación o sustitución, ni por ningún daño indirecto, directo o consecuente, ni por pérdidas, lesiones o costos de alguna otra índole relacionados con esta llave. A menos que lo estipule la ley, esta garantía reemplaza y excluye cualquier otra garantía y condiciones, ya sea expresas o implícitas, establecidas por la ley o de otra manera, incluyendo sin restricción aquellas en que el producto se encuentra en condiciones aptas para la venta o se adecúa al uso específico para el cual fue adquirido. Algunos estados, provincias y naciones no permiten la exclusión o limitación de los daños incidentales o consecuentes, de modo que las limitaciones o exclusiones mencionadas pueden no ser aplicables a usted. Esta garantía le otorga derechos legales específicos y usted puede también tener otros derechos que cambian de un estado a otro o de una provincia o nación a otra. Moen lo asesorará en el pro- cedimiento a seguir para hacer válida esta garantía. Sencillamente escriba a Moen Incorporated utilizando la dirección que aparece a continuación. Explique el tipo de defecto e incluya comprobantes de compra, su nombre, dirección, código de área y número de teléfono. Les produits Moen sont fabriqués selon les normes les plus élevées de qualité et de main-d’œuvre. Moen garantit à l’acheteur original, tant qu’il sera propriétaire de la maison (la « période de garantie » des propriétaires), que ce robinet sera libre de toute fuite pendant son usage normal et qu’aucune pièce et qu’aucun fini de ce robinet ne présenteront de défaut de matériel et de main-d’œuvre en usine. Tous les autres achats (y compris les achats à des fins industrielles, commerciales et d’affaires) sont garantis pendant cinq (5) ans à compter de la date d’achat originale (période de garantie commerciale). Si ce robinet fuit ou dégoutte durant la période de garantie, Moen s’engage à fournir GRATUITEMENT les pièces de rechange requises pour remettre le robinet en état de fonctionnement ainsi qu’à remplacer GRATUITEMENT toute pièce ou tout fini dont le matériel, la fabrication ou la main-d’œuvre, lors de l’installation, de l’usage et du service habituels, s’avèrent défectueux. On peut obtenir les pièces de rechange en composant le 1-800-465-6130 ou en écrivant à l’adresse indiquée ci-dessous. Le reçu de vente original de l’acheteur initial du robinet doit accompagner toute réclamation. Les défauts ou les dommages causés par l’utilisation de pièces non fournies par Moen ne sont pas couverts par cette garantie. Cette garantie s’applique uniquement aux robinets achetés après décembre 1995 et entre en vigueur à compter de la date d’achat indiquée sur le reçu de caisse du client. Cette garantie s’étend aussi au remplacement de toute pièce ou de tout fini défectueux. Cependant, sont exclus de cette garantie, les dommages causés par une erreur d’installation, un abus du produit, une mauvaise utilisation du produit, l’utilisation de produits de nettoyage contenant des agents abrasifs, de l’alcool ou des solvants organiques, qu’ils soient utilisés par un entrepreneur, une entreprise de service ou le consommateur. Moen décline toute responsabilité quant aux frais de main-d’œuvre et aux dommages causés durant l’installation, la réparation ou le remplacement, et aux dommages, pertes, blessures ou coûts, indirects ou consécutifs, connexes à ce robinet. Sauf lorsque la loi le stipule, cette garantie remplace et exclut toutes les autres garanties et conditions, qu’elles soient indiquées expressément ou non, obligatoires ou autres, y compris, sans restriction, celles qui visent la commercialisation ou l’aptitude d’utilisation. Certains pays, états ou provinces ne permettent aucune exclusion, ni limitation suite aux dommages indirects ou consécutifs. Les limitations ou les exclusions précitées ne s’appliqueraient pas dans ces cas. Cette garantie accorde des droits juridiques et il est possible que d’autres droits soient applicables selon l’état, la province ou le pays. Moen avisera le consommateur de la procédure à suivre pour soumettre une réclamation. Il suffit d’écrire à Moen inc. à l’adresse indiquée ci-dessous, pour expliquer le défaut, d’inclure une preuve d’achat, d’inscrire son nom, son adresse ainsi que son indicatif régional et son numéro de téléphone. Installation & Operation Manual Models: 125 - 200 This manual must only be used by a qualified heating installer / service technician. Read all instructions, including this manual and the Armor Wall Mount Water Heater Service Manual, before installing. Perform steps in the order given. Failure to comply could result in severe personal injury, death, or substantial property damage. WARNING Save this manual for future reference. WA-I-O Rev G -- This water heater MUST NOT be installed in any location where gasoline or flammable vapors are likely to be present. -- WHAT TO DO IF YOU SMELL GAS • Do not try to light any appliance. • Do not touch any electric switch; do not use any phone in your building. • Immediately call your gas supplier from a near by phone. Follow the gas supplier’s instructions. • If you cannot reach your gas supplier, call the fire department. • Installation and service must be performed by a qualified installer, service agency, or the gas supplier. WARNING: If the information in this manual is not followed exactly, a fire or explosion may result causing property damage, personal injury or loss of life. 2 Hazard definitions The following defined terms are used throughout this manual to bring attention to the presence of hazards of various risk levels or to important information concerning the life of the product. DANGER WARNING CAUTION CAUTION NOTICE DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury. CAUTION used without the safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in property damage. NOTICE indicates special instructions on installation, operation, or maintenance that are important but not related to personal injury or property damage. HAZARD DEFINITIONS .................................................... 2 PLEASE READ BEFORE PROCEEDING ........................ 3 THE ARMOR WALL MOUNT WATER HEATER -- HOW IT WORKS........................................................................... 4-5 RATINGS ........................................................................... 6 1. DETERMINE WATER HEATER LOCATION Provide Clearances ......................................................... 7-8 Provide Air Openings to Room .......................................... 9 Wall Mounting Location ..................................................... 9 Residential Garage Installation .......................................... 9 Vent and Air Piping ............................................................ 9 Prevent Combustion Air Contamination ............................. 9 Corrosive Contaminants and Sources ............................. 10 Using an Existing Vent System to Install a New Water Heater............................................................................... 10 Removing a Water Heater from Existing Common Vent . 11 2. PREPARE WATER HEATER Remove Water Heater from Wood Pallet ........................ 12 Gas Conversions ......................................................... 12-13 Mounting the Water Heater ........................................ 13 3. GENERAL VENTING Direct Venting Options ..................................................... 14 Install Vent and Combustion Air Piping ........................... 15 Requirements for Installation in Canada .......................... 16 Sizing ............................................................................... 16 Min./Max. Combustion Air & Vent Piping Lengths ............16 Materials ............................................................................16 Optional Room Air ............................................................ 17 PVC/CPVC ....................................................................... 18 Polypropylene................................................................... 19 Stainless Steel Vent ......................................................... 20 4. SIDEWALL DIRECT VENTING Vent/Air Termination - Sidewall ................................... 21-24 Determine Location ................................................ 21-23 Prepare Wall Penetrations .......................................... 23 Multiple Vent/Air Terminations ......................................... 24 Sidewall Termination - Optional Concentric Vent ....... 25-27 5. VERTICAL DIRECT VENTING Vent/Air Termination - Vertical .................................... 28-29 Determine Location ..................................................... 28 Prepare Roof Penetrations ......................................... 29 Multiple Vent/Air Terminations .................................... 29 Vertical Termination - Optional Concentric Vent ... 30-31 Alternate Vertical Concentric Venting .................... 32-33 6. SYSTEM PIPING System Water Piping Methods ......................................... 34 Flow Switch Installation .................................................... 34 Flow Switch Adjustment ................................................... 34 Scalding............................................................................ 35 Water Chemistry............................................................... 35 Piping Components .......................................................... 35 7. GAS CONNECTIONS Connecting Gas Supply Piping ........................................ 41 Natural Gas ...................................................................... 42 Pipe Sizing for Natural Gas ........................................ 42 Natural Gas Supply Pressure Requirements ............. 42 Propane Gas .................................................................... 42 Pipe Sizing for Propane Gas ...................................... 42 Propane Supply Pressure Requirements ................... 42 Check Inlet Gas Supply ................................................... 43 Gas Pressure ................................................................... 44 Gas Valve Replacement .................................................. 44 8. FIELD WIRING Line Voltage Connections ................................................ 45 Low Voltage Connections ................................................ 45 Wiring of the Cascade ...................................................... 47 9. CONDENSATE DISPOSAL Condensate Drain ............................................................ 49 10. STARTUP ............................................................. 50-54 11. OPERATING INFORMATION General............................................................................. 55 Cascade ........................................................................... 57 Sequence of Operation .................................................... 58 Armor Wall Mount Water Heater Control Module ............ 59 Status Display Screens ............................................... 60-62 12. MAINTENANCE Maintenance & Annual Startup ................................... 63-67 13. DIAGRAMS Ladder Diagram ............................................................... 68 Wiring Diagram................................................................. 69 Revision Notes .................................................. Back Cover Contents Installation & Operation Manual Please read before proceeding Installer – Read all instructions, including this manual and the Armor Wall Mount Water Heater Service Manual, before installing. Perform steps in the order given. Have this water heater serviced/inspected by a qualified service technician, at least annually. Failure to comply with the above could result in severe personal injury, death or substantial property damage. Failure to adhere to the guidelines on this page can result in severe personal injury, death, or substantial property damage. When servicing the water heater – • To avoid electric shock, disconnect electrical supply before performing maintenance. • To avoid severe burns, allow the water heater to cool before performing maintenance. Water heater operation – • Do not block flow of combustion or ventilation air to the water heater. • Should overheating occur or gas supply fail to shut off, do not turn off or disconnect electrical supply to circulator. Instead, shut off the gas supply at a location external to the appliance. • Do not use this water heater if any part has been under water. The possible damage to a flooded appliance can be extensive and present numerous safety hazards. Any appliance that has been under water must be replaced. When calling or writing about the water heater – Please have the water heater model and serial number from the water heater rating plate. Consider piping and installation when determining water heater location. Any claims for damage or shortage in shipment must be filed immediately against the transportation company by the consignee. Factory warranty (shipped with unit) does not apply to units improperly installed or improperly operated. 3 -- This water heater MUST NOT be installed in any location where gasoline or flammable vapors are likely to be present. -- WHAT TO DO IF YOU SMELL GAS • Do not try to light any appliance. • Do not touch any electric switch; do not use any phone in your building. • Immediately call your gas supplier from a near by phone. Follow the gas supplier’s instructions. • If you cannot reach your gas supplier, call the fire department. • Installation and service must be performed by a qualified installer, service agency, or the gas supplier. WARNING NOTICE WARNING WARNING If the information in this manual is not followed exactly, a fire or explosion may result causing property damage, personal injury or loss of life. WARNING DO NOT install units in rooms or environments that contain corrosive contaminants (see Table 1A on page 10). Failure to comply could result in severe personal injury, death, or substantial property damage. Installation & Operation Manual 4 The Armor Wall Mount Water Heater - How it works... 1. Stainless steel heat exchanger Allows water to flow through specially designed coils for maximum heat transfer, while providing protection against flue gas corrosion. The coils are encased in a jacket that contains the combustion process. 2. Combustion chamber access cover Allows access to the combustion side of the heat exchanger coils. 3. Blower The blower pulls in air and gas through the venturi (item 5). Air and gas mix inside the blower and are pushed into the burner, where they burn inside the combustion chamber. 4. Gas valve The gas valve senses the negative pressure created by the blower, allowing gas to flow only if the gas valve is powered and combustion air is flowing. 5. Venturi The venturi controls air and gas flow into the burner. 6. Flue gas sensor (limit rated) This sensor monitors the flue gas exit temperature. The control module will modulate and shut down the water heater if the flue gas temperature gets too hot. This protects the flue pipe from overheating. 7. Water heater outlet temperature sensor (housed with the high limit sensor) This sensor monitors water heater outlet water temperature (system supply). 8. Water heater inlet temperature sensor This sensor monitors return water temperature (system return). If selected as the controlling sensor, the control module adjusts the water heater firing rate so the inlet temperature is correct. 9. Flow Switch (not shown) The flow switch is a safety device that ensures flow through the heat exchanger during operation. This appliance is low mass and should never be operated without flow. The flow switch makes contact when flow is detected and allows the unit to operate. If flow is discontinued during operation for any reason the flow switch will break the control circuit and the unit will shut down. 10. Electronic LCD display The electronic display consists of 4 buttons, a navigation dial and a multiple line liquid crystal display. 11. Flue pipe adapter Allows for the connection of the vent pipe system to the water heater. 12. Burner (not shown) Made with metal fiber and stainless steel construction, the burner uses pre-mixed air and gas and provides a wide range of firing rates. 13. Water outlet Water connection that supplies hot water to the tank. 14. Water inlet Water connection that returns water from the tank to the heat exchanger. 15. Gas connection pipe Threaded pipe connection. This pipe should be connected to the incoming gas supply for the purpose of delivering gas to the water heater. 16. SMART SYSTEM Control Module The SMART SYSTEM Control responds to internal and external signals and controls the blower, gas valve, and pumps to meet the demand. 17. Manual air vent Designed to remove trapped air from the heat exchanger coils. 18. Air intake adapter Allows for the connection of the air intake pipe to the water heater. 19. High voltage junction box The junction box contains the connection points for the line voltage power and the pump. 20. Low voltage connection board The connection board is used to connect external low voltage devices. 21. Low voltage wiring connections (knockouts) Conduit connection points for the low voltage connection board. 22. Condensate drain connection Connects the condensate drain line to a 1/2" pipe. 23. Access cover - front Provides access to all internal components. 24. Ignition electrode Provides direct spark for igniting the burner. 25. Flame inspection window The quartz glass window provides a view of the burner surface and flame. 26. Gas shutoff switch An electrical switch designed to cut power to the gas valve. 27. High limit sensor (housed with the outlet temperature sensor) Device that monitors the outlet water temperature. If the temperature exceeds its setting, the integrated control will break the control circuit, shutting the water heater down. 28. Relief valve Protects the heat exchanger from over pressure and temperature conditions. The relief valve is set at 150 PSI. 29. Flame sensor Used by the control module to detect the presence of burner flame. 30. Line voltage wiring connections (knockouts) Conduit connection points for the high voltage junction box. 31. Air pressure switch The air pressure switch detects blocked inlet or outlet conditions. 32. Pump relay (not shown) The pump relay is used to control the circulation pump. 33. Transformer The transformer provides 24V power to the integrated control. Installation & Operation Manual 5 The Armor Wall Mount Water Heater - How it works... (continued) 11 18 17 23 10 28 16 33 20 29 31 3 13 14 7 27 8 6 2 25 24 5 4 26 22 19 1 FRONT OF UNIT 14 13 30 21 15 22 Front View Left Side (inside unit) Right Side (inside unit) Bottom View Installation & Operation Manual Ratings Notes: 1. Armor wall mount water heaters require special gas venting. Use only the vent materials and methods specified in the Armor Wall Mount Installation and Operation Manual. 2. Standard Armor wall mount water heaters are equipped to operate from sea level to 4,500 feet only with no adjustments. The water heater will de-rate by 4% for each 1,000 feet above sea level up to 4,500 feet. 3. High altitude Armor wall mount water heaters are equipped to operate from 3,000 to 12,000 feet only. The water heater will de-rate by 2% for each 1,000 feet above sea level. High altitude models are manufactured with a different control module for altitude operation, but the operation given in this manual remains the same as the standard models. A high altitude label (as shown in FIG. A) is also affixed to the unit. De-rate values are based on proper combustion calibration and CO2’s adjusted to the recommended levels. 4. The manual reset high limit provided with the Armor wall mount water heater is listed to UL353. The auto reset high limit is listed to ANSI Z21.87. 6 Maximum allowed working pressure is located on the rating plate. NOTICE Figure A High Altitude Label Location Model Number Note: Change “N” to “L” for L.P. gas models. CSA Input Modulation Btu/hr Water Content Gallons Water Connections Gas Connections Vent/Air Size (Note 2, 3)(Note 1) WAN125PM 25,000 - 125,000 1.0 1"1/2"3"/3" WAN200PM 40,000 - 199,999 1.8 1-1/4"1/2"3"/3" *Note: Applies to WAN200 Models ONLY. HLW UNIT EQUIPPED FOR HIGH ALTITUDE 3,000 FT. TO 12,000 FT. * Installation & Operation Manual 1 Determine water heater location 7 The Armor wall mount water heater gas manifold and controls met safe lighting and other performance under tests specified in ANSI Z21.10.3 – latest edition. Failure to keep water heater area clear and free of combustible materials, gasoline, and other flammable liquids and vapors can result in severe personal injury, death, or substantial property damage. Installation must comply with: • Local, state, provincial, and national codes, laws, regulations, and ordinances. • National Fuel Gas Code, ANSI Z223.1 – latest edition. • National Electrical Code. • For Canada only: B149.1 Installation Code, CSA C22.1 Canadian Electrical Code Part 1 and any local codes. Before locating the water heater, check: 1. Check for nearby connection to: • Water piping • Venting connections • Gas supply piping • Electrical power 2. Locate the appliance so that if water connections should leak, water damage will not occur. When such locations cannot be avoided, it is recommended that a suitable drain pan, adequately drained, be installed under the appliance. The pan must not restrict combustion air flow. Under no circumstances is the manufacturer to be held responsible for water damage in connection with this appliance, or any of its components. 3. Check area around the water heater. Remove any combustible materials, gasoline and other flammable liquids. 4. The Armor wall mount water heater must be installed so that gas control system components are protected from dripping or spraying water or rain during operation or service. 5. If a new wall mount water heater will replace an existing water heater, check for and correct system problems. 6. Check around the water heater for any potential air contaminants that could risk corrosion to the water heater or the water heater combustion air supply (see Table 1A on page 10). Prevent combustion air contamination. Remove any of these contaminants from the water heater area. Provide clearances: Clearances from combustible materials 1. Hot water pipes—at least 1/4" from combustible materials. 2. Vent pipe – at least 1" from combustible materials. 3. See FIG.’s 1-1 and 1-2 on page 8 for other clearance minimums. Clearances for service access 1. See FIG.’s 1-1 and 1-2 on page 8 for recommended service clearances. If you do not provide the minimum clearances shown, it may not be possible to service the water heater without removing it from the space. Closet and alcove installations This appliance requires a special venting system. If using PVC the vent connection to the appliance must be made with the starter CPVC pipe section provided with the appliance. The field provided vent fittings must be cemented to the CPVC pipe section. Use only the vent materials, primer and cement specified in this manual to make the vent connections. Failure to follow this warning could result in fire, personal injury, or death. For closet and alcove installations as shown in FIG.’s 1-1 and 1-2, CPVC vent material must be used inside the structure. The ventilating air openings shown in FIG.’s 1-1 and 1-2 are required for this arrangement. Failure to follow this warning could result in fire, personal injury, or death. WARNING WARNING NOTICE WARNING A closet is any room in which the water heater is installed which has a volume of 104 cubic feet maximum. An alcove is any room which meets the criteria for a closet with the exception that it does not have a door. Example: Room dimensions = 4 feet long, 5 feet wide, and 9 foot ceiling = 4 x 5 x 9 = 180 cubic feet. WARNING This appliance is certified as an indoor appliance. Do not install the appliance outdoors or locate where the appliance will be exposed to freezing temperatures or to temperatures that exceed 100°F. Do not install the appliance where the relative humidity may exceed 93%. Do not install the appliance where condensation may form on the inside or outside of the appliance, or where condensation may fall onto the appliance. Failure to install the appliance indoors could result in severe personal injury, death, or substantial property damage. DO NOT install units in rooms or environments that contain corrosive contaminants (see Table 1A on page 10). Failure to comply could result in severe personal injury, death, or substantial property damage. WARNING Installation & Operation Manual 1 Determine water heater location 8 Figure 1-2 Alcove Installation - Minimum Required Clearances Figure 1-1 Closet Installation - Minimum Required Clearances IMG00548 LEFT 24" SERVICE 0" MINIMUM RIGHT 24" SERVICE 0" MINIMUM TOP 6" MINIMUM RIGHT 0" MINIMUM 1" MINIMUM CLEARANCE AROUND VENT PIPE OPEN FRONT 1/4" MINIMUM CLEARANCE AROUND HOT WATER PIPES FRONT 24" SERVICE 6" MINIMUM *AREA OF EACH OPENING: 1 SQ. INCH PER 1000 BTU PER HOUR INPUT WITH A MINIMUM OF 100 SQ. INCHES. IMG00547 LEFT 24" SERVICE 0" MINIMUM RIGHT 24" SERVICE 0" MINIMUM 6" 6" TOP 6" MINIMUM RIGHT 0" MINIMUM 1" MINIMUM CLEARANCE AROUND VENT PIPE VENTILATING* AIR OPENING CLOSED DOOR FRONT 24" SERVICE 6" MINIMUM VENTILATING* AIR OPENING 1/4" MINIMUM CLEARANCE AROUND HOT WATER PIPES *AREA OF EACH OPENING: 1 SQ. INCH PER 1000 BTU PER HOUR INPUT WITH A MINIMUM OF 100 SQ. INCHES. WARNING For closet installations, CPVC or stainless steel vent material MUST BE used in a closet structure due to elevated temperatures. Failure to follow this warning could result in fire, personal injury, or death. Note: Service clearances are recommendations only. Note: Service clearances are recommendations only. WARNING For alcove installations, CPVC or stainless steel vent material MUST BE used in an alcove structure due to elevated temperatures. Failure to follow this warning could result in fire, personal injury, or death. Installation & Operation Manual 1 Determine water heater location (continued) 9 Provide air openings to room: Armor wall mount water heater alone in equipment room 1. No air ventilation openings into the equipment room are needed when clearances around the Armor wall mount water heater are at least equal to the SERVICE clearances shown in FIG.’s 1-1 and 1-2. For spaces that do NOT supply this clearance, provide two openings as shown in FIG. 1-1. Each opening must provide one square inch free area per 1,000 Btu/hr of water heater input. Armor wall mount water heater in same space with other gas or oil-fired appliances 1. Follow the National Fuel Gas Code (U.S.) or CSA B149.1 (Canada) to size/verify size of the combustion/ventilation air openings into the space. The space must be provided with combustion/ ventilation air openings correctly sized for all other appliances located in the same space as the Armor wall mount water heater. Do not install the water heater in an attic. Failure to comply with the above warnings could result in severe personal injury, death, or substantial property damage. 2. Size openings only on the basis of the other appliances in the space. No additional air opening free area is needed for the Armor wall mount water heater because it takes its combustion air from outside (direct vent installation). Residential garage installation Precautions Take the following precautions when installing the appliance in a residential garage. If the appliance is located in a residential garage, it should be installed in compliance with the latest edition of the National Fuel Gas Code, ANSI Z223.1 and/or CAN/CGA-B149 Installation Code. • Appliances located in residential garages and in adjacent spaces that open to the garage and are not part of the living space of a dwelling shall be installed so that all burners and burner ignition devices are located not less than 18 inches (46 cm) above the floor. • The appliance shall be located or protected so that it is not subject to physical damage by a moving vehicle. Vent and air piping The Armor wall mount water heater requires a special vent system, designed for pressurized venting. The water heater is to be used for either direct vent installation or for installation using indoor combustion air. When room air is considered, see the General Venting Section. Note prevention of combustion air contamination below when considering vent/ air termination. Vent and air must terminate near one another and may be vented vertically through the roof or out a side wall, unless otherwise specified. You may use any of the vent/air piping methods covered in this manual. Do not attempt to install the Armor wall mount water heater using any other means. Be sure to locate the water heater such that the vent and air piping can be routed through the building and properly terminated. The vent/air piping lengths, routing and termination method must all comply with the methods and limits given in this manual. Prevent combustion air contamination Install air inlet piping for the Armor wall mount water heater as described in this manual. Do not terminate vent/air in locations that can allow contamination of combustion air. Refer to Table 1A, page 10 for products and areas which may cause contaminated combustion air. You must pipe combustion air to the water heater air intake. Ensure that the combustion air will not contain any of the contaminants in Table 1A, page 10. Contaminated combustion air will damage the water heater, resulting in possible severe personal injury, death or substantial property damage. Do not pipe combustion air near a swimming pool, for example. Also avoid areas subject to exhaust fumes from laundry facilities. These areas will always contain contaminants. WARNING WARNING Wall mounting location Ensure the wall for which the water heater is intended to be mounted to is comprised of either, cement, brick, block, or wooden studs spaced 16" apart from center. Ensure the wall is capable of supporting at least 200 pounds. If flooding is possible, elevate the water heater sufficiently to prevent water from reaching the water heater. Ensure the water heater is installed in a location that minimizes the risk of water damage due to valves, pumps, etc. Installation & Operation Manual 1 Determine water heater location 10 Products to avoid: Spray cans containing chloro/fluorocarbons Permanent wave solutions Chlorinated waxes/cleaners Chlorine-based swimming pool chemicals Calcium chloride used for thawing Sodium chloride used for water softening Refrigerant leaks Paint or varnish removers Hydrochloric acid/muriatic acid Cements and glues Antistatic fabric softeners used in clothes dryers Chlorine-type bleaches, detergents, and cleaning solvents found in household laundry rooms Adhesives used to fasten building products and other similar products Areas likely to have contaminants Dry cleaning/laundry areas and establishments Swimming pools Metal fabrication plants Beauty shops Refrigeration repair shops Photo processing plants Auto body shops Plastic manufacturing plants Furniture refinishing areas and establishments New building construction Remodeling areas Garages with workshops Table 1A Corrosive Contaminants and Sources Failure to follow all instructions can result in flue gas spillage and carbon monoxide emissions, causing severe personal injury or death. WARNING When using an existing vent system to install a new water heater: Check the following venting components before installing: • Material - For materials listed for use with this appliance, see Section 3 - General Venting. For polypropylene or stainless steel venting, an adapter of the same manufacturer must be used at the flue collar connection. • Size - To ensure proper pipe size is in place, see Table 3?. Check to see that this size is used throughout the vent system. • Manufacturer - For a stainless steel or polypropylene application, you must use only the listed manufacturers and their type product listed in Tables 3C and 3E for CAT IV positive pressure venting with flue producing condensate. • Supports - Non-combustible supports must be in place allowing a minimum 1/4" rise per foot. The supports should adequately prevent sagging and vertical slippage, by distributing the vent system weight. For additional information, consult the vent manufacturer’s instructions for installation. • Terminations - Carefully review Sections 3 through 5 to ensure requirements for the location of the vent and air terminations are met and orientation of these fit the appropriate image from the Horizontal or Vertical options listed in the General Venting Section. For stainless steel vent, only use terminations listed in Table 3I for the manufacturer of the installed vent. • Seal - With prior requirements met, the system should be tested to the procedure listed in parts (c) through (f) of the Removal of an Existing Water Heater Section on page 11. With polypropylene and stainless steel vent, seal and connect all pipe and components as specified by the vent manufacturer used; with PVC/CPVC vent, see the Installing Vent or Air Piping Section on page 17. WARNING If any of these conditions are not met, the existing system must be updated or replaced for that concern. Failure to follow all instructions can result in flue gas spillage and carbon monoxide emissions, causing severe personal injury or death. Installation & Operation Manual 11 1 Determine water heater location (continued) When removing a water heater from existing common vent system: Do not install the Armor wall mount water heater into a common vent with any other appliance. This will cause flue gas spillage or appliance malfunction, resulting in possible severe personal injury, death, or substantial property damage. Failure to follow all instructions can result in flue gas spillage and carbon monoxide emissions, causing severe personal injury or death. At the time of removal of an existing water heater, the following steps shall be followed with each appliance remaining connected to the common venting system placed in operation, while the other appliances remaining connected to the common venting system are not in operation. a. Seal any unused openings in the common venting system. b. Visually inspect the venting system for proper size and horizontal pitch and determine there is no blockage or restriction, leakage, corrosion, or other deficiencies, which could cause an unsafe condition. c. Test vent system – Insofar as is practical, close all building doors and windows and all doors between the space in which the appliances remaining connected to the common venting system are located and other spaces of the building. Turn on clothes dryers and any appliance not connected to the common venting system. Turn on any exhaust fans, such as range hoods and bathroom exhausts, so they will operate at maximum speed. Do not operate a summer exhaust fan. Close fireplace dampers. d. Place in operation the appliance being inspected. Follow the lighting instructions. Adjust thermostat so appliance will operate continuously. e. Test for spillage at the draft hood relief opening after 5 minutes of main burner operation. Use the flame of a match or candle, or smoke from a cigarette, cigar, or pipe. f. After it has been determined that each appliance remaining connected to the common venting system properly vents when tested as outlined herein, return doors, windows, exhaust fans, fireplace dampers, and any other gas-burning appliance to their previous conditions of use. DANGER WARNING g. Any improper operation of the common venting system should be corrected so the installation conforms with the National Fuel Gas Code, ANSI Z223.1/NFPA 54 and/or CAN/CSA B149.1, Natural Gas and Propane Installation Code. When resizing any portion of the common venting system, the common venting system should be resized to approach the minimum size as determined using the appropriate tables in the National Fuel Gas Code, ANSI Z223.1/NFPA and/or CAN/CSA B149.1, Natural Gas and Propane Installation Code. Installation & Operation Manual 12 2 Prepare water heater Remove water heater from wood pallet 1. After removing the outer shipping carton from the water heater, remove the parts box. 2. To remove the water heater from the pallet: a. Remove the two (2) lag bolts securing the bottom of the unit to the pallet. b. Lift the water heater off the wall bracket mounted to the pallet. 3. Remove the two (2) lag bolts securing the wall bracket to the wood pallet. Be certain not to lose the wall bracket as it will be needed for securing the water heater to the wall (FIG. 2-1). Do not drop the water heater or bump the jacket on the floor or pallet. Damage to the water heater can result. The gas conversion procedure should be accomplished BEFORE the water heater is installed. For a water heater already installed, you must turn off gas supply, turn off power, and allow the water heater to cool before proceeding. You must also completely test the water heater after conversion to verify performance as described under Start-up, Section 10 of this manual. You must install the propane orifice to fire the Armor wall mount water heater on propane. Verify when installing that the orifice size marking matches water heater size (Table 2A). Failure to comply could result in severe personal injury, death, or substantial property damage. 1. Remove the front access cover from the unit (no tools required for removal). 2. Disconnect the ribbon cable from the control board. Remove the four (4) screws securing the bezel to the front of the unit and remove the bezel. 3. Disconnect the Molex plug from the wiring connector located on the gas valve. 4. Using a 5/16" nut driver, loosen the band clamp securing the air intake coupler to the gas valve venturi. Remove the air intake pipe and coupler from the gas valve venturi. 5. Using a 4mm Allen wrench, remove the two (2) screws securing the gas valve venturi to the inlet of the combustion blower (FIG. 2-2). Remove the gas valve venturi assembly from the unit. DO NOT DISCARD- WILL BE NEEDED TO SECURE THE WATER HEATER TO THE WALL REMOVE SHIPPING [WALL] BRACKET Figure 2-1 Water Heater Mounted on Shipping Pallet Gas conversions LP Conversion Table Model LP Orifice Stamping 125 125 200 210 / W150 NOTICE WARNING Table 2A LP Conversion Table Figure 2-2 Gas Valve Power Switch & Venturi Removal DETAIL POWER SWITCH REMOVE THE TWO (2) SCREWS SECURING THE GAS VALVE VENTURI TO THE INLET OF THE COMBUSTION BLOWER 6. Using a 4mm Allen wrench, remove the four (4) screws securing the gas valve to the venturi (FIG. 2-3). 7. Locate the propane orifice disk from the conversion kit bag. Verify that the stamping on the orifice disk matches the water heater size (125 - 200, see Table 2A). 8. Place the orifice into the black rubber grommet in the side of the gas valve and secure inside the gas valve (see FIG. 2-3). 9. Reposition the gas valve against the venturi and replace the four (4) screws removed in Step 6, securing the valve to the venturi (FIG. 2-3). 10. Reposition the gas valve venturi assembly inside the unit. Secure the gas valve venturi to the combustion blower by replacing the two (2) screws removed in Step 5 (FIG. 2-2). 11. Reattach the air intake pipe and coupler to the gas valve venturi. Tighten the band clamp to secure. Installation & Operation Manual 2 Prepare water heater (continued) 13 FASTENERS APPROPRIATE FOR WALL TYPE QTY: 4 MOUNTING BRACKET (FACTORY SUPPLIED) WALL: WOOD OR METAL STUDS ON 16" CENTERS -OR- MASONRY / POURED CONCRETE Figure 2-4 Mounting the Water Heater Figure 2-3 Installing Propane Orifice 12. Reattach the wiring connector to the gas valve. Tighten the screw on the wiring connector to secure to the gas valve. 13. Turn the gas valve power switch to the “ON” position. 14. Reattach the bezel to the unit. Reconnect the ribbon cable to the control board. 15. After installation is complete, fill out the gas conversion label (in the conversion kit bag) and affix it to the unit under the water heater rating plate inside the unit. Attach the LP caution label (in the conversion kit bag) to the left side of the unit in the lower left corner. 16. Replace the front access cover. 2. Mount the wall bracket using the 2 1/4" lag bolts provided. Make sure the top edge of the bracket is away from the wall. Ensure the bracket is level when mounted. Extreme care is needed to ensure the bolts are secured in the center of the studs. 3. Hang the water heater on the bracket and secure the bottom of the water heater with two (2) additional lag bolts provided. Mounting to a metal studded wall: 1. The wall mount bracket is designed for a stud spacing of 16 inches from center. For other stud spacing a solid mounting surface must be provided by the installer. WARNING The water heater is too heavy for a single person to lift. A minimum of two people is needed for mounting the water heater onto the bracket. 2. Mount the wall bracket using two (2) field supplied toggle bolts capable of supporting 100 pounds each. Ensure the top edge of the bracket is away from the wall. Ensure the bracket is level when mounted. Extreme care is needed to ensure the bolts are secured in the center of the studs. 3. Hang the water heater on the bracket and secure the bottom of the water heater with two (2) field supplied toggle bolts. WARNING Do not mount the water heater to a hollow wall. Be sure to mount the water heater to the studs only. Mounting the water heater See page 9 of this manual for water heater mounting location instructions. NOTICE The Armor Wall Mount water heater is not intended for floor installation. Mounting to a wood studded wall: 1. The wall mount bracket is designed for a stud spacing of 16 inches from center. For other stud spacing a solid mounting surface must be provided by the installer. WARNING Do not mount the water heater to a hollow wall. Be sure to mount the water heater to the studs only. It must be mounted vertically, with the air and flue connections on the top and the water and gas connections on the bottom. Mounting to a concrete wall: 1. Mount the wall bracket using the two (2) wedge anchor bolts provided with the bracket. To mount the wedge anchor bolts, drill a 1/4" diameter hole 1 1/8" deep and insert anchor. Hang the bracket from the anchor and secure with the two nuts provided. Make sure the top edge of the bracket is away from the wall. Ensure bracket is level when mounted. Extreme care is needed to ensure the bolts are secured in the center of the studs. Note: If wall thickness does not allow a 1 1/8" deep hole, field supplied hardware suitable for the application should be provided. 2. Hang the water heater on the bracket and secure the bottom of the water heater with two (2) remaining anchors, following the instructions above. WARNING The water heater is too heavy for a single person to lift. A minimum of two people is needed for mounting the water heater onto the bracket. WARNING After converting to LP, check combustion per the Start-up procedure in Section 10 of this manual. Failure to check and verify combustion could result in severe personal injury, death, or substantial property damage. WARNING The water heater is too heavy for a single person to lift. A minimum of two people is needed for mounting the water heater onto the bracket. Installation & Operation Manual 3 General venting 14 Figure 3-1 Two-Pipe Sidewall Termination - See page 21 for more details Figure 3-3 Two-Pipe Vertical Termination - See page 28 for more details Direct venting options - Sidewall Vent Figure 3-2 PVC/CPVC Concentric Sidewall Termination - See page 25 for more details Figure 3-4 PVC/CPVC Concentric Vertical Termination - See page 30 for more details Figure 3-5 Vertical Vent, Sidewall Air Direct venting options - Vertical Vent Installation & Operation Manual 3 General venting (continued) This appliance requires a special venting system. Use only approved stainless steel, PVC, CPVC or polypropylene pipe and fittings listed in Tables 3D, 3E, and 3G for vent pipe, and fittings. Failure to comply could result in severe personal injury, death, or substantial property damage. Installation must comply with local requirements and with the National Fuel Gas Code, ANSI Z223.1 for U.S. installations or CSA B149.1 for Canadian installations. Install vent and combustion air piping DANGER The Armor wall mount water heater must be vented and supplied with combustion and ventilation air as described in this section. Ensure the vent and air piping and the combustion air supply comply with these instructions regarding vent system, air system, and combustion air quality. See also Section 1 of this manual. Inspect finished vent and air piping thoroughly to ensure all are airtight and comply with the instructions provided and with all requirements of applicable codes. Failure to provide a properly installed vent and air system will cause severe personal injury or death. WARNING NOTICE WARNING For closet and alcove installations, CPVC, polypropylene or stainless steel material MUST BE used in a closet/alcove structure. Failure to follow this warning could result in fire, personal injury, or death. Air intake/vent connections 1. Combustion Air Intake Connector (FIG. 3-6) - Used to provide combustion air directly to the unit from outdoors. A fitting is provided on the unit for final connection. Combustion air piping must be supported per guidelines listed in the National Mechanical Code, Section 305, Table 305.4 or as local codes dictate. 2. Vent Connector (FIG.'s 3-7 thru 3-10) - Used to provide a passageway for conveying combustion gases to the outside. A transition fitting is provided on the unit for final connection. Vent piping must be supported per the National Building Code, Section 305, Table 305.4 or as local codes dictate. The Armor wall mount water heater vent and air piping can be installed through the roof or through a sidewall. Follow the procedures in this manual for the method chosen. Refer to the information in this manual to determine acceptable vent and air piping length. You may use any of the vent/air piping methods covered in this manual. Do not attempt to install the Armor wall mount water heater using any other means. You must also install air piping from outside to the water heater air intake adapter unless following the Optional Room Air instructions on page 17 of this manual. The resultant installation is direct vent (sealed combustion). WARNING DO NOT mix components from different systems. The vent system could fail, causing leakage of flue products into the living space. Mixing of venting materials will void the warranty and certification of the appliance. WARNING Do not connect any other appliance to the vent pipe or multiple water heaters to a common vent pipe. Failure to comply could result in severe personal injury, death, or substantial property damage. Improper installation of venting systems may result in injury or death. CAUTION Follow the instructions in Section 1, page 10 of this manual when removing a water heater from an existing vent system. NOTICE 15 AIR Figure 3-6 Near Water Heater Air Piping Installation & Operation Manual 3 General venting 16 Requirements for installation in Canada 1. Installations must be made with a vent pipe system certified to ULC-S636. IPEX is an approved vent manufacturer in Canada supplying vent material listed to ULC-S636. 2. The first three (3) feet of plastic vent pipe from the appliance flue outlet must be readily accessible for visual inspection. 3. The components of the certified vent system must not be interchanged with other vent systems or unlisted pipe/fittings. For concentric vent installations, the inner vent tube must be replaced with field supplied certified vent material to comply with this requirement. 4. The 3 and 4" Concentric Vent Kit available from Lochinvar (see Section 4 – Sidewall Termination – Optional Concentric Vent) and the 3 and 4" Concentric Vent Kit available from IPEX are both approved for use on the Armor wall mount water heater. Both kits are listed to the ULC-S636 standard for use in Canada. Model Kit Number Equivalent Vent Length 125 - 200 CVK3003 3 feet Table 3A Concentric Vent Kit Equivalent Vent Lengths Minimum / Maximum allowable combustion air and vent piping lengths are as follows: Combustion Air = 12 equivalent feet minimum / 100 equivalent feet maximum Vent = 12 equivalent feet minimum / 100 equivalent feet maximum When determining equivalent combustion air and vent length, add 5 feet for each 90° elbow and 3 feet for each 45° elbow. EXAMPLE: 20 feet of PVC pipe + (4) 90° elbows + (2) 45° elbows + (1) concentric vent kit (CVK3003) = 49 equivalent feet of piping. The appliance output rating will reduce by up to 1.5% for each 25 feet of vent length. NOTICE Sizing The Armor wall mount water heater uses a 3 inch combustion air intake and vent pipe. The maximum length of each one is 100 feet. Increasing or decreasing combustion air or vent piping sizes is not authorized. NOTICE Air inlet pipe materials: The air inlet pipe(s) must be sealed. Choose acceptable combustion air inlet pipe materials from the following list: PVC, CPVC, Polypropylene or ABS Dryer Vent or Sealed Flexible Duct (not recommended for rooftop air inlet) Galvanized steel vent pipe with joints and seams sealed as specified in this section. Type “B” double-wall vent with joints and seams sealed as specified in this section. AL29-4C, stainless steel material to be sealed to specification of its manufacturer. *Plastic pipe may require an adapter (not provided) to transition between the air inlet connection on the appliance and the plastic air inlet pipe. WARNING Using air intake materials other than those specified can result in personal injury, death or property damage. NOTICE The use of double-wall vent or insulated material for the combustion air inlet pipe is recommended in cold climates to prevent the condensation of airborne moisture in the incoming combustion air. Sealing of Type “B” double-wall vent material or galvanized vent pipe material used for air inlet piping on a sidewall or vertical rooftop Combustion Air Supply System: a. Seal all joints and seams of the air inlet pipe using either Aluminum Foil Duct Tape meeting UL Standard 723 or 181A-P or a high quality UL Listed silicone sealant such as those manufactured by Dow Corning or General Electric. b. Do not install seams of vent pipe on the bottom of horizontal runs. c. Secure all joints with a minimum of three (3) sheet metal screws or pop rivets. Apply Aluminum Foil Duct Tape or silicone sealant to all screws or rivets installed in the vent pipe. d. Ensure that the air inlet pipes are properly supported. The PVC, CPVC, or ABS air inlet pipe should be cleaned and sealed with the pipe manufacturer’s recommended solvents and standard commercial pipe cement for the material used. The PVC, CPVC, ABS, Dryer Vent or Flex Duct air inlet pipe should use a silicone sealant to ensure a proper seal at the appliance connection and the air inlet cap connection. Dryer vent or flex duct should use a screw type clamp to seal the vent to the appliance air inlet and the air inlet cap. Proper sealing of the air inlet pipe ensures that combustion air will be free of contaminants and supplied in proper volume. Follow the polypropylene manufacturer’s instructions when using polypropylene material as an inlet pipe. When a sidewall or vertical rooftop combustion air supply system is disconnected for any reason, the air inlet pipe must be resealed to ensure that combustion air will be free of contaminants and supplied in proper volume. DANGER Failure to properly seal all joints and seams as required in the air inlet piping may result in flue gas recirculation, spillage of flue products and carbon monoxide emissions causing severe personal injury or death. Installation & Operation Manual 17 3 General venting (continued) Vent, air piping and termination: The Armor wall mount water heater vent and air piping can be installed through the roof or through a sidewall. Follow the procedures in this manual for the method chosen. Refer to the information in this manual to determine acceptable vent and air piping length. If the water heater combustion air inlet is located in a laundry room or pool facility, for example, these areas will always contain hazardous contaminants. To prevent the potential of severe personal injury or death, check for areas and products listed in Table 1A, page 10 before installing the water heater or air inlet piping. If contaminants are found, you MUST: • Remove contaminants permanently. —OR— • Relocate air inlet and vent terminations to other areas. WARNING WARNING Air contamination Pool and laundry products and common household and hobby products often contain fluorine or chlorine compounds. When these chemicals pass through the water heater, they can form strong acids. The acid can eat through the water heater wall, causing serious damage and presenting a possible threat of flue gas spillage or appliance water leakage into the building. Please read the information given in Table 1A, page 10, listing contaminants and areas likely to contain them. If contaminating chemicals will be present near the location of the water heater combustion air inlet, have your installer pipe the water heater combustion air and vent to another location, per this manual. Optional room air Commercial applications utilizing the Armor wall mount water heater may be installed with a single pipe carrying the flue products to the outside while using combustion air from the equipment room. In order to use the room air venting option the following conditions and considerations must be followed. • The unit MUST be installed using Room Air KIT30052. • The equipment room MUST be provided with properly sized openings to assure adequate combustion air. Refer to the instructions provided with the room air kit. • There will be a noticeable increase in the noise level during normal operation from the inlet air opening. • Using the room air kit makes the unit vulnerable to combustion air contamination from within the building. Please review Section 1, Prevent Combustion Air Contamination, to ensure proper installation. • Vent system and terminations must comply with the standard venting instructions set forth in this manual. NOTICE Optional room air is intended for commercial applications. Combustion air piping to the outside is recommended for residential applications. WARNING When utilizing the single pipe method, provisions for combustion and ventilation air must be in accordance with Air for Combustion and Ventilation, of the latest edition of the National Fuel Gas Code, ANSI Z223.1, in Canada, the latest edition of CGA Standard B149 Installation Code for Gas Burning Appliances and Equipment, or applicable provisions of the local building codes. Installation & Operation Manual 18 3 General venting 1. Work from the water heater to vent or air termination. Do not exceed 100 feet in length. 2. Cut pipe to the required lengths and deburr the inside and outside of the pipe ends. 3. Chamfer outside of each pipe end to ensure even cement distribution when joining. 4. Clean all pipe ends and fittings using a clean dry rag. (Moisture will retard curing and dirt or grease will prevent adhesion.) 5. Dry fit vent or air piping to ensure proper fit up before assembling any joint. The pipe should go a third to two-thirds into the fitting to ensure proper sealing after cement is applied. 6. Priming and Cementing: a. Handle fittings and pipes carefully to prevent contamination of surfaces. b. Apply a liberal even coat of primer to the fitting socket and to the pipe end to approximately 1/2" beyond the socket depth. c. Apply a second primer coat to the fitting socket. d. While primer is still wet, apply an even coat of approved cement to the pipe equal to the depth of the fitting socket along with an even coat of approved cement to the fitting socket. e. Apply a second coat of cement to the pipe. f. While the cement is still wet, insert the pipe into the fitting, if possible twist the pipe a 1/4 turn as you insert it. NOTE: If voids are present, sufficient cement was not applied and joint could be defective. g. Wipe excess cement from the joint removing ring or beads as it will needlessly soften the pipe. Table 3B PVC/CPVC Vent Pipe, and Fittings Approved PVC/CPVC Vent Pipe and Fittings Item Material Standard Vent pipe PVC Schedule 40, 80 ANSI/ASTM D1785 PVC - DWV ANSI/ASTM D2665 CPVC Schedule 40, 80 ANSI/ASTM F441 Vent fittings PVC Schedule 40 ANSI/ASTM D2466 PVC Schedule 80 ANSI/ASTM D2467 CPVC Schedule 80 ANSI/ASTM F439 Pipe Cement / Primer PVC ANSI/ASTM D2564 CPVC ANSI/ASTM F493 NOTICE: DO NOT USE CELLULAR (FOAM) CORE PIPE NOTE: In Canada, CPVC and PVC vent pipe, fi ttings and cement/ primer must be ULC-S636 certifi ed. WARNING Insulation should not be used on PVC or CPVC venting materials. The use of insulation will cause increased vent wall temperatures, which could result in vent pipe failure. Figure 3-7 Near Water Heater PVC/CPVC Venting CPVC STARTER PIECE Installing vent and air piping Use only cleaners, primers, and solvents that are approved for the materials which are joined together. NOTICE PVC/CPVC WARNING The vent connection to the appliance must be made with the starter CPVC pipe section provided with the appliance if PVC/CPVC vent is to be used. The field provided vent fittings must be cemented to the CPVC pipe section using an “All Purpose Cement” suitable for PVC and CPVC pipe. Use only the vent materials, primer, and cement specified in Table 3B to make the vent connections. Failure to follow this warning could result in fire, personal injury, or death. This product has been approved for use with the PVC/CPVC vent materials listed in Table 3B. All PVC vent pipes must be glued, properly supported, and the exhaust must be pitched a minimum of a 1/4 inch per foot back to the water heater (to allow drainage of condensate). NOTICE Installation & Operation Manual 3 General venting (continued) 19 The installer must use a specific vent starter adapter at the flue collar connection. This adapter is supplied by the vent manufacturer to adapt to its vent system. See Table 3D for approved vent adapters. NOTICE All vent connections MUST be secured by the vent manufacturer's joint connector (FIG. 3-9). NOTICE Polypropylene This product has been approved for use with polypropylene vent with the manufacturers listed in Table 3C. All terminations must comply with listed options in this manual and be a single-wall vent offering. For support and special connections required, see the manufacturer's instructions. All vent is to conform to standard diameter and equivalent length requirements established. When determining equivalent combustion air and vent length for polypropylene single-wall piping: • 1 foot of Duravent 4 inch single-wall pipe is equivalent to 1.6 feet of piping Flexible polypropylene For use of flex pipe, it is recommended to have the vent material in 32°F or higher ambient space before bending at installation. No bends should be made to greater than 45° and ONLY installed in vertical or near vertical installations (FIG. 3-8). Use only the adapters and vent system listed in Tables 3C and 3D. DO NOT mix vent systems of different types or manufacturers. Failure to comply could result in severe personal injury, death, or substantial property damage. WARNING Installations must comply with applicable national, state, and local codes. For Canadian installation, polypropylene vent must be listed as a ULC-S636 approved system. Installation of a polypropylene vent system should adhere to the vent manufacturer’s installation instructions supplied with the vent system. Table 3C Polypropylene Vent Pipe and Fittings WARNING Insulation should not be used on polypropylene venting materials. The use of insulation will cause increased vent wall temperatures, which could result in vent pipe failure. Model Centrotherm InnoFlue SW Duravent Polypro Polypropylene Adapter Joint Connector Sidewall Retaining Bracket* Sidewall Adapter* Polypropylene Adapter Joint Connector Sidewall Kit* 125 - 200 ISAG0303 w/ IAFC03 IANS03 IATP0303 ISTAGL0303 3PPS-AD w/ PPS-PAC 3PPS-LB 3PPS-HLK * These parts are only needed if the sidewall termination assembly is used (see FIG. 4-5B on page 24). Table 3D Approved PolypropyleneTerminations IMG00550 JOINT CONNECTOR REQUIRED AT ALL COMPONENT CONNECTIONS OF VENT SYSTEM POLYPROPYLENE ADAPTER W/FLUE CLAMPApproved Polypropylene Vent Manufacturers Make Model Centrotherm Eco Systems InnoFlue SW/Flex Duravent (M & G Group)PolyPro Single-Wall / PolyPro Flex IMG00840 *NOTES: 1) FLEX PIPE MAY ONLY BE RUN IN A VERTICAL ORIENTATION 2) ALL VENT LENGTHS REPRESENTED IN ABOVE CHARTS ARE EQUIVALENT LENGTHS. 3) SECTION A IS EQUIVALENT FEET OF RIGID PIPE, WHICH MAY INCLUDE 45 AND 90° ELBOWS. PLEASE SEE SIZING SECTION FOR DETERMINING EQUIVALENT FEET. “B” DIM 3” RIGID 3” FLEX 4” FLEX Duravent 3” 10 FT 20 FT 30 FT 40 FT 50 FT 60 FT 70 FT 80 FT 90 FT 60 FT 53 FT 47 FT 40 FT 33 FT 27 FT 20 FT 13 FT 7 FT 90 FT 80 FT 70 FT 60 FT 50 FT 40 FT 30 FT 20 FT 10 FT 10 FT 20 FT 30 FT 40 FT 50 FT 60 FT 70 FT 80 FT 90 FT 30 FT 27 FT 23 FT 20 FT 17 FT 13 FT 10 FT 7 FT 3 FT “A” DIM “B” DIM Duravent 4” “A” DIM 4” RIGID 4” FLEX “B” DIM 3” RIGID 3” FLEX 4” FLEX Centrotherm 3” 10 FT 20 FT 30 FT 40 FT 50 FT 60 FT 70 FT 80 FT 90 FT 45 FT 40 FT 35 FT 30 FT 25 FT 20 FT 15 FT 10 FT 5 FT 90 FT 80 FT 70 FT 60 FT 50 FT 40 FT 30 FT 20 FT 10 FT “A” DIM 10 FT 20 FT 30 FT 40 FT 50 FT 60 FT 70 FT 80 FT 90 FT 33 FT 29 FT 26 FT 22 FT 18 FT 15 FT 11 FT 7 FT 4 FT “B” DIM Centrotherm 4” “A” DIM 4” RIGID 4” FLEX CHIMNEY CAP A B 90 FT 80 FT 70 FT 60 FT 50 FT 40 FT 30 FT 20 FT 10 FT 5” FLEX Figure 3-8 Near Boiler Flexible Polypropylene Venting NOTICE NOTICE Figure 3-9 Near Water Heater Polypropylene Venting Installation & Operation Manual 20 The installer must use a specific vent starter adapter at the flue collar connection, supplied by the vent manufacturer to adapt to its vent system. See Table 3F for approved vent adapters. NOTICE Approved Stainless Steel Vent Manufacturers Make Model Dura Vent (M & G Group)FasNSeal Vent / FasNSeal Flex* Vent Z-Flex (Nova Flex Group)Z-Vent Heat Fab (Selkirk Corporation)Saf-T Vent Table 3E Stainless Steel Vent Pipe and Fittings *Use of FasNSeal Flex smooth inner wall vent is to be used in vertical or near vertical sections only, taking precaution to ensure no sagging occurs of the vent system. Connect to the FasNSeal rigid vent using specially designed adapters and sealing method, see manufacturer’s instructions. Stainless steel vent This product has been approved for use with stainless steel using the manufacturers listed in Table 3E. Use only the materials, vent systems, and terminations listed in Tables 3E and 3F. DO NOT mix vent systems of different types or manufacturers. Failure to comply could result in severe personal injury, death, or substantial property damage. WARNING Installations must comply with applicable national, state, and local codes. Stainless steel vent systems must be listed as a UL-1738 approved system for the United States and a ULC-S636 approved system for Canada. NOTICE Installation of a stainless steel vent system should adhere to the stainless steel vent manufacturer’s installation instructions supplied with the vent system. NOTICE 3 General venting Figure 3-10 Near Water Heater Stainless Steel Venting VENT 3" S.S. ADAPTER Model ProTech Heat Fab Z Flex FasNSeal Saf-T Vent Z-Vent S.S. Adapter Flue Termination Intake Air Termination S.S. Adapter Flue Termination Intake Air Termination S.S. Adapter Flue Termination Intake Air Termination 125 - 200 300716 (Vent) 300715 (Intake Air) FSBS3 FSRC3(R.C)303889 WB50210 (Vent) 9301PVC (Intake Air) 9392 5300CI 9314TERM 2SVSLPVC3 (Vent) 2SVSLA03 (Intake Air) 2SVSTP03 2SVSRCX03 2SVSTEX0390 Table 3F Approved Stainless Steel (S.S.) Terminations and Adapters Installation & Operation Manual 21 4 Sidewall direct venting Vent/air termination – sidewall Follow instructions below when determining vent location to avoid possibility of severe personal injury, death, or substantial property damage. A gas vent extending through an exterior wall shall not terminate adjacent to a wall or below building extensions such as eaves, parapets, balconies, or decks. Failure to comply could result in severe personal injury, death, or substantial property damage. WARNING WARNING Determine location Locate the vent/air terminations using the following guidelines: 1. The total length of piping for vent or air must not exceed the limits given in the General Venting Section on page 16 of this manual. 2. You must consider the surroundings when terminating the vent and air: a. Position the vent termination where vapors will not damage nearby shrubs, plants or air conditioning equipment or be objectionable. b. The flue products will form a noticeable plume as they condense in cold air. Avoid areas where the plume could obstruct window views. c. Prevailing winds could cause freezing of condensate and water/ice buildup where flue products impinge on building surfaces or plants. d. Avoid possibility of accidental contact of flue products with people or pets. e. Do not locate the terminations where wind eddies could affect performance or cause recirculation, such as inside building corners, near adjacent buildings or surfaces, window wells, stairwells, alcoves, courtyards, or other recessed areas. WARNING Sidewall vent and air inlet terminations must terminate in the same pressure zone. f. Do not terminate above any door or window. Condensate can freeze, causing ice formations. g. Locate or guard vent to prevent condensate damage to exterior finishes. TO WATER HEATER INTAKE AIR CONNECTION FROM WATER HEATER VENT PIPE CONNECTION TERMINATION PLATE BIRD SCREEN GRADE OR SNOW LINE 12” MIN 12” MIN 15” MAX BIRD SCREEN Do not exceed the maximum lengths of the outside vent piping shown in FIG. 4-1B. Excessive length exposed to the outside could cause freezing of condensate in the vent pipe, resulting in potential water heater shutdown. Figure 4-1B Alternate PVC/CPVC Sidewall Termination of Air and Vent w/Field Supplied Fittings WARNING If using the alternate sidewall termination: 3. The air piping must terminate in a down-turned elbow as shown in FIG. 4-1B. This arrangement avoids recirculation of flue products into the combustion air stream. 4. The vent piping must terminate in an elbow pointed outward or away from the air inlet, as shown in FIG. 4-1B. Model Kit Number Vent Size 125 - 200 KIT30045 3 inch vent Table 4A Sidewall Vent Kits TO WATER HEATER INTAKE AIR CONNECTION FROM WATER HEATER VENT PIPE CONNECTION VENT / AIR TERMINATION GRADE OR SNOW LINE 12" MIN 12" MIN TO OVER- HANG POSSIBLE ORIENTATIONS Figure 4-1A PVC/CPVC/Polypropylene Sidewall Termination of Air and Vent Installation & Operation Manual Vent/air termination – sidewall 4 Sidewall direct venting 5. Maintain clearances as shown in FIG.’s 4-1A thru 4-3B, pages 21 thru 22. Also maintain the following: a. Vent must terminate: • At least 6 feet from adjacent walls. • No closer than 12 inches below roof overhang. • At least 7 feet above any public walkway. • At least 3 feet above any forced air intake within 10 feet. • No closer than 12 inches below or horizontally from any door or window or any other gravity air inlet. b. Air inlet must terminate at least 12 inches above grade or snow line; at least 12 inches below the vent termination; and the vent pipe must not extend more than 24 inches vertically outside the building as shown in FIG. 4-1B. c. Do not terminate closer than 4 feet horizontally from any electric meter, gas meter, regulator, relief valve, or other equipment. Never terminate above or below any of these within 4 feet horizontally. 6. Locate terminations so they are not likely to be damaged by foreign objects, such as stones or balls, or subject to buildup of leaves or sediment. VENT / AIR TERMINATION 12" MIN. 12" MIN. 12" MIN. Figure 4-3A Clearance to Gravity Air Inlets 12" (305 MM) MIN 15" (381 MM) MAX 12" (305 MM) MIN FROM WATER HEATER VENT PIPE CONNECTION TO WATER HEATER INTAKE AIR CONNECTION BIRD SCREEN BIRD SCREEN GRADE OR SNOW LINE Figure 4-2 Alternate PVC/CPVC/SS/ Polypropylene Sidewall Termination w/Field Supplied Fittings Figure 4-1C Alternate PVC/CPVC/SS Vent Termination - Typical Stainless Steel Sidewall Termination of Air and Vent w/Field Supplied Fittings BIRD SCREEN (TYPICAL) 12” MIN. 12” MIN. 12” MIN. Figure 4-3B Alternate Clearance to Gravity Air Inlets w/ Field Supplied Fittings 22 12" (305 MM) MIN 15" (381 MM) MAX 12" (305 MM) MIN FROM WATER HEATER VENT PIPE CONNECTION TO WATER HEATER INTAKE AIR CONNECTION BIRD SCREEN GRADE OR SNOW LINE PVC/CPVC or ABS is acceptable air inlet pipe material.NOTICE Installation & Operation Manual 4 Sidewall direct venting (continued) FORCED AIR INLET VENT / AIR TERMINATION 7' MIN. ABOVE ANY PUBLIC WALKWAY IF LESS THAN 10’ 36" MIN. Figure 4-4A Clearance to Forced Air Inlets IF LESS THAN 10’ 36” MIN. FORCED AIR INLET BIRD SCREEN (TYPICAL)7’ MIN. ABOVE ANY PUBLIC WALKWAY Figure 4-4B Alternate Clearance to Forced Air Inlets w/ Field Supplied Fittings VENT PIPING GALVANIZED THIMBLE VENT CAP AIR PIPING WALL PLATE VENT PLATE VENT AIR CENTERLINE WIDTH Figure 4-5A Sidewall Termination Assembly 2. For Polypropylene Only: Install the vent and air intake sidewall adapters from Table 3D on page 19 into the vent plate. Slide the sidewall retaining bracket down the sidewall adapters flush to the vent plate (FIG. 4-4B). 3. For PVC/CPVC Only: Install the vent and air intake piping through the wall into the vent plate openings. Use RTV silicone sealant to seal the air pipe. Use the cement/primer listed in Table 3B on page 18 to seal the vent pipe. 4. Mount and secure the vent plate to the wall using stainless steel screws. Seal around the plate to the wall assuring no air gaps. 5. Seal all gaps between the pipes and wall. Seal around the plate to the wall assuring no air gaps. 6. Assemble the vent cap to the vent plate (see FIG. 4-5A). Insert the stainless steel screws into the vent cap screw hole openings and securely attach the vent cap to the vent plate. 7. Seal all wall cavities. 8. PVC/CPVC terminations are designed to accommodate any wall thickness of standard constructions per the directions found in this manual. 9. Stainless steel terminations are designed to penetrate walls with a thickness up to 9.25 inches of standard construction. 23 Model Air Vent Centerline Width 125 - 200 3" 3"5 5/8" Table 4B Sidewall Vent Centerline Dimensions Prepare wall penetrations 1. Use the factory supplied wall plate as a template to locate the vent and air intake holes and mounting holes. Air pipe penetration: a. Cut a hole for the air pipe. Size the air pipe hole as close as desired to the air pipe outside diameter. Vent pipe penetration: a. Cut a hole for the vent pipe. For either combustible or noncombustible construction, size the vent pipe hole with at least a 1/2 inch clearance around the vent pipe outer diameter: • 4½ inch hole for 3 inch vent pipe Drill 3/16" diameter holes for inserting the plastic anchors into the wall. Installation & Operation Manual 4 Sidewall direct venting Prepare wall penetrations (Alternate - Field Supplied Option) 1. Air pipe penetration: a. Cut a hole for the air pipe. Size the air pipe hole as close as desired to the air pipe outside diameter. 2. Vent pipe penetration: a. Cut a hole for the vent pipe. For either combustible or noncombustible construction, size the vent pipe hole with at least a 1/2 inch clearance around the vent pipe outer diameter: • 4½ inch hole for 3 inch vent pipe b. Insert a galvanized metal thimble in the vent pipe hole as shown in FIG. 4-5C. 3. Use a sidewall termination plate as a template for correct location of hole centers. 4. Follow all local codes for isolation of vent pipe when passing through floors or walls. 5. Seal exterior openings thoroughly with exterior caulk. All vent pipes and air inlets must terminate at the same height to avoid possibility of severe personal injury, death, or substantial property damage. Multiple vent/air terminations 1. When terminating multiple Armor wall mount water heaters terminate each vent/air connection as described in this manual (FIG. 4-6A). 2. Place wall penetrations to obtain minimum clearance of 12 inches between edge of air inlet and adjacent vent outlet, as shown in FIG. 4-6A for U.S. installations. For Canadian installations, provide clearances required by CSA B149.1 Installation Code. 3. The air inlet of a Armor wall mount water heater is part of a direct vent connection. It is not classified as a forced air intake with regard to spacing from adjacent water heater vents. WARNING 12" MIN. BETWEEN EDGE OF AIR INLET AND ADJACENT VENT OUTLET VENT / AIR TERMINATION VENT AIR Figure 4-6A Multiple Vent Terminations (must also comply with Figure 4-1A) Figure 4-6B Alternate Multiple Vent Terminations w/Field Supplied Fittings (must also comply with Figure 4-1B) SIDEWALL TERMINATION PLATE VENT PIPING GALVANIZED THIMBLE (WHEN REQUIRED BY LOCAL CODES) ELBOW ELBOW AIR PIPING BIRD SCREEN BIRD SCREEN Figure 4-5C A Typical Sidewall Termination Assembly - PVC/CPVC or Stainless Steel 24 SIDEWALL ADAPTER (AIR) SIDEWALL ADAPTER (VENT) WALL PLATE GALVANIZED THIMBLE SIDEWALL RETAINING PLATE VENT PLATE VENT CAP IMG00085 Figure 4-5B Polypropylene Sidewall Termination Assembly Installation & Operation Manual 25 4 Sidewall direct venting (continued) Sidewall termination – optional concentric vent Description and usage Lochinvar offers an optional concentric combustion air and vent pipe termination kit (CVK3003). Both combustion air and vent pipes must attach to the termination kit. The termination kit must terminate outside the structure and must be installed as shown below in FIG. 4-7. The required combustion vent pipe materials are listed in Table 3B, on page 18 of this manual. Figure 4-7 Concentric Sidewall Termination Sidewall termination installation 1. Determine the best location for the termination kit (see FIG. 4-7). 2. Reference the Determine Location Section on page 21 of this manual for general termination considerations. 4" DIA. SDR-26 PIPE 3" DIA. SDR-26 PIPE RAIN CAP "Y" CONCENTRIC FITTING Figure 4-8 Kit Contents_CVK3003 4. Cut one (1) hole (5 inch diameter) into the structure to install the termination kit. 5. Partially assemble the concentric vent termination kit. Clean and cement using the procedures found in these instructions. a. Cement the Y concentric fitting to the larger kit pipe (FIG. 4-8). b. Cement the rain cap to the smaller diameter kit pipe (FIG. 4-8). Installation & Operation Manual 26 4 Sidewall direct venting Sidewall termination – optional concentric vent Figure 4-9 Concentric Vent Dimensional Drawing Instead of cementing the smaller pipe to the rain cap, a field-supplied stainless steel screw may be used to secure the two (2) components together when field disassembly is desired for cleaning (see FIG. 4-10). When using the alternate screw assembly method, drill a clearance hole in the rain cap and a pilot hole in the vent pipe for the screw size being used. Failure to drill adequate holes may cause cracking of PVC components, allowing combustion products to be recirculated. Failure to follow this warning could result in personal injury or death. Do not operate the appliance with the rain cap removed or recirculation of combustion products may occur. Water may also collect inside the larger combustion air pipe and flow to the burner enclosure. Failure to follow this warning could result in product damage or improper operation, personal injury, or death. Figure 4-10 Rain Cap to Vent Pipe Alternate Assembly 6. Install the Y concentric fitting and pipe assembly through the structure’s hole. Do not allow insulation or other materials to accumulate inside the pipe assembly when installing through the hole. 7. Install the rain cap and small diameter pipe assembly into the Y concentric fitting and large pipe assembly. Ensure small diameter pipe is bottomed and cemented in the Y concentric fitting. 8. Secure the assembly to the structure as shown in FIG. 4-11 using field-supplied metal strapping or equivalent support material. Ensure termination location clearance dimensions are as shown in FIG. 4-7. NOTICE WARNING WARNING NOTICE NOTICE NOTICE If assembly needs to be extended to allow sidewall thickness requirement, the two (2) pipes supplied in the kit may be replaced by using the same diameter, field-supplied SDR-26 PVC (D2241) pipe. Do not extend dimension D* more than 60 inches (see FIG. 4-9). If assembly depth needs to be reduced, dimension D can be as short as possible. NOTICE Installation & Operation Manual 27 4 Sidewall direct venting (continued) Sidewall termination – optional concentric vent Multiventing sidewall terminations When two (2) or more direct vent appliances are vented near each other, each appliance must be individually vented (see FIG. 4-12). NEVER common vent or breach vent this appliance. When two (2) or more direct vent appliances are vented near each other, two (2) vent terminations may be installed as shown in FIG. 4-12. It is important that vent terminations be made as shown to avoid recirculation of flue gases. VENT COMBUSTION AIR 12" MINIMUM Figure 4-12 Concentric Vent and Combustion Air Termination Figure 4-11 Concentric Vent Sidewall Attachment DO NOT use field-supplied couplings to extend pipes. Airflow restriction will occur and may cause intermittent operation. 9. Cement appliance combustion air and vent pipes to the concentric vent termination assembly. See FIG. 4-11 for proper pipe attachment. 10. Operate the appliance one (1) heat cycle to ensure combustion air and vent pipes are properly connected to the concentric vent termination connections. CAUTION Installation & Operation Manual 28 5 Vertical direct venting Vent/air termination – vertical Follow instructions below when determining vent location to avoid possibility of severe personal injury, death or substantial property damage. Determine location Locate the vent/air terminations using the following guidelines: 1. The total length of piping for vent or air must not exceed the limits given in the General Venting Section on page 16 of this manual. 2. Prepare the vent termination and the air termination elbow (FIG. 5-1A) by inserting bird screens. Bird screens should be obtained locally. 3. The vent must terminate at least 3 feet above the highest place in which the vent penetrates the roof and at least 2 feet above any part of a building within 10 horizontal feet. 4. The air piping must terminate in a down-turned 180° return pipe no further than 2 feet from the center of the vent pipe. This placement avoids recirculation of flue products into the combustion air stream. 5. The vent piping must terminate in an up-turned coupling as shown in FIG. 5-1A. The top of the coupling must be at least 1 foot above the air intake. When the vent termination uses a rain cap as illustrated in FIG. 5-1B maintain at least 36” (914 mm) above the air inlet. The air inlet pipe and vent pipe can be located in any desired position on the roof, but must always be no further than 2 feet (.6 m) apart and with the vent termination at least 1 foot for PVC and 3 feet for stainless steel, above the air intake. 6. Maintain the required dimensions of the finished termination piping as shown in FIG. 5-1A. 7. Do not extend exposed vent pipe outside of building more than shown in this document. Condensate could freeze and block vent pipe. Figure 5-1A PVC/CPVC/Polypropylene Vertical Termination of Air and Vent 8. Locate terminations so they are not likely to be damaged by foreign objects, such as stones or balls, or subject to buildup of leaves or sediment. WARNING WARNING Rooftop vent and air inlet terminations must terminate in the same pressure zone, unless vertical vent sidewall air is set up as shown in the General Venting - Vertical Vent, Sidewall Air Section. 6" (152 MM) MINIMUM ABOVE ROOF / SNOW LINE VENT COM,BUSTION AIR ALTERNATE INTAKE LOCATIONS: INTAKE PIPES MAY BE LOCATED ANYWHERE WITHIN 24” (610 MM) OF VENT PIPE VENT OUTLET 36” (914 MM) MINIMUM ABOVE AIR INLET BIRD SCREEN (TYPICAL) Figure 5-1B Stainless Steel Vertical Termination of Air and Vent Installation & Operation Manual 29 5 Vertical direct venting (continued) Vent/air termination – vertical Prepare roof penetrations 1. Air pipe penetration: a. Cut a hole for the air pipe. Size the air pipe hole as close as desired to the air pipe outside diameter. 2. Vent pipe penetration: a. Cut a hole for the vent pipe. For either combustible or noncombustible construction, size the vent pipe hole with at least a 1/2 inch clearance around the vent pipe outer diameter: • 4½ inch hole for 3 inch vent pipe b. Insert a galvanized metal thimble in the vent pipe hole. 3. Space the air and vent holes to provide the minimum spacing shown in FIG. 5-1A, page 28. 4. Follow all local codes for isolation of vent pipe when passing through floors, ceilings, and roofs. 5. Provide flashing and sealing boots sized for the vent pipe and air pipe. Multiple vent/air terminations 1. When terminating multiple Armor wall mount water heaters, terminate each vent/air connection as described in this manual (FIG. 5-2). Terminate all vent pipes at the same height and all air pipes at the same height to avoid possibility of severe personal injury, death, or substantial property damage. 2. Place roof penetrations to obtain minimum clearance of 12 inches between edge of air intake elbow and adjacent vent pipe of another water heater for U.S. installations (see FIG. 5-2). For Canadian installations, provide clearances required by CSA B149.1 Installation Code. 3. The air inlet of an Armor wall mount water heater is part of a direct vent connection. It is not classified as a forced air intake with regard to spacing from adjacent water heater vents. 12” MINIMUM VERTICALLY FROM VENT OUTLET TO ANY AIR INLET 12” MINIMUM FROM EDGE OF AIR INTAKE PIPE TO ADJACENT VENT PIPE FROM ANOTHER WATER HEATER AIR VENT AIR VENT Figure 5-2 Vertical Terminations with Multiple Water Heaters Figure 5-3 Alternate Vertical Terminations with Multiple Water Heaters WARNING Installation & Operation Manual 30 5 Vertical direct venting Vertical termination – optional concentric vent Description and usage Lochinvar offers an optional concentric combustion air and vent pipe termination kit. Both combustion air and vent pipes must attach to the termination kit. The termination kit must terminate outside the structure and must be installed as shown in FIG. 5-4. Field supplied pipe and fittings are required to complete the installation. The required combustion vent pipe and fittings are listed in Table 3B, on page 18 of this manual. Vertical termination installation 1. See Section 5, Vertical Direct Venting - Determine Location (where applicable).Instead of cementing the smaller pipe to the rain cap, a field supplied stainless steel screw may be used to secure the two (2) components together when field disassembly is desired for cleaning (see FIG. 4-10, page 26). When using the alternate screw assembly method, drill a clearance hole in the rain cap and a pilot hole in the vent pipe for the screw size being used. Failure to drill adequate holes may cause cracking of PVC components, allowing combustion products to be recirculated. Failure to follow this warning could result in personal injury or death. 2. Cut one (1) hole (5 inch diameter) into the structure to install the termination kit. 3. Partially assemble the concentric vent termination kit. Clean and cement following the cleaning procedures in these instructions. a. Cement the Y concentric fitting to the larger diameter kit pipe (see FIG. 4-8, page 25). b. Cement rain cap to the smaller diameter kit pipe (see FIG. 4-8, page 25). c. Do not attach a U-Bend to the rain cap. Doing so could cause recirculation (see FIG. 5-5). Figure 5-4 Concentric Vertical Termination NOTICE WARNING Figure 5-5 Do Not Install U-Bend to Rain Cap Installation & Operation Manual 31 5 Vertical direct venting (continued) Vertical termination – optional concentric vent Figure 5-6 Concentric Vent Roof Installation Ensure termination height is above the roof surface or anticipated snow level (12 inches in U.S.A. or 18 inches in Canada) as shown in FIG. 5-4, page 30. If assembly is too short to meet height requirement, the two (2) pipes supplied in the kit may be replaced by using the same diameter, field supplied SDR-26 PVC (D2241) pipe for CVK3003 and standard schedule 40 PVC for CVK3007. Do not extend dimension D* more than 60 inches (see FIG. 4-9, page 26). CAUTION DO NOT use field-supplied couplings to extend pipes. Airflow restriction will occur. 6. Install the rain cap and the small diameter pipe assembly into the roof penetration assembly. Ensure the small diameter pipe is cemented and bottomed in the Y concentric fitting. 7. Cement the appliance combustion air and vent pipes to the concentric vent termination assembly. See FIG. 5-6 for proper pipe attachment. 8. Operate the appliance through one (1) heat cycle to ensure combustion air and vent pipes are properly connected to the concentric vent termination connections. Multiventing vertical terminations When two (2) or more direct vent appliances are vented near each other, each appliance must be individually vented (see FIG. 5-7). NEVER common vent or breach vent this appliance. When two (2) or more direct vent appliances are vented near each other, two (2) vent terminations may be installed as shown in FIG. 5-7. It is important that vent terminations be made as shown to avoid recirculation of flue gases. 12” MINIMUM 12” (18” FOR CANADA) MINIMUM CLEARANCE ABOVE HIGHEST ANTICIPATED SNOW LEVEL. MAXIMUM OF 24” ABOVE ROOF. COMBUSTION AIR (TYPICAL) Figure 5-7 Concentric Vent and Combustion Air Vertical Termination Do not operate the appliance with the rain cap removed or recirculation of combustion products may occur. Water may also collect inside the larger combustion air pipe and flow to the burner enclosure. Failure to follow this warning could result in product damage or improper operation, personal injury, or death. 4. Install the Y concentric fitting pipe assembly up through the structure’s hole and field supplied roof boot/flashing. Do not allow insulation or other materials to accumulate inside the pipe assembly when installing through the hole. 5. Secure the assembly to the roof structure as shown below in FIG. 5-6 using field supplied metal strapping or equivalent support material. WARNING NOTICE NOTICE NOTICE Note: CVK3003 shown for illustration purposes. Installation & Operation Manual 32 5 Vertical direct venting Alternate vertical concentric venting This appliance may be installed with a concentric vent arrangement where the vent pipe is routed through an existing unused venting system; or by using the existing unused venting system as a chase for vent and combustion air routing. Concentric Venting Arrangement The venting is to be vertical through the roof. The annular space between the O.D. of the vent pipe and the I.D. of the existing unused venting system is utilized for the combustion air source. The minimum size of the existing vent system required to achieve enough annular space for combustion air can be found in Table 5A below. The upper and lower termination as well as any other unsealed joints in the existing vent system must be sealed to ensure that all combustion air is drawn from under the vent cap as shown in FIG.’s 5-8 and 5-9. Approved venting materials must be used as specified in Table 3B on page 18. Follow all vent / air termination and clearance requirements per this section to the appropriate example. Installation must comply with local requirements and with the National Fuel Gas Code. The maximum allowable equivalent vent and air intake lengths for this venting arrangement are to be determined from the General Venting Section. If an existing unused venting system is converted for use with this method of concentric venting, the installer must ensure that the existing venting system is clean and free from particulate contamination that will harm this appliance and cause increased nuisance calls or maintenance. See Table 1A on page 10 for a list of corrosive contaminants and sources. Two example scenarios of a concentric venting arrangement are shown for illustrative purposes in FIG.’s 5-8 and 5-9. Model Vent / Air Inlet Size Minimum Existing Vent / Chase Size 125 - 200 3"5" Table 5A Alternate Vertical Concentric Vent / Chase Sizes Figure 5-8 Concentric Vent Example 1 *For concept illustration only. Individual installations may vary due to job site specific equipment. Figure 5-9 Concentric Vent Example 2 12” MIN. FLUE EXHAUST AIR INLET W/ SCREEN FLUE OUTLET SEALED CAP EXISTING SEAL SEAL COMBUSTION AIR FLUE EXHAUST AIR INLET W/ SCREEN FLUE OUTLET SEALED CAP EXISTINGSEAL SEAL SEAL COMBUSTION AIR *For concept illustration only. Individual installations may vary due to job site specific equipment. Installation & Operation Manual 33 Existing vent as a chase Follow all existing termination and clearance requirements and allowable pipe lengths. Use only approved venting materials listed in the General Venting Section of this manual. Figure 5-10 Existing Vent as a Chase 5 Vertical direct venting (continued) *For concept illustration only. Individual installations may vary due to job site specific equipment. FLUE EXHAUSTAIR INLET FLUE OUTLET EXISTING CAP SEAL SEAL Installation & Operation Manual 6 System piping System water piping methods Observe a minimum of 1/4 inch clearance around all un-insulated hot water pipes when openings around the pipes are not protected by non-combustible materials. General piping information Basic steps are listed below along with illustrations on the following pages (FIG.’s 6-4 thru 6-8), which will guide you through the installation of the Armor wall mount water heater. 1. Connect the cold water supply to the inlet side of the water heater. 2. Connect the hot water supply to the outlet side of the water heater. 3. Install a backflow preventer on the cold feed make-up water line. 4. Install the factory supplied pump as shown in FIG.’s 6-4 thru 6-8. 5. Install an expansion tank on the system supply. Consult the tank manufacturer’s instruction for specific information relating to tank installation. Size the expansion tank for the required system volume and capacity. 6. Install a drain valve at the lowest point of the system. 7. This appliance is supplied with a relief valve sized in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IV (“Heating Boilers”). Pipe the discharge of the safety relief valve to a suitable drain to prevent injury in the event of pressure relief. Provide piping that is the same size as the safety relief valve outlet. Never block the outlet of the safety relief valve. See the *piping illustrations included in this section, FIG.’s 6-4 thru 6-8 for suggested guidelines in piping the Armor wall mount water heater. *Please note that these illustrations are meant to show system piping concept only, the installer is responsible for all equipment and detailing required by local codes. NOTICE MODEL PADDLE SIZE SENSITIVITY SCREW ADJUSTMENT Note: Paddles are included with the flow switch. 125 #1 9 turns 200 #1 6 turns IMG00501 PADDLE FLOW SWITCH Flow switch adjustment Refer to Table 6A for the proper setting of the sensitivity screw. For reference, the position of the screw prior to setting should be turned clockwise with a Phillips driver until it stops (FIG. 6-2). Proceed to turn the screw counterclockwise the amount of turns listed in Table 6A based on the model. Consult the manufacturer’s instructions for wiring the flow switch to your system. NOTICE Be sure to install flow switch so that the arrow on the flow switch is pointing in the direction of the flow (see FIG. 6-2). Table 6A Paddle Size / Sensitivity Screw Adjustment Figure 6-1 Flow Switch Installation NORMALLY OPEN SENSITIVITY ADJUSTMENT NORMALLY CLOSEDCOMMON GROUND NOTICE Turn the sensitivity screw clockwise to increase the flow rate required to activate the switch. Turn the sensitivity screw counterclockwise to decrease the flow rate required to activate the switch. Flow switch installation Basic steps are listed below to guide you through the installation of the flow switch provided with the unit. 1. Install the tee with the 1 inch fitting (FIG. 6-1). 2. Attach the paddle to the flow switch per the manufacturer’s instructions. Reference Table 6A to select the correct paddle for the pipe size used (consult the manufacturer’s instructions for a detailed explanation). For Example: If using a 1 1/4 inch pipe size (Models 125 - 200) select paddle #1. 3. Install the assembled flow switch into the 1 inch fitting of the tee installed in Step 1 (see FIG. 6-1). Figure 6-2 Flow Switch Adjustment 34 Installation & Operation Manual 35 6 System piping (continued) Water Heater Pump Applications Model *Pipe Size Armstrong Grundfos Flow Rate (GPM) Loss (FT/HD) Temp. Rise 125 1" E8 UP 26-99 BF 14 17.0 18°F 200 1-1/4" E8 UP 26-99 BF 21 11.8 18°F Table 6C Water Heater Pump Applications / Recommended Temperature Rise Piping components Water heater system piping: Water heater system piping MUST be sized per the pipe requirements listed in Table 6C. Reducing the pipe size can restrict the flow rate through the water heater, causing inadvertent high limit shutdowns and poor system performance. Check valves: Field supplied. Check valves are recommended for installation as shown in FIG.’s 6-4 thru 6-8. Water heater isolation valves: Field supplied. Full port ball valves are required. Failure to use full port ball valves could result in a restricted flow rate through the water heater. Anti-scald mixing valve: Field supplied. An anti-scald mixing valve is recommended when storing domestic hot water above 115°F. Unions: Field supplied. Recommended for unit serviceability. Temperature and pressure relief valve: Factory supplied on water heaters. The temperature and pressure relief valve is sized to ASME specifications. Storage tanks may require additional valves depending on local codes. Tank sensor: Lochinvar supplies a tank sensor. The tank sensor must be installed in the tapping provided in the lower 25% of the storage tank to achieve proper operation. As shipped from the factory, the tank sensor is in the literature package shipped with the unit. Placing the sensor in the tapping provided on the storage tank will improve temperature response and prevent short cycles of operation. Pump sizing and flow requirements are based on 45 feet of piping, 4 - 90° elbows, and 2 - fully ported ball valves. NOTICE Water chemistry NOTICE The required temperature rise and the standard circulating pump are sized based on the heating of potable water with a hardness of 5 to 25 grains per gallon and a total dissolved solids not exceeding 350 ppm. Consult the manufacturer when heating potable water exceeding these specifications. Heating of high hardness and/or high total dissolved solids water may require a larger circulating pump, and a revised temperature rise specification based on the water chemistry of the water to be heated. Scalding This water heater can deliver scalding temperature water at any faucet in the system. Be careful whenever using hot water to avoid scalding injury. Certain appliances such as dishwashers and automatic clothes washers may require increased temperature water. By setting the thermostat on this water heater to obtain the increased temperature water required by these appliances, you may create the potential for scald injury. To protect against injury, you should install a mixing valve in the water system. This valve will reduce point of discharge temperature by mixing cold and hot water in branch supply lines. Such valves are available from the local plumbing supplier. Figure 6-3 Scald Warning Label Located on the Appliance Water with a hardness of less than 5 grains per gallon will usually have a pH which can be aggressive and corrosive causing non-warrantable damage to the pump, and associated piping. Corrosion due to water chemistry generally shows up first in the hot water system because heated water increases the rate of corrosive chemical reactions. The following chart (Table 6B) details the relationship of water temperature and time with regard to scald injury and may be used as a guide in determining the safest water temperature for your applications. APPROXIMATE TIME / TEMPERATURE RELATIONSHIPS IN SCALDS 120°F More than 5 minutes 125°F 1 1/2 to 2 minutes 130°F About 30 seconds 135°F About 10 seconds 140°F Less than 5 seconds 145°F Less than 3 seconds 150°F About 1 1/2 seconds 155°F About 1 second Table 6B Approximate Time / Temperature Scald Chart Installation & Operation Manual 36 6 System piping NOTICE The piping will not support the weight of the water heater circulator pump. Do not attempt to support the weight of the water heater circulator pump with the piping or its accessories. Refer to the pump manufacturer’s installation instructions. Failure to comply could result in severe personal injury, death, or substantial property damage. CAUTION Figure 6-4 Single Heater - Single Tank Please note that these illustrations are meant to show system piping concept only, the installer is responsible for all equipment. The installer must follow all manufacturer’s instructions for each system component. The installer is responsible for compliance with local codes. Installation & Operation Manual 37 6 System piping (continued) NOTICE The piping will not support the weight of the water heater circulator pump. Do not attempt to support the weight of the water heater circulator pump with the piping or its accessories. Refer to the pump manufacturer’s installation instructions. Failure to comply could result in severe personal injury, death, or substantial property damage. CAUTION Figure 6-5 Single Heater - Single Tank (2 Temperature) Please note that these illustrations are meant to show system piping concept only, the installer is responsible for all equipment. The installer must follow all manufacturer’s instructions for each system component. The installer is responsible for compliance with local codes. Installation & Operation Manual 38 6 System piping Figure 6-6 Single Heater - Double Tank NOTICE The piping will not support the weight of the water heater circulator pump. Do not attempt to support the weight of the water heater circulator pump with the piping or its accessories. Refer to the pump manufacturer’s installation instructions. Failure to comply could result in severe personal injury, death, or substantial property damage. CAUTION Please note that these illustrations are meant to show system piping concept only, the installer is responsible for all equipment. The installer must follow all manufacturer’s instructions for each system component. The installer is responsible for compliance with local codes. Installation & Operation Manual 39 6 System piping (continued) Figure 6-7 Double Heater - Single Tank Model Number of Units 2345678 Required Pipe Sizes in NPT 125 1 1/2" 2" 2" 2" 2 1/2" 3" 3" 200 1 1/2" 2" 2 1/2" 2 1/2" 3" 3" 4" NOTICE The piping will not support the weight of the water heater circulator pump. Do not attempt to support the weight of the water heater circulator pump with the piping or its accessories. Refer to the pump manufacturer’s installation instructions. Failure to comply could result in severe personal injury, death, or substantial property damage. CAUTION Please note that these illustrations are meant to show system piping concept only, the installer is responsible for all equipment. The installer must follow all manufacturer’s instructions for each system component. The installer is responsible for compliance with local codes. Installation & Operation Manual 40 6 System piping Figure 6-8 Double Heater - Double Tank NOTICE Model Number of Units 2345678 Required Pipe Sizes in NPT 125 1 1/2" 2" 2" 2" 2 1/2" 3" 3" 200 1 1/2" 2" 2 1/2" 2 1/2" 3" 3" 4" The piping will not support the weight of the water heater circulator pump. Do not attempt to support the weight of the water heater circulator pump with the piping or its accessories. Refer to the pump manufacturer’s installation instructions. Failure to comply could result in severe personal injury, death, or substantial property damage. CAUTION Please note that these illustrations are meant to show system piping concept only, the installer is responsible for all equipment. The installer must follow all manufacturer’s instructions for each system component. The installer is responsible for compliance with local codes. Installation & Operation Manual 7 Gas connections 41 Connecting gas supply piping 1. Remove the front access panel and refer to FIG. 7-1 to pipe gas to the water heater. a. Install a field supplied sediment trap / drip leg upstream of the water heater gas controls. MANUAL SHUTOFF VALVE (FIELD SUPPLIED) UNION DRIP LEG GAS SUPPLY Figure 7-1 Gas Supply Piping 2. Support piping with hangers, not by the water heater or its accessories. Do not check for gas leaks with an open flame – use the bubble test. Failure to use the bubble test or check for gas leaks can cause severe personal injury, death, or substantial property damage. 3. Purge all air from the gas supply piping. 4. Before placing the water heater in operation, check the water heater and its gas connection for leaks. a. Close manual main shutoff valve during any pressure testing at less than 13 inches w.c. b. Disconnect the water heater and gas valve from the gas supply piping during any pressure testing greater than 13 inches w.c. The gas valve and blower will not support the weight of the piping. Do not attempt to support the weight of the piping with the water heater or its accessories. Failure to comply could result in severe personal injury, death, or substantial property damage. WARNING WARNING 5. Use pipe sealing compound compatible with propane gases. Apply sparingly only to male threads of the pipe joints so that pipe dope does not block gas flow. Installation & Operation Manual 42 7 Gas connections Failure to apply pipe sealing compound as detailed in this manual can result in severe personal injury, death, or substantial property damage. Armor wall mount water heaters are typically shipped ready to fire on natural gas. Check the water heater rating plate to determine which fuel the water heater is set for. If set to natural gas, it may be converted to LP by installing an orifice (see pages 12 thru 13). In order to operate on LP gas, an orifice MUST BE installed. Failure to comply could result in severe personal injury, death, or substantial property damage. Use two wrenches when tightening gas piping at water heater (FIG. 7-2), using one wrench to prevent the water heater gas line connection from turning. Failure to support the water heater gas connection pipe to prevent it from turning could damage gas line components. Figure 7-2 Inlet Pipe with Backup Wrench Natural gas: Pipe sizing for natural gas 1. Refer to Table 7A for pipe length and diameter. Based on rated water heater input (divide by 1,000 to obtain cubic feet per hour). a. Table 7A is only for natural gas with specific gravity 0.60 inches, with a pressure drop through the gas piping of 0.30 inches w.c. b. For additional gas pipe sizing information, refer to ANSI Z223.1 (or B149.1 for Canadian installations). Natural gas supply pressure requirements 1. Pressure required at the gas valve inlet pressure port: • Maximum 14 inches w.c. with no flow (lockup) or with water heater on. • Minimum 4 inches w.c. with gas flowing (verify during water heater startup). 2. Install 100% lockup gas pressure regulator in supply line if inlet pressure can exceed 14 inches w.c. at any time. Adjust lockup regulator for 14 inches w.c. maximum. Propane gas: Pipe sizing for propane gas 1. Contact gas supplier to size pipes, tanks, and 100% lockup gas pressure regulator. Propane supply pressure requirements 1. Adjust propane supply regulator provided by the gas supplier for 14 inches w.c. maximum pressure. 2. Pressure required at gas valve inlet pressure port: • Maximum 14 inches w.c. with no flow (lockup) or with water heater on. • Minimum 8 inches w.c. with gas flowing (verify during water heater startup). Maximum inlet gas pressure must not exceed the value specified. Minimum value listed is for the purposes of input adjustment. WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING Armor wall mount water heaters are typically shipped ready to fire on natural gas. Check water heater rating plate to determine which fuel the water heater is set for. If set to natural gas, it may be converted to LP by installing an orifice (see pages 12 thru 13). In order to operate on LP gas, an orifice MUST BE installed. Failure to comply could result in severe personal injury, death, or substantial property damage. NOTICE WARNING Ensure that the high gas pressure regulator is 10 feet upstream of the appliance. USE BACKUP WRENCH TO PREVENT PIPE FROM ROTATING Installation & Operation Manual 43 Armor wall mount water heaters are typically shipped ready to fire on natural gas. Check the water heater rating plate to determine which fuel the water heater is set for. If set to natural gas, it may be converted to LP by installing an orifice (see pages 12 thru 13). In order to operate on LP gas, an orifice MUST BE installed. Failure to comply could result in severe personal injury, death, or substantial property damage. Table 7A Natural Gas Pipe Size Chart The gas piping must be sized for the proper flow and length of pipe, to avoid excessive pressure drop. Both the gas meter and the gas regulator must be properly sized for the total gas load. If you experience a pressure drop greater than 1 inch w.c., the meter, regulator, or gas line is undersized or in need of service. Perform the steps below when checking inlet gas supply: 1. Shut off gas supply at the manual gas valve in the gas piping to the appliance. 2. Loosen the set screw one (1) full turn from inside the pressure tap on top of the gas valve. Place the tubing of the manometer over the tap once the set screw is loosened as shown in FIG. 7-3 on page 44. 3. Slowly turn on the gas supply at the field installed manual gas valve. 4. Adjust the temperature set point on the control panel of the SMART SYSTEM control module to call for heat. WARNING 5. Observe the gas supply pressure as the burner fires at 100% of rated input. Percent of burner input will be displayed on the control panel. 6. Ensure inlet pressure is within specified range. Minimum and maximum gas supply pressures are specified in this section of the manual. 7. If gas supply pressure is within normal range and no adjustments are needed, proceed on to Step 9. 8. If the gas pressure is out of range, contact the gas utility, gas supplier, qualified installer or service agency to determine the necessary steps to provide proper gas pressure to the control. 9. Shut off the gas supply at the manual gas valve in the gas piping to the appliance. 10. Remove the manometer from the pressure tap on top of the gas valve. Re-tighten the set screw inside the pressure tap. Check inlet gas supply NOTICE CSA or UL listed flexible gas connections are acceptable, but you must exercise caution to ensure that the line has adequate capacity to allow your water heater to fire at full rate. Consult with local codes for proper installation or service procedures. DO NOT attempt to measure gas valve outlet pressure. The gas valve is factory-set for the correct outlet pressure. This setting is suitable for natural gas and propane, requiring no field adjustment. Attempting to measure the gas valve outlet pressure could result in damage to the valve, causing potential severe personal injury, death, or substantial property damage. WARNING 7 Gas connections (continued) WARNING When re-tightening the set screw, be sure to tighten securely to prevent gas leaks. Do not check for gas leaks with an open flame -- use the bubble test. Failure to use the bubble test or check for gas leaks can cause severe personal injury, death, or substantial property damage. 11. Turn on the gas supply at the manual gas valve. 12. Adjust the temperature set point on the control panel of the SMART SYSTEM control module to the desired water temperature so the appliance will call for heat. Capacity of Schedule 40 Metallic Pipe in Cubic Feet of Natural Gas Per Hour (based on .60 specific gravity, 0.30" w.c. pressure drop) Pipe Size (Inches) Length of Pipe in Straight Feet 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 125 150 175 200 1/2 131 90 72 62 55 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 3/4 273 188 151 129 114 104 95 89 83 79 70 63 58 N/A 1 514 353 284 243 215 195 179 167 157 148 131 119 109 102 1 1/4 1,060 726 583 499 442 400 368 343 322 304 269 244 224 209 1 1/2 1,580 1,090 873 747 662 600 552 514 482 455 403 366 336 313 2 3,050 2,090 1,680 1,440 1,280 1,160 1,060 989 928 877 777 704 648 602 2 1/2 4,860 3,340 2,680 2,290 2,030 1,840 1,690 1,580 1,480 1,400 1,240 1,120 1,030 960 3 8,580 5,900 4,740 4,050 3,590 3,260 3,000 2,790 2,610 2,470 2,190 1,980 1,820 1,700 4 17,500 12,000 9,660 8,270 7,330 6,640 6,110 5,680 5,330 5,040 4,460 4,050 3,720 3,460 Installation & Operation Manual 44 7 Gas connections Gas pressure The gas pressure must remain between 4 inches w.c. (natural), 8 inches w.c. (LP) minimum and 14 inches w.c. (natural and LP) maximum during stand-by (static) mode and while in operating (dynamic) mode. If an in-line regulator is used, it must be a minimum of 10 feet from the Armor wall mount water heater. It is very important that the gas line is properly purged by the gas supplier or utility company. Failure to properly purge the lines or improper line sizing, will result in ignition failure. The problem is especially noticeable in NEW LP installations and also in empty tank situations. This can also occur when a utility company shuts off service to an area to provide maintenance to their lines. Figure 7-3 Inlet Gas Supply Check DO NOT adjust gas valve outlet pressure. The gas valve is factory-set for the correct outlet pressure. This setting is suitable for natural gas and propane, requiring no field adjustment. Attempting to alter the gas valve outlet pressure could result in damage to the valve, causing potential severe personal injury, death, or substantial property damage. Failure to follow all precautions could result in fire, explosion, or death! WARNING WARNING Gas valve replacement The gas valve MUST NOT be replaced with a conventional gas valve under any circumstances. As an additional safety feature, this gas valve has a flanged connection to the venturi and blower. 13. Check burner performance by cycling the system while you observe burner response. The burner should ignite promptly. Flame pattern should be stable. Turn system off and allow burner to cool, then cycle burner again to ensure proper ignition and flame characteristics. DETAIL LOOSEN SET SCREW ONE (1) FULL TURN THEN PLACE TUBING OVER PRESSURE TAP Installation & Operation Manual 45 8 Field wiring ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD – For your safety, turn off electrical power supply before making any electrical connections to avoid possible electric shock hazard. Failure to do so can cause severe personal injury or death. Wiring must be N.E.C. Class 1. If original wiring as supplied with the water heater must be replaced, use only type 105°C wire or equivalent. The water heater must be electrically grounded as required by National Electrical Code ANSI/NFPA 70 – latest edition. Installation must comply with: 1. National Electrical Code and any other national, state, provincial, or local codes, or regulations. 2. In Canada, CSA C22.1 Canadian Electrical Code Part 1, and any local codes. Line voltage connections 1. Connect 120 VAC power wiring to the line voltage terminal strip in the junction box, as shown in FIG. 8-1. 2. Provide and install a fused disconnect or service switch (15 amp recommended) as required by the code (see FIG. 8-1). 3. The DHW (water heater) pump is shipped loose on all Armor wall mount models. Wire the water heater pump as shown in FIG. 8-1. 4. The Armor wall mount water heater is capable of controlling a building recirculation pump (field supplied). Wire the building recirculation pump as shown in FIG. 8-1. 5. Dry contacts are sized for 1 hp/120V, 2 hp/240V or 15A/120V, 25A/240V. DOMESTIC HOT WATER PUMP 120V SUPPLY LINE GROUND NEUTRAL W G BK WGBK SERVICE SWITCH L1GL2/N RECIRCULATION PUMP W G BK GL4/N L3 Figure 8-1 Line Voltage Field Wiring Connections Label all wires prior to disconnection when servicing controls. Wiring errors can cause improper and dangerous operation. WARNING NOTICE CAUTION Low voltage connections 1. Route all low voltage wires through the knockouts in the bottom of the water heater, as shown in FIG. 8-2. 2. Connect low voltage wiring to the low voltage connection board as shown in FIG. 8-3 on page 48 of this manual and the water heater wiring diagram. Figure 8-2 Routing Field Wiring LOW VOLTAGE WIRING KNOCKOUTS LOW VOLTAGE CONNECTION BOARD LINE VOLTAGE WIRING KNOCKOUTS LINE VOLTAGE JUNCTION BOX Installation & Operation Manual 46 8 Field wiring Tank thermostat 1. Connect the tank thermostats (isolated contact only) to the tank thermostat contacts as shown in FIG. 8-3. Tank sensor 1. By installing a tank sensor, the SMART SYSTEM control can perform the tank thermostat function. The SMART SYSTEM control automatically detects the presence of this sensor and generates a call for heat when the tank temperature drops below the programmed differential and finishes the call for heat when the tank temperature reaches above the programmed offset. 2. The tank sensor TST20015 is the only sensor suitable for use with the SMART SYSTEM control. Connect the sensor leads to the Tank Sensor terminals on the Low Voltage Connection Board (FIG. 8-3). Flow switch 1. A flow switch is used to guarantee flow through the water heater before allowing it to fire. The flow switch must be installed at the water heater outlet. 2. Connect these terminals to the normally open contacts on the flow switch (FIG. 8-3). Rate output This output provides a 0 - 10V signal that is proportional to the firing rate of the water heater. This may be used by a BMS system to monitor the actual rate of the water heater. ModBus When the optional ModBus interface module is installed, the RS-485 ModBus cable is connected to these terminals. Use shielded, 2-wire twisted pair cable. If desired, the shield can be connected to ground by installing a jumper wire between terminals 1 and 3 on connector X5 on the optional ModBus interface module. Louver relay If louvers need to operate when the water heater fires, they can be controlled by this output. Connect these terminals to a 24 VAC relay coil, which is wired to operate the louvers (FIG. 8-3). Louver proving switch When the operation of the louvers needs to be verified before the water heater fires, remove the jumper wire from these terminals and connect them to the normally open contacts on its proving switch (FIG. 8-3). Building Management System (BMS) 1. An external control may be connected to control either the firing rate or the set point of the water heater. If the external control uses a set of contacts to enable the water heater, connect the contacts to the Tank Thermostat terminals. Otherwise, the SMART SYSTEM control will be enabled by the 0-10V signal. 2. Make sure the (-) terminal is connected to the (-) or common output terminal of the external control, and the (+) terminal is connected to the (+) or 0 - 10 VDC terminal of the external control. Make sure the (-) voltage is not below ground. Installation & Operation Manual 47 8 Field wiring (continued) Runtime contacts The SMART SYSTEM control closes a set of dry contacts whenever the burner is running. This is typically used by Building Management Systems to verify that the water heater is responding to a call for heat. Alarm contacts The SMART SYSTEM control closes another set of contacts whenever the water heater is locked out or the power is turned off. This can be used to turn on an alarm, or signal a Building Management System that the water heater is down. Wiring of the cascade When wiring the water heaters for Cascade operation, select one water heater as the Leader water heater. The remaining water heaters will be designated as Members. See page 54 “Configuration of the Cascade” for a detailed explanation of this procedure. Connect the tank sensor to the Leader water heater. For the Cascade system to work properly the tank sensor must be installed. The tank sensor should be wired to the low voltage connection board at the terminals marked for the tank sensor (see FIG. 8-3). The Leader control will use the water temperature at the tank sensor to control the operation of the Cascade. Communication between the Leader water heater and the Member water heaters is accomplished by using shielded, 2-wire twisted pair communication cable. Connect one of the twisted pair wires to Cascade terminal A on each of the Low Voltage Connection boards, and the other wire of the twisted pair to Cascade terminal B on each of the Low Voltage Connection Boards. Connect the shield wires to one of the shield terminals on the Low Voltage Connection Boards (FIG. 8-3). If more than two water heaters are on the Cascade, daisy chain the wiring from the Cascade terminals on the second water heater to the Cascade terminals on the third water heater, then from the third to the forth, and so on. The connections between heaters can be made in any order, regardless of the addresses of the water heaters. Try to keep each cable as short as possible. Installation & Operation Manual 48 8 Field wiring 24VAC LOUVERRELAY COILFLOW SWITCHTANK SENSORBUILDINGMANAGEMENTSYSTEMLOUVER PROVING SWITCHCOMNOLOW WATER CUTOFFTANK THERMOSTATSHIELDSHIELDTONEXTHEATERABABFROMPREVIOUSHEATERABFigure 8-3 Low Voltage Field Wiring Connections Installation & Operation Manual 49 9 Condensate disposal Condensate drain 1. This water heater is a high efficiency appliance that produces condensate. 2. The bottom of the water heater has a 1/2 inch pipe for connection of a 1/2 inch PVC pipe (FIG. 9-1). 3. Slope condensate tubing down and away from the water heater into a drain or condensate neutralizing filter. Condensate from the Armor wall mount water heater will be slightly acidic (typically with a pH from 3 to 5). Install a neutralizing filter if required by local codes. A Neutralizer Kit is available from the factory (KIT3087). 4. Do not expose condensate line to freezing temperatures. 5. Use only plastic tubing or piping as a condensate drain line (FIG. 9-1). 6. Leave the top of the tee assembly installed in the unit open, this is needed as a vacuum break. The blocked drain switch will shut the water heater down before any condensate can flow out of the tee. Use materials approved by the authority having jurisdiction. In the absence of other authority, PVC and CPVC pipe must comply with ASTM D1785 or D2845. Cement and primer must comply with ASME D2564 or F493. For Canada use CSA or ULC certified PVC or CPVC pipe, fittings, and cement. 7. A condensate removal pump is required if the water heater is below the drain. When installing a condensate pump, select one approved for use with condensing water heaters and furnaces. The pump should have an overflow switch to prevent property damage from condensate spillage. The switch should be wired in series with the blocked drain switch inside the water heater (see FIG. 10-1 on page 50). NOTICE NOTICE To allow for proper drainage on large horizontal runs, a second line vent may be required and tubing size may need to increase to 1 inch. The condensate line must remain unobstructed, allowing free flow of condensate. If condensate is allowed to freeze in the line or if the line is obstructed in any other manner, condensate can exit from the water heater tee, resulting in potential water damage to property. CONDENSATE TRAP REMOVABLE CAP FOR CLEANING TRAP CONDENSATE DRAIN CONNECTION - ROUTE TO FLOOR DRAIN OR NEUTRALIZING FILTER USING: 1/2" PVC PIPE & FITTINGS or 1/2" CPVC PIPE & FITTINGS or 5/8" I.D. PLASTIC TUBING (FIELD SUPPLIED) Figure 9-1 Condensate Disposal Installation & Operation Manual 50 10 Start-up Chlorine concentration less than 200 ppm 1. Do not fill the water heater or operate with water containing chlorine in excess of 200 ppm. 2. Filling with chlorinated fresh water should be acceptable since drinking water chlorine levels are much lower. 3. Do not use the water heater to directly heat swimming pool or spa water. 4. At initial fill and during water heater startup and testing, check system thoroughly for any leaks. Repair all leaks before proceeding further. Check for gas leaks Before starting the water heater, and during initial operation, smell near the floor and around the water heater for gas odorant or any unusual odor. Remove the access panel and smell the interior of the water heater enclosure. Do not proceed with startup if there is any indication of a gas leak. Use an approved leak detection solution. Repair any leaks at once. DO NOT adjust gas valve outlet pressure. The gas valve is factory set for the correct outlet pressure. This setting is suitable for natural gas and propane, requiring no field adjustment. Attempting to alter the gas valve outlet pressure could result in damage to the valve, causing potential severe personal injury, death, or substantial property damage. Figure 10-1 Condensate Trap WARNING WARNING Propane water heaters only – Your propane supplier mixes an odorant with the propane to make its presence detectable. In some instances, the odorant can fade, and the gas may no longer have an odor. Before startup (and periodically thereafter), have the propane supplier verify the correct odorant level in the gas. Inspect/fill condensate system Inspect/check condensate lines and fittings 1. Inspect the condensate drain line, condensate PVC fittings and condensate trap. Fill condensate trap with water 1. Remove the bezel as depicted in FIG. 8-1 on page 45 of this manual. 2. Remove the PVC cap retaining screw from the PVC cap (FIG. 10-1). 3. Remove the 2 inch PVC cap with the switch located at the top of the trap (FIG. 10-1). 4. Fill with fresh water until the water begins to pour out of the drain. 5. Replace the cap. Press the cap onto the trap until the cap makes contact with the drain. 6. Replace the retaining screw. 7. Reinstall bezel. WARNING The condensate trap (FIG. 10-1) must be filled with water during all times of water heater operation to avoid flue gas emission from the condensate drain line. Failure to fill the trap could result in severe personal injury or death. WARNING Clean/Inspect Trap Assembly 1. Remove the clean out cap on the bottom of the trap. Let the condensate and any debris drain out. 2. Refill the trap according to the instructions above. Installation & Operation Manual 51 10 Start-up (continued) Final checks before starting the water heater Read the Armor Water Heater Service Manual to familiarize yourself with SMART SYSTEM control module operation. Read this manual, page 52 for proper steps to start the water heater. Verify the water heater and system are full of water and all system components are correctly set for operation. Verify the preparation procedures of Section 10, pages 50 and 51 have been completed. Fill the vent condensate trap with water (removing the retaining screw in order to remove the 2 inch PVC cap with the switch located at the top of the trap). Replace the cap. Press the cap onto the trap until the cap makes contact with the drain. Replace the retaining screw. Verify electrical connections are correct and securely attached. Inspect vent piping and air piping for signs of deterioration from corrosion, physical damage or sagging. Verify air piping and vent piping are intact and correctly installed per this manual. Start the water heater 1. Read and follow the Operating instructions in FIG. 10-2 on page 52. If water heater does not start correctly 1. Check for loose connections, blown fuse or service switch off? 2. Is water heater water temperature above 200°F? 3. Is tank thermostat or tank set point set below tank temperature? 4. Is gas turned on at meter or water heater? 5. Is incoming gas pressure less than 4 inches w.c.? If none of the above corrects the problem, refer to the Troubleshooting Section of the Armor Water Heater Service Manual. Check system and water heater Check water piping 1. Check system piping for leaks. If found, shut down the water heater and repair immediately. (See WARNINGS on pages 50 and 51 (startup) regarding failure to repair leaks.) 2. Check Delta T. Reference Section 6 - System Piping on page 35 for more information regarding Delta T. 3. Vent any remaining air from the system using manual vents. Air in the system will interfere with circulation and cause heat distribution problems and noise. Check vent piping and air piping 1. Check for gastight seal at every connection, seam of air piping, and vent piping. Venting system must be sealed gastight to prevent flue gas spillage and carbon monoxide emissions, which will result in severe personal injury or death. Check gas piping 1. Check around the water heater for gas odor following the procedure on page 41 of this manual (Connecting Gas Supply Piping). If you discover evidence of any gas leak, shut down the water heater at once. Find the leak source with a bubble test and repair immediately. Do not start the water heater again until corrected. Failure to comply could result in severe personal injury, death, or substantial property damage. Propane water heaters – verify conversion 1. Verify propane conversion has been completed per the Propane Conversion instructions. DO NOT adjust gas valve outlet pressure. The gas valve is factory-set for the correct outlet pressure. This setting is suitable for natural gas and propane, requiring no field adjustment. Attempting to alter the gas valve outlet pressure could result in damage to the valve, causing potential severe personal injury, death, or substantial property damage. Check flame and combustion 1. Remove the flue temperature sensor from the flue pipe connection. Note: Combustion measurements will be made at this point. WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING Armor wall mount water heaters are typically shipped ready to fire on natural gas. Check water heater rating plate to determine which fuel the water heater is set for. If set to natural gas, it may be converted to LP by installing an orifice (see pages 12 thru 13). In order to operate on LP gas, an orifice MUST BE installed. Failure to comply could result in severe personal injury, death, or substantial property damage. Installation & Operation Manual 52 FOR YOUR SAFETY READ BEFORE OPERATING WARNING: If you do not follow these instructions exactly, a fire or explosion may result causing property damage, personal injury, or loss of life. A. This appliance does not have a pilot. It is equipped with an ignition device which automatically lights the burner. Do not try to light the burner by hand. B. BEFORE OPERATING smell all around the appliance area for gas. Be sure to smell next to the floor because some gas is heavier than air and will settle on the floor. WHAT TO DO IF YOU SMELL GAS • Do not try to light any appliance. • Do not touch any electric switch; do not use any phone in your building. • Immediately call your gas supplier from a neighbor’s phone. Follow the gas supplier’s instructions. • If you cannot reach your gas supplier, call the fire department. C. Use only your hand to move the gas control switch. Never use tools. If the switch will not move by hand, don’t try to repair it, call a qualified service technician. Force or attempted repair may result in a fire or explosion. D. Do not use this appliance if any part has been under water. Immediately call a qualified service technician to inspect the appliance and to replace any part of the control system and any gas control which has been under water. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 1. STOP! Read the safety information above on this label. 2. Set the thermostat to lowest setting. 3. Turn off all electric power to the appliance. 4. This appliance is equipped with an ignition device which automatically lights the burner. Do not try to light the burner by hand. 5. Remove front door. 6. Move switch to the “OFF” position. 7. Wait five (5) minutes to clear out any gas. If you then smell gas, STOP! Follow “B” in the safety information above this label. If you don’t smell gas, go to next step. 8. Move the switch to the “ON” position. 9. Install front door. 10. Turn on all electric power to appliance. 11. Set thermostat to desired setting. 12. If the appliance will not operate, follow the instructions “To Turn Off Gas To Appliance” and call your service technician or gas supplier. TO TURN OFF GAS TO APPLIANCE 1. Set the thermostat to lowest setting. 2. Turn off all electric power to the appliance if service is to be performed. 3. Remove front door. 4. Move the switch to the “OFF” position. 5. Install front door. LBL2339 REV C Figure 10-2 Operating Instructions 10 Start-up Installation & Operation Manual 53 Check flame and combustion (continued) 2. Place the water heater into the active position by pressing the RIGHT SELECT [ON] key (FIG. 11-1, page 59). 3. Locate the pinhole button below the RESET button on the display board (FIG. 11-1). Insert a thin wire (such as a paper clip) into the hole and press the button once and hold for 5 seconds to place the water heater into Service Mode. In Service Mode the water heater will fire at ignition speed and will then modulate up to full fire. 4. Insert the probe from a combustion analyzer into the hole left by the removal of the flue temperature sensor. 5. Once the water heater has modulated up to full fire, measure the combustion. The values should be in the range listed in Table 10A below. The CO levels should be less than 150 ppm for a properly installed unit. If the combustion is not within the specified range, reference the Troubleshooting Section of the Armor Water Heater Service Manual for possible causes and corrective actions. Set water heater operation Set tank set point temperature Table 10A Flue Products Chart 6. Once the combustion analysis is complete, test the safety shutoff device by turning the manual shutoff valve to the OFF position and ensuring that the water heater shuts down and registers an alarm. Open the manual shutoff valve and reset the control. 7. Turn the main power off to the water heater and replace the flue temperature sensor into the flue pipe connection. 8. Place the water heater back into normal operation. You must replace the flue gas temperature sensor to prevent flue gas spillage into the room. Failure to comply could result in severe personal injury, death, or substantial property damage. WARNING Natural Gas Propane CO2 O2 CO2 O2 8.0% - 10% 3.0% - 6.5% 10.0% - 11% 4.1% - 5.4% 10 Start-up (continued) Verify WHR circulator mode When the tank thermostat or tank sensor calls for heat, the SMART SYSTEM control will turn on the water heater pump. When the call for heat ends, the water heater pump will continue to run for a period of time. This pump delay is set at the factory to 60 seconds. If a shorter or longer delay is desired, the appropriate parameter in the control must be changed. See the Armor Water Heater Service Manual for a detailed explanation of this procedure. Please note that the brackets ([]) denote screen status. NOTICE The NAVIGATION dial may be used during normal operation to adjust the tank set point temperature. 1. From the Status Screen press the NAVIGATION dial. 2. Press the NAVIGATION dial then rotate the NAVIGATION dial to adjust the temperature. 3. Once the desired temperature is displayed, press the RIGHT SELECT [SAVE] key. 4. Press the RIGHT SELECT [HOME] key to upload the changes. 5. If the RIGHT SELECT [SAVE] key is not pressed, the new settings will be discarded. Installation & Operation Manual 54 10 Start-up Configuration of the cascadeSet clock NOTICE The internal clock does not adjust for Daylight Savings Time and therefore, will require a manual adjustment. The SMART SYSTEM control has a built-in clock that it uses for its night setback feature and for logging events. This clock must be set when the water heater is installed, and anytime the water heater has been powered off for more than 4 hours. Use the following procedure to set the clock: 1. Press and hold the LEFT SELECT [MENU] key for at least 5 seconds. 2. The display changes to read [PASSWORD], with four (4) zeros below it. 3. Press the RIGHT SELECT [SAVE] key. 4. The display will then show a menu with the time and date and temperature unit. 5. Press the NAVIGATION dial twice. 6. Turn the NAVIGATION dial to adjust the hours. Press the NAVIGATION dial. 7. Turn the NAVIGATION dial to adjust the minutes. Press the NAVIGATION dial. 8. Turn the NAVIGATION dial to adjust the month. Press the NAVIGATION dial. 9. Turn the NAVIGATION dial to adjust the date. Press the NAVIGATION dial. 10. Turn the NAVIGATION dial to adjust the year. Press the RIGHT SELECT [SAVE] key. 11. Press the RIGHT SELECT [HOME] key. Please note that the brackets ([]) denote screen status. NOTICE Please note that the brackets ([]) denote screen status. NOTICE When installed in a Cascade system, the individual controls must be programmed for cascade operation. This is accomplished by accessing the control parameters. Press the [MENU] key for at least five (5) seconds. Input the Installer code as described in the Armor Service Manual. Once the control parameters have been accessed, use the NAVIGATION dial to select the Control Mode parameters. Press the NAVIGATION dial to access these parameters. Rotate the NAVIGATION dial to select the parameter “Cascade Address”. Press the NAVIGATION dial to access this parameter. Each appliance in the Cascade system must be programmed with its own address. The water heater designated as the Leader will have an address of 0. The remaining water heaters in the Cascade will be Members and have addresses from 1 - 7. Rotate the NAVIGATION dial to select the appropriate address. Press the RIGHT SELECT [SAVE] key. Press the RIGHT SELECT [HOME] key to upload the address into the control. Repeat this procedure for all water heaters in the Cascade, designating the Leader control and the Member controls. Note: A tank sensor must be installed when operating Armor wall mount water heaters in Cascade. The clock is automatically updated whenever a PC is connected and the Win Pro-Installer program is started. Installation & Operation Manual 55 11 Operating information General How the water heater operates The Armor wall mount water heater uses an advanced stainless steel heat exchanger and electronic control module that allows fully condensing operation. The blower pulls in air and pushes flue products out of the water heater through the heat exchanger and flue piping. The control module regulates blower speed to control the water heater firing rate. The gas valve senses the amount of air flowing into the water heater and allows only the right amount of gas to flow. Control inputs and outputs Tank thermostat / tank sensor Either of these inputs will tell the water heater to provide heat to the water tank. If a tank sensor is connected, the SMART SYSTEM control will ignore the tank thermostat. 0 - 10VDC input (set point or power) The Armor wall mount water heater can be controlled by a Building Management System (BMS) using a 0 - 10 VDC signal. The control can be configured by the installer to use this signal to either control set point or firing rate. This signal can be sent to the heater through ModBus as well. Temperature control Modulation The Armor wall mount water heater is capable of modulating its firing rate from a minimum of 20% to a maximum of 100%. The firing rate is dictated by the hot water draw and various other temperature limitations. Night setback The controller may be programmed to reduce the DHW set point during certain times each week. Seven different start and stop times per week may be programmed for the DHW setback. Flame current support To prevent nuisance shutdowns when the water heater is firing at minimum rates, the control will increase fan speed when the flame signal drops too low. Protection features Outlet temperature, flue temperature, and temperature rise limiting The outlet temperature is monitored by the water heater outlet temperature sensor. When the outlet temperature exceeds 185°F, the unit will reduce the fan speed. If the outlet water temperature exceeds 195°F the control will shut the unit down until it cools off. The control module monitors the flue temperature by a sensor located in the flue exhaust. If the flue temperature exceeds 215°F the control will reduce the maximum fan speed. If the flue temperature exceeds 240°F the control will shut the unit down. The unit will restart automatically once the flue temperature drops 25°F and the minimum off time has expired. The control monitors the temperature difference between the inlet and the outlet sensor. If this difference is between 25 - 30°F the control will reduce the fan speed. If the temperature difference exceeds 30°F the control will shut the unit down. The unit will restart automatically once the temperature difference has dropped below 25°F and the minimum off time has expired. Freeze protection DO NOT install the water heater in a room likely to freeze. The following integral feature of the SMART SYSTEM control module provides some protection for the water heater. • The SMART SYSTEM control module provides freeze-up protection as follows when the water heater water temperature drops below 45°F: • Below 45°F, the water heater pump operates constantly. • Below 37°F, the water heater turns on. • The water heater and pump will turn off if water heater water temperature rises above 45°F. This feature of the SMART SYSTEM control module does not eliminate the possibility of freezing. The installation must still use recognized design, installation and maintenance practice to prevent freeze potential for the water heater. CAUTION Installation & Operation Manual 56 When the outlet temperature exceeds 200°F, the automatic high limit action occurs. The water heater shuts down until the outlet water temperature cools below 190°F, and a 60 second timer has expired. If the outlet temperature continues to increase, the manual reset high limit action will occur at 210°F. High limit test procedure Monitor external limits Connections are provided on the connection board for external limits such as flow switch, gas pressure switches, and a louver proving switch. The SMART SYSTEM will shut off the burner and inhibit relighting whenever any of these external limits open. Runtime and alarm outputs The water heater provides dry contacts for indicating when the water heater is running, and when it is unable to operate. Runtime and cycle counting The control uses a timer to monitor the total hours of burner operation. The timer monitors the time the water heater is firing. The control uses two (2) ignition counters to monitor the amount of water heater cycles. The first counter counts all ignitions of the control. The second counter counts only ignition attempts that have failed. Service reminder The control can be programmed for service reminder notification. This notification will become active when either a set amount of time has expired, or a set amount of running hours or cycles has expired (all adjustable by the installer). The display will show a Maintenance Required screen. The installer’s name and phone number can be programmed into the control. This information will appear on the Maintenance Required screen. The service reminder notification can be reset or disabled by the installer. The time dependent feature has been disabled by the manufacturer. To enable this feature change the parameter to the desired time interval, reference the Armor Service Manual for details regarding parameters. Error logging The control will hold in memory the last 10 lockouts as well as the last 10 blockings. The date and time of the occurrence will be recorded as well. Only the 10 most current occurrences of each will be held in memory. Water heater temperature regulation Operating temperature (target) The SMART SYSTEM control module senses water temperature and regulates water heater firing and firing rate to achieve a target temperature. The target temperature can be set between 60°F and 190°F. 11 Operating information 1. From the Status Screen, press the NAVIGATION dial to access the Set Points Screen. 2. Press the LEFT SELECT (LIMITS) key. 3. Select the manual reset high limit (MRHL) by rotating the NAVIGATION dial counterclockwise, then press the NAVIGATION dial. 4. Decrease the set point of the MRHL to below the current outlet temperature (or to its minimum setting, whichever is higher) by turning the NAVIGATION dial counterclockwise. 5. Press the RIGHT SELECT [SAVE] key. 6. Press the RIGHT SELECT [HOME] key. The new parameter will upload to the control. 7. If the current outlet temperature is above the new MRHL set point, the MRHL will function causing water heater lockout. If this occurs, skip to Step 10. 8. If the current outlet temperature is below the new MRHL set point, locate the pinhole (SERVICE button) below the RESET button on the display board. Insert a thin probe (such as a paper clip) into the hole and press the button continuously for five (5) seconds to place the water heater into Service Mode. In Service Mode, the water heater will fire at ignition speed and will then modulate up to full fire. 9. Once the outlet temperature rises up to the MRHL set point, the MRHL will function, causing the water heater to shut down and lock out. 10. Repeat Steps 1, 2 and 3. 11. Set the MRHL to the appropriate set point by turning the NAVIGATION dial clockwise. 12. Repeat Steps 5 and 6. 13. Press the RESET button to clear the lockout. 14. If needed, press the RIGHT SELECT [STOP] key to exit Service Mode. Low water cutoff protection 1. The SMART SYSTEM control module uses temperature sensing of both supply and return areas of the heat exchanger. If the flow rate is too low or the outlet temperature too high, the control module modulates and shuts the water heater down. This ensures water heater shutdown in the event of low water or low flow conditions. 2. Some codes and jurisdiction may accept these integral features of the control in lieu of requiring an additional limit control or low water cutoff. Consult local jurisdiction to determine. A low water cutoff is available from the factory (WTR20009). Please note that the brackets ([]) denote screen status. NOTICE High limit operations The Armor wall mount water heater is equipped with a fixed automatic reset high limit and an adjustable manual reset high limit. The automatic reset high limit has a set point of 200°F and the manual reset high limit has a maximum set point of 210°F. Installation & Operation Manual 57 11 Operating information (continued) Night Setback operation with cascade Night Setback operation of the water heaters within the Cascade is available. Programming of the Night Setback will be done through the Leader water heater. Refer to the Armor Water Heater Service manual for information regarding Night Setback. Sequence of the cascade To equalize the runtime of all water heaters on the Cascade, the firing sequence will automatically be changed at set intervals. For the first 24 hours after initializing the Cascade, the sequence will be changed every hour. After that the sequence will be changed once every 24 hours. The switching on/off sequence will be as follows: TIME SWITCHING ON SEQUENCE Start L-M1-M2-M3-M4-M5-M6-M7 + 1 hour M1-M2-M3-M4-M5-M6-M7-L + 2 hours M2-M3-M4-M5-M6-M7-L-M1 Cascade When multiple water heaters are installed, they can be wired together in a cascade sequence. A maximum of eight water heaters can be controlled from a single control. In this application one water heater would be designated as the Leader control and all others would be designated as Member controls. The Leader control can be programmed to use Lead/Lag or Efficiency Optimization control methods. Once the Leader water heater receives a call for heat from a tank sensor, BMS or ModBus, the control will determine what the set point will be. A fixed temperature set point can be programmed into the control. See page 53 of this manual to program the set point. If the water temperature at the tank is less than the set point - differential, then the control will initiate a call for heat on the Cascade (see the Armor Water Heater Service Manual for an explanation of the differential). The Leader will energize the lead water heater on the Cascade. For a new startup this will be the Leader water heater. Access modes User The user can adjust tank target temperatures by pressing the NAVIGATION dial when “SETPOINTS” is flashing at the bottom of the display. The date and time, and the temperature units can also be changed (see page 54). Installer Most parameters are available only to the installer, accessible by entering the installer password, see the Armor Water Heater Service Manual. Saving parameters (reference the Parameter Table in the Armor Water Heater Service Manual) Please note that the brackets ([]) denote screen status. NOTICE To save parameters and exit programming: Press the RIGHT SELECT [SAVE] key and then press the RIGHT SELECT [HOME] key. To enter a parameter and continue programming: Press the RIGHT SELECT [SAVE] key 1 time to return to the parameter listings; press again to return to the menu listings. Remember to press the RIGHT SELECT [HOME] key when finished programming in order to save the changes made. See the Armor Water Heater Service Manual for a detailed description of parameters and access modes. If a water heater locks out, it will automatically be given the lowest priority for the rest of that 24 hour period. Installation & Operation Manual 58 11 Operating information Sequence of operation OPERATION DISPLAY 1. The control will turn on the water heater pump (always ON except in Night Setback). The flow switch and/or LWCO must close. 2. The control turns on power to the louver relay. The louver proving switch, air pressure switch, and blocked drain switch must close. 3. The control starts the prepurge cycle. 4. The control starts the trial for ignition by firing the spark electrode and opening the gas valve. 5. If flame is not detected after the sparking ends, the control will perform a postpurge, then start another prepurge cycle and try to light the burner again. 6. If flame is detected, it holds the firing rate steady for a few seconds to let the flame stabilize, then it begins to modulate the firing rate based on a set point or some other command (such as a 0-10V BMS signal). 7. Once the call for heat is satisfied, the control will turn off the burner. The blower will continue to run during the postpurge. 8. The water heater pump will continue to run for its respective pump delay time before turning off. A 60 second anti-cycle period will start, which will delay any new call for heat until it times out. 9. In Standby, ready to start a new cycle. Installation & Operation Manual 59 Armor wall mount water heater control module IMG00459 NAVIGATION DIAL (PRESS OR TURN) LEFT SELECTED KEY (SOFT KEY) RIGHT SELECTED KEY (SOFT KEY) STANDBY TANK: 125°F (130) MENU SETPOINTS SHDN RESET KEY Figure 11-1 Control Panel Use the control panel (FIG. 11-1) to set temperatures, operating conditions, and monitor water heater operation. 11 Operating information (continued) The information on the bottom of the display shows the functions of the two SELECT keys (on either corner), and the NAVIGATION dial (in the center): MENU = Left SELECT Key SETPOINTS = NAVIGATION Dial - Pressing Down SHDN = Right SELECT Key Installation & Operation Manual 60 11 Operating information Status Display Screens Section Display Description A (Water heater Status Bar) STANDBY The unit has not received a call for heat from a remote thermostat nor has it received a call for heat from a DHW thermostat. START The unit has begun a burn cycle and is checking all safety circuits. PREPURGE The unit has initiated a prepurge period on a call for heat. IGNITION The unit has begun a spark period to ignite the main burner. The unit has fired and is running at the displayed percentage. POSTPURGE The call for heat has been satisfied and the unit runs the fan for an additional postpurge period to clear the combustion chamber and vent system of residual flue products. SHUTDOWN The unit has been placed in the OFF position. The controlled temperature has exceeded its set point and its offset. BLOCKED The unit has detected a condition that has temporarily interrupted the current call for heat. B (Call for Heat Indicators) The tank thermostat or sensor has a call for heat. The unit is being controlled by a 0 - 10V BMS signal. The member unit is supplying heat while in Cascade Mode. Figure 11-2 Status Display Screen % Installation & Operation Manual 61 11 Operating information (continued) Status Display Screens (cont’d) Section Display Description C (Operational Information) TANK: The temperature read by the tank sensor (if connected). INLET TEMP:The temperature read at the inlet to the heat exchanger. OUTLET TEMP:The temperature read at the outlet of the heat exchanger. DELTA T:The temperature difference between the inlet and the outlet of the heat exchanger. FLUE TEMP:The temperature read by the flue sensor. FLAME CURRENT:The current measured by the flame sense circuit. FAN SPEED:The speed of the combustion blower. SYSTEM PUMP:The status of the recirculation pump output. DHW PUMP:The status of the DHW pump output. BMS VOLTAGE:The voltage received from a BMS system. BLR PUMP OUTPUT:The speed signal sent to a variable speed water heater pump in percent. RATE OUTPUT:A 0 - 10V signal indicating the firing rate of the water heater. DHW RUN HOURS:The total hours of operation in the DHW Mode. DHW CYCLES:The total burner cycles in the DHW Mode. LAST 10 FAULTS NO:The last 10 lockouts. D (LEFT SELECT key function) MENU Press and hold the LEFT SELECT key for 5 seconds to enter the Menu Screen. EXIT Press the LEFT SELECT key to exit the current screen or setting. YES Press the LEFT SELECT key to confirm that the water heater needs to shutdown. LIMITS Press the LEFT SELECT key to enter the screen that allows you to adjust the limit settings. HOME Press the LEFT SELECT key to return to the Status Screen and upload parameter changes. Installation & Operation Manual 62 11 Operating information Status Display Screens (cont’d) Section Display Description E (NAVIGATION Dial Function) Turning the NAVIGATION dial will select the next or previous Status Screen. Pressing the NAVIGATION dial will show the next fault, NSB (Night Setback) trigger, or ramp delay setting. Pressing the NAVIGATION dial will select the setting indicated by the cursor. Pressing the NAVIGATION dial will display the Set Points Screen. Turning the NAVIGATION dial will move the cursor up or down. Turning the NAVIGATION dial will increase or decrease the current setting. F (RIGHT SELECT key function) SHDN Press the RIGHT SELECT key to turn the water heater OFF. ON Press the RIGHT SELECT key to turn the water heater ON. NO Press the RIGHT SELECT key to cancel the shutdown operation. SAVE Press the RIGHT SELECT key to save the current change. HOME Press the RIGHT SELECT key to return to the Status Screen and upload parameter changes. Installation & Operation Manual 63 12 Maintenance Maintenance and annual startup Table 12A Service and Maintenance Schedules Service technician (see the following pages for instructions) General: • Address reported problems • Inspect interior; clean and vacuum if necessary; • Clean condensate trap and fill with fresh water • Check for leaks (water, gas, flue, condensate) • Verify flue and air lines in good condition and sealed tight • Check system water pressure/system piping/expansion tank • Check control settings • Check ignition and flame sense electrodes (sand off any deposits; clean and reposition) • Check wiring and connections • Perform start-up checkout and performance verification per Section 10 of this manual. • Flame inspection (stable, uniform) • Flame signal (at least 10 microamps at high fire) • Clean the heat exchanger if flue temperature is more than 54°F above return water temperature. • Check Delta T (Temperature Rise) If combustion or performance indicate need: • Clean heat exchanger • Remove and clean burner using compressed air only • Clean the blower wheel ANNUAL START-UPOwner maintenance Daily • Check water heater area Monthly • Check vent piping • Check air piping • Check air and vent termination screens • Check relief valve • Check condensate drain system • Check automatic air vents • Check Delta T (Temperature Rise) Every 6 months • Check water heater piping (gas and water) for leaks • Operate relief valve Installation & Operation Manual 64 12 Maintenance Follow the service and maintenance procedures given throughout this manual and in component literature shipped with the water heater. Failure to perform the service and maintenance could result in damage to the water heater or system. Failure to follow the directions in this manual and component literature could result in severe personal injury, death, or substantial property damage. The water heater should be inspected annually only by a qualified service technician. In addition, the maintenance and care of the water heater designated in Table 12A and explained on the following pages must be performed to assure maximum water heater efficiency and reliability. Failure to service and maintain the water heater and system could result in equipment failure. Electrical shock hazard – Turn off power to the water heater before any service operation on the water heater except as noted otherwise in this instruction manual. Failure to turn off electrical power could result in electrical shock, causing severe personal injury or death. Address reported problems 1. Inspect any problems reported by the owner and correct before proceeding. Inspect water heater area 1. Verify that water heater area is free of any combustible materials, gasoline and other flammable vapors and liquids. 2. Verify that air intake area is free of any of the contaminants listed in Section 1 - Determine Water Heater Location. If any of these are present in the water heater intake air vicinity, they must be removed. If they cannot be removed, reinstall the air and vent lines per this manual and the Armor Water Heater Service Manual. Inspect water heater interior 1. Remove the front access cover and inspect the interior of the water heater. 2. Vacuum any sediment from inside the water heater and components. Remove any obstructions.Eliminate all system or water heater leaks. Leaking water may cause severe property damage. 1. Inspect all water and gas piping and verify to be leak free. 2. Look for signs of leaking lines and correct any problems found. 3. Check gas line using the procedure found in Section 7 - Gas Connections. Check all piping for leaks The condensate trap must be filled with water during all times of water heater operation to avoid flue gas emission from the condensate drain line. Failure to fill the trap could result in severe personal injury or death. WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING Figure 12-1 Condensate Trap Flue vent system and air piping 1. Visually inspect the entire flue gas venting system and air piping for blockage, deterioration or leakage. Repair any joints that show signs of leakage. Verify that air inlet pipe is connected and properly sealed. 2. Verify that water heater vent discharge and air intake are clean and free of obstructions. Clean condensate trap 1. Remove the clean out cap on the bottom of the trap. Let the condensate and any debris drain out. 2. Fill with fresh water until the water begins to pour out of the drain. 3. Replace the clean out cap and resume operation. Installation & Operation Manual 65 12 Maintenance (continued) Failure to inspect for the above conditions and have them repaired can result in severe personal injury or death. Check water system 1. Verify all system components are correctly installed and operational. 2. Check the cold fill pressure for the system. Verify it is correct (must be a minimum of 12 PSI). 3. Watch the system pressure as the water heater heats up (during testing) to ensure pressure does not rise too high. Excessive pressure rise indicates expansion tank sizing or performance problem. 4. Inspect automatic air vents and air separators. Remove air vent caps and briefly push valve to flush vent. Replace caps. Make sure vents do not leak. Replace any leaking vents. Check expansion tank 1. Expansion tanks provide space for water to move in and out as the heating system water expands due to temperature increase or contracts as the water cools. Tanks may be open, closed or diaphragm or bladder type. See Section 6 - System Piping for suggested best location of expansion tanks and air eliminators. Check water heater relief valve 1. Inspect the relief valve and lift the lever to verify flow. Before operating any relief valve, ensure that it is piped with its discharge in a safe area to avoid severe scald potential. Read Section 6 - System Piping before proceeding further. Safety relief valves should be re-inspected AT LEAST ONCE EVERY THREE YEARS, by a licensed plumbing contractor or authorized inspection agency, to ensure that the product has not been affected by corrosive water conditions and to ensure that the valve and discharge line have not been altered or tampered with illegally. Certain naturally occurring conditions may corrode the valve or its components over time, rendering the valve inoperative. Such conditions are not detectable unless the valve and its components are physically removed and inspected. This inspection must only be conducted by a plumbing contractor or authorized inspection agency – not by the owner. Failure to re-inspect the water heater relief valve as directed could result in unsafe pressure buildup, which can result in severe personal injury, death, or substantial property damage. Following installation, the valve lever must be operated AT LEAST ONCE A YEAR to ensure that waterways are clear. Certain naturally occurring mineral deposits may adhere to the valve, rendering it inoperative. When manually operating the lever, water will discharge and precautions must be taken to avoid contact with hot water and to avoid water damage. Before operating lever, check to see that a discharge line is connected to this valve directing the flow of hot water from the valve to a proper place of disposal. Otherwise severe personal injury may result. If no water flows, valve is inoperative. Shut down the water heater until a new relief valve has been installed. 2. After following the above warning directions, if the relief valve weeps or will not seat properly, replace the relief valve. Ensure that the reason for relief valve weeping is the valve and not over-pressurization of the system due to expansion tank waterlogging or undersizing. WARNING WARNING WARNING Inspect ignition and flame sense electrodes 1. Remove the ignition and flame sense electrodes from the water heater heat exchanger access cover. 2. Remove any deposits accumulated on the ignition/flame sense electrode using sandpaper. If the electrodes cannot be cleaned satisfactorily, replace with new ones. 3. Replace ignition/flame sense electrode, making sure gasket is in good condition and correctly positioned. Check ignition ground wiring 1. Inspect water heater ground wire from the heat exchanger access cover to ground terminal strip. 2. Verify all wiring is in good condition and securely attached. 3. Check ground continuity of wiring using continuity meter. 4. Replace ground wires if ground continuity is not satisfactory. Check all water heater wiring 1. Inspect all water heater wiring, making sure wires are in good condition and securely attached. Check control settings 1. Set the SMART SYSTEM control module display to Parameter Mode and check all settings. See Section 1 of the Armor Service Manual. Adjust settings if necessary. See Section 1 of the Armor Service Manual for adjustment procedures. 2. Check settings of external limit controls (if any) and adjust if necessary. Installation & Operation Manual 66 12 Maintenance Check burner flame 1. Inspect flame through observation window. 2. If the flame is unsatisfactory at either high fire or low fire, turn off water heater and allow water heater to cool down. Remove the burner and clean it thoroughly using a vacuum cleaner or compressed air. Do not use compressed air to clean burner if performed inside a building. 3. Remove the burner, reference FIG. 12-2 below. 4. When replacing the burner, ensure gasket is in good condition and positioned correctly (FIG. 12-2). Figure 12-2 Burner Assembly Perform start-up and checks 1. Start water heater and perform checks and tests specified in Section 10 - Start-up. 2. Verify cold fill pressure is correct and that operating pressure does not go too high. Check flame signal 1. At high fire the flame signal shown on the display should be at least 10 microamps. 2. A lower flame signal may indicate a fouled or damaged flame sense electrode. If cleaning the flame sense electrode does not improve, ground wiring is in good condition, and ground continuity is satisfactory, replace the flame sense electrode. 3. See Section 3 - Troubleshooting in the Armor Service Manual for other procedures to deal with low flame signal. Review with owner 1. Emphasize the need to perform the maintenance schedule specified in this manual. 2. Remind the owner of the need to call a licensed contractor should the water heater or system exhibit any unusual behavior. 3. Remind the owner to follow the proper shutdown procedure and to schedule an annual start-up. Cleaning heat exchanger For recommended materials; including brush, appropriate extension(s), refractory cover, and detailed instructions see Table 12B - Heat Exchanger Cleaning Kits. 1. Shut down water heater: • Follow the “To Turn Off Gas to Appliance” instructions for the water heater in Section 10 - Startup. • Do not drain the water heater unless it will be exposed to freezing temperatures. If using freeze prevention fluid in system, do not drain. 2. Allow time for the water heater to cool to room temperature if it has been firing. 3. Remove the nuts securing the heat exchanger access cover to the heat exchanger and set aside. 4. Remove the heat exchanger access cover, burner, and gas/air arm assembly. IMG00549 BURNER GASKET AIR/GAS ARM SCREWS (QTY. 5) NUTS (QTY. 6) HEAT EXCHANGER DOOR Installation & Operation Manual 67 Oiled bearing circulators 1. The circulator shipped with the Armor wall mount water heater is water-lubricated. No oiling is required. 2. Check other circulators in the system. Oil any circulators requiring oil, following circulator manufacturer’s instructions. Over-oiling will damage the circulator. Check Delta T 1. Check Delta T. Reference Section 6 - System Piping on page 35 for more information regarding Delta T. The water heater contains ceramic fiber materials. Use care when handling these materials per instructions in the Service Manual. Failure to comply could result in severe personal injury. WARNING 5. Remove the condensate hose from the heat exchanger end. Connect a field supplied 3/4" diameter hose to a drain pan. Using field supplied means, cover the refractory in the back of the combustion chamber of the heat exchanger. 6. Use a vacuum cleaner to remove any accumulation on the water heater heating surfaces. Do not use any solvent. 7. Brush the heat exchanger while dry using a nylon bristle brush. Caution: DO NOT use a metal brush. Re-vacuum the heat exchanger. 8. Finish cleaning using a clean cloth dampened with warm water. Rinse out debris with a low pressure water supply. 9. Allow the heat exchanger to thoroughly dry. 10. Remove the field supplied rear refractory cover from the back of the combustion chamber of the heat exchanger and reassemble. 11. Close isolation valves on piping to isolate water heater from system. Attach a hose to the water heater drain and flush water heater thoroughly with clean water by using purging valves to allow water to flow through the water make-up line to the water heater. 12. Perform start-up and check-out procedures in the Check Flame and Combustion - Section 10 - Startup on pages 51 and 53 of this manual. 13. Replace the access cover and restore water heater to operation. Table 12B Heat Exchanger Cleaning Kits Model Kit Number Part Number Component Description 125 - 200 KIT30063 CTN20005 Rear Refractory Cover MSC20083* Nylon 4" Wheel Brush* MSC20084 3mm Allen Wrench MSC20086 1/4" x 24" Drill Extension * Do NOT use a metal brush. Only use the kit provided brush or an equivalent replacement nylon brush. CAUTION 12 Maintenance (continued) Rope gasket is intended for sealing combustion (see FIG. 12-3). If gasket is damaged DO NOT reuse, the heat exchanger door must be replaced. Consult factory for replacement heat exchanger door (kit WTR30002). NOTICE ROPE GASKET CAUTION: IF GASKET IS DAMAGED DO NOT REUSE, THE HEAT EXCHANGER DOOR MUST BE REPLACED. Figure 12-3 Rope Gasket - Heat Exchanger Door Installation & Operation Manual 13 Diagrams Figure 13-1 Ladder Diagram BOX DEPICTS OPTIONAL ITEMS LADDER DIAGRAM LBL20341 REV A INTEGRATED CONTROL X2-1 GAS VALVE GAS VALVE RELAY X5-7 X5-16 X5-8 X5-15 1 2 4 5 TR2 X1-7 FLAME ROD SPARK ROD BLOWER CONNECTION BOARD INLET SENSOR OPERATING SENSOR FLUE SENSOR INTEGRATED CONTROL RUN-TIME CONTACTS RIBBON CABLE X7 TANK SENSOR 0-10V+ - CASCADE A B SHIELD SHIELD 13 6 2 1 SILENCINGSWITCHALARMBELLS4 BMS CN6 X6 CN6 X6 CN5-2 X4-6 CN5-9 X4-13 CN5-1 X4-7 CN5-8 X4-14 CN6 X6 CN6 X6 HIGH LIMIT SENSOR FLUE SENSOR X5-4 X5-12 X5-5 X5-13 X5-14 X5-6 0-10V+ - RATE OUT IN MODBUS A B SHIELD SHIELD CN6 X6 CN8-1 X6-1 CN8-2 X6-2 CN8-3 X6-3 X4-1 X9-2 X4-2 X9-1 X4-3 X9-3 PC INTERFACE S2 S1a S1b S3a S3b 16 17 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 3 4 1 2 ALARM CONTACTS CN6 X6 M O D B U S CN6 X6 CN6 X6 X2-2 NOTES: 1. Where possible, switches are shown without utilities (gas, water or electricity) connected to the unit. As such, actual switch states may vary from those shown on diagrams depending upon whether utilities are connected or a fault condition is present. 2. See wiring diagram for additional notes. LOW VOLTAGE 120 VAC HIGH VOLTAGE CN5-5 X4-3 HIGH VOLTAGE SPARK LEADCAUTION X5-2 X5-11 X5-10 AIR PRESSURE SWITCH BLOCKED DRAIN SWITCHO-TEMP HEX SW AW 286-801 ONLY CN5-12 CN5-11 X4-10 X4-11 LOW GAS PRESSURE SWITCH HIGH GAS PRESSURE SWITCH LOUVER RELAY COIL 24VAC LOUVER PROVING SWITCH CN5-4 X4-4 CN5-3 X4-5 LWCO TANK THERMOSTAT 11 CN5-10 X4-12 CN5-14 X4-8 12 CN7-3 CN7-2 CN7-4 CN7-1 24 VAC 9 6 7 141313 8 7 6 5 109 CONNECTION BOARD 120 VAC 24 VAC 120VAC ON / OFF SWITCH X1-6 F2 3.15A F1 5A INTEGRATED CONTROL JUNCTION BOX X1-1 BUILDING RECIRC PUMP RELAY DHW PUMP RELAY 24V DC SUPPLY F3 .8A X5-1X5-9 AW 801 ONLY X4-3 X1-3 X1-2 TERMINAL STRIP 120V SUPPLY "N" 3.5A 3 BLOWER 21 BUILDING RECIRC PUMP DHW PUMP BUILDING RECIRC PUMP RELAY DHW PUMP RELAY NEUTRAL GROUND TERMINAL STRIP 120V SUPPLY "L"L IN BUILDING RECIRC PUMP CONTACTS DHW PUMP CONTACTS L OUT FLOW SWITCH JUNCTION BOX AW MODELS ONLY 68 69 Figure 13-2 Wiring Diagram 13 Diagrams (continued) X1-7 ON/OFF SWITCH 1 2 3 4 5 G R R W R T W BK Y BL BLOWER -T HIGH LIMIT SENSOR S1b OPERATING SENSOR S1a INLET SENSOR S2 FLUE SENSOR S3a FLUE SENSOR S3b INTEGRATED CONTROL BK Y GAS VALVE @24VAC SPARK ROD TRANSFORMER TR2 G HIGH VOLTAGE SPARK LEADCAUTION FLAME SENSOR ALARM CONTACTS RUN-TIME CONTACTS 24 VAC LOUVER RELAY COIL LOUVER PROVING SWITCH GAS PRESSURE SWITCH FLOW SWITCH TANK THERMOSTAT 11 12 13 14 TANK SENSOR CASCADE A B SHIELD SHIELD 0-10V+ - BMS IN 0-10V+- RATE OUT MODBUS OPTION A B SHIELD SHIELD LOW WATER CUT-OFF 24 VAC COM P/BK Y W/R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 CN7-1 CN7-2 CN7-3 CN7-4 CN5-1 CN5-8 CN5-2 CN5-9 CN5-3 CN5-10 CN5-11 CN5-4 CN5-5 CN5-14 CN5-12 CN5-6 CN5-13 CN5-7 X5-7 X5-16 X5-8 X5-15 X5-9 X5-1 X5-2 X5-10 X5-11 X5-4 X5-12 X5-6 X5-5 X5-13 X5-14 X2-2 X2-1 BK Notes: 1. All wiring must be installed in accordance with: local, state, provincial and national code requirements per either N.E.C. in USA or C.S.A. in Canada. 2. If any original equipment wire as supplied with the appliance must be replaced, it must be replaced with wire having same wire gauge (AWG) and rated for a minimum of 105°C. Exceptions: Replacement high voltage spark lead and ribbon cables must be purchased from the factory. Use of a non-approved spark lead or ribbon cables can lead to operational problems which could result in non-repairable damage to the integrated controller or other components. 3. Actual connector block locations may vary from those shown on diagrams. Refer to actual components for proper connector block locations when using diagrams to troubleshoot unit. WIRING DIAGRAM LBL20342 REV A BOX DEPICTS OPTIONAL ITEMS X4-7 X4-14 X4-6 X4-13 X4-5 X4-12 X4-11 X4-4 X4-3 X4-8 X4-10 X4-2 X4-9 X4-1 BK BK BK BK BK BK BK BK BK BK BK BK BK CONNECTION BOARD CN6 X6 HIGH VOLTAGE LOW VOLTAGE 120 VAC X-7 BOX DEPICTS DUAL SENSOR SINGLE HOUSING MODBUS BOARD MTR-01 CN8-1CN8-2CN8-3X6-3X6-2X6-1X6-4X9-1 X9-2 X9-3 X9-4 X4-1 X4-2 X4-3 X4-4 X5-1 X5-2 X1-1 X1-2 X1-3 BK W G R BL G -T -T -T -T SHIELD GROUNDING JUMPER O GY G R/BK W/BK GY PR 1 2 G 3BELL JUMPERALARM BELLSILENCING SWITCHJUNCTION BOX DHW PUMP BUILDING RECIRC. PUMP L GND N 120V SUPPLY X1-3 X1-4 X1-2 X1-5 X1-6 X1-8 X1-1 BK L W L N OR/BK PR/W OR OR PR N PR 25 26 27 28 29 30 23 24 NO COM NO COM 3.5A AW 801 ONLY O-TEMP HEX SWBLOCKED DRAIN SWITCH O AIR PRESSURE SWITCH P O/BK AW 286-801 ONLY AW MODELS ONLY Installation & Operation Manual Notes 70 71 Notes Revision Notes: Revision A (ECO #C11832) initial release. Revision B (ECO #C11814) reflects updates made to the polypropylene de-rate amounts (R06316). Revision C (ECO #C14411) reflects the removal of the page number reference on page 14, the addition of the corrosive contaminant warning on pages 3 and 7 (R06313), changes made to Table 7A - Gas Piping Chart on page 43 (R6621), along with updating the flex piping information (R06464) on page 19. Revision D (ECO #C14713) reflects high altitude updates. Revision E (ECO #C16461) reflects the update of piping diagram images on pages 36 - 40 to change check valve location(s). Revision F (ECO #C16894) reflects the removal of temperature and pressure gauge information on page 63 (ECR R07715), the update of water content in the Ratings table on page 6 (ECR R07744), the regulation of pressure drop information on pages 42 and 43 and the addition of Grundfos pump to page 35, Table 6C. Revision G (ECO C17263) reflects the update of images on pages 39 and 40 to reflect text corrections. WA-I-O Rev G 02/15 MECHANICAL CONTRACTORS PLUMBING •HEATING •FIRE PROTECTION 11 Comfort Street Rochester, New York 14620 (585) 232-2800 Fax: (585) 232-7814 Statement of Warranty July 16, 2015 LeCesse Construction 75 Thruway Park Drive West Henrietta, New York 14586 RE: Letter of Warranty Plumbing Stone Quarry Apartments To Whom It May Concern: This letter will serve as notice of Kennedy Mechanical Plumbing & Heating, Inc.'s Warranty Policy. Kennedy Mechanical Plumbing & Heating, Inc. will guarantee the Plumbing work at the above referenced project for a period of one (1) year beginning from the date of July 22, 2015 to expire July 22, 2016. All work is of good quality, free from faults and defects, and is in conformance with the contract documents. Should you have any questions or concerns, please feel free to contact this office. Sincerely, KENNEDY MECHANICAL HS INC. Steve Cassidy President mans Toilet Installation Instructions Directives Portant sur L'installation de Toilettes Instrucciones para la lnstalaciOn del lnodoro 1. How to Attach the Toilet Bowl to the Floor Flange Comment Fixer la Cuvette a iia Bridede Plancher Ensure flange is level and flat with finished floor. Nivelez la bride au plancher fini. Asegurese de que la aleta este nlvelada y a ras del suelo. A. To begin, the Door flange into the drainline must be properly Installed. Il must be the correct distance from the wall and it must be flush with the surface of the floor. The correct distance, measured from the wall to centerline of the floor flange should be 10" (25.4 cin), 12" (30.5 cm) or 14" (35.6 cm). The lop surface of the floor' flange must be flush and level with the surlace of the finished floor. Check the distance and the level with a straight edge ruler. Veillez d'abord a ce que la bride de plancher sort bien installee dans la canalisation de renvoi. La bride doit etre a la lois a la bonne distance du mur et de niveau avec la surlace du plancher. La distance adequate equivaut a, 10 po (25,4 cm), 12 po (305 cni) de 14 po (35,6 cm) a partir du mur jusqu"au centre de la bride. Au moyen dune refile droite, veillez a, ce que le surface superieure de la bride soft rase et de niveau avec celle du plancher tint. Para elnpezar, is alela del suelo que va al desagtle tiene que estar correctamente instalada. Debe encontrarse a la distancia correcta de la pared y a ras del suelo.. La distancia correcta rnedid'a desde is pared a la lines central o eje geometrico de la aleta del suelo debe ser 25,4 cm (10 pulgadas), 30,5 cm (12 pulgadas) con 35.6 cm (14 pulgadas). La superficle superior de le alela debe ester a ras de la superficie del suelo aoabado y nivelad'a con este. Cornpruebe la distancia y el nivel con una regia de trazar.. Insert bolts into flange slots with shanks upward. Inserez les boulons dans les trous de la bride, les tiges flietees vers la haut. Inserle los torniflos en los orificios de Ia aleta, con el fuste hacla arriba. B. Clean any construction debris out of the flange, then install the mounting bolts into the side slots of the floor flange. The bolts should be inserted into the slots, bolt heads down, threaded shank pointing upward. Netboyez to bride de tout debris de construction, puis inserez les boutons de fixation dans les Irous se trouvant sur le bord de la bride. La tete des boulons doit pointer vers le bas et is lige filetee, vers le haul.. Limpfe bien el interior de Is atela e instate los torniltos. en los orificios laterales de la misma. Los lorniltos se debug introducir con Pas cabezas hacia abajo y el luste roscado hacia arriba. Marts( s Ptumbnn, ProOucls LL.G = r: ti iraia tar Assistanc& 18771 650-3 Place wax ring on the flange. Deposez le joint d'eianchelte cire sur la bride Coloque el anilto paratinado en la aleta. C. Put the wax seal ring in place, centered on top of the floor flange. Push the wax ring down into place the mounting bolts will protrude upward at the sides of the ring. Cenlrez, puffs ddposez le joint d'etancheite en cire sur la bride de plancher lout en exergant un pee de pression. La pression fern ressortir les boutons autour du joint. Catoque el anilto parafinado de estancamiento an ser sitio, centred'o en la parte superior de la aleta. Empuje el anilto hasta que entre bien. Los torniltos sahresaldran uor encinia de los lados del aniilo. Alternate way is to place wax ring on the "horn" of the bowl (bowl shown upside down). Un autre moyen d'installer le joint d'etancheite en care consiste situee a le deposer sur Ia tubulure de sortie situee sous la cuvette. (la cuvette est montree ici a I'envers). Otra rnanera de Instalar el anlllo paratinado es cotocarlo en la "trompa" de la taza (laza mostrada boca abajo). Push down all around bowl to seal onto wax ring. Exercez une pression vers la bas tout autour de la cuvette pour bien la sceiler au joint d'etancheite.. Empuje por tido el perimelro de la taza para que quede bien sellada sobre el anilto parafinado. E. Apply your weight to push the toilet bowl onto the wax seal ring...pressing down evenly, all the way around the bovv1 rim. Appuyez biers fort sur Is cuvette pour la scalier au joint d etancheite en tire. Exercez une pression unitorme tout r du bord de la Cuvette.. Deja caer su peso sabre la laza para empularla contra el setlo parafinado. Ejerza presion de m,anera uniforme por tido el perimeter de la misma, F. Al this time, assure that the toilet bowl is aligned perpendicular to the wail with a carpenter's square. Adjust alignment if necessary. A tette ©cape, server-vous dune equerre de charpente pour assurer que la cuvette est perpendiculaire au mur; revoyez I'atignernent s'il y a lieu. Con la ayuda de una escuadra de carpintero, asegrirese de que la taza del inodoro este perpendicular a la pared, Ajuste el attneamiento si lo considers necesario. G. Install the bolt cover retainer plates, washers and nuts. tighten fiiingertight, then use a wrench to snug the nuts,..00 NOT overtighlen with the wrench or you may fracture the base of the toilet bowl. Placez une bague de retenue, une rondelle, puis un spectivement sur cheque bouton. Vissez d'abord Corpus a la rnain, puis au moyen dune cte. EVITEZ rOUTEFOIS DE TRAP SERREH. LES ECROUS, car la base de cuvette pourrait se fendre,. lnstale los retenes de to capucha de los tarnillos, las arandelas y las tuercas. Apriete a many y despues use una (lave inglesa para terminar de apretar las tuercas. NO las apriete en exceso con la Clave ya que puede romper to base del inodoro,. Straddle bowl, Ifft into place then set straight down onto ring and bolts. Vos pieds de cheque cote de al cuvette, soul'evez- la au dessus du joint , puis deposez-la sur le joint et les boulons. Ponga las piernas a ambos lados de la laza. coldquela en posicibn y bejela en linea recta haste que quede acoplada con el anilto y los lornillos.. D. Remove the toilet bowl from the carton. Sit the bowl upright on the Door, away from the Iloor flange, Then straddle the toilet bowl, lift it and carry it over the flange. Lower it straight down onto the wax seal ring...so that the bolts emerge up through the holes in the base of the toilet bowl. Retirez la cuvette de son ernballage de cation et deposez-la a la verticals sur Ie plancher, loin de la bride. Enjambez la cuvette.. soulevez-la, puts deposez la lentement sur le (Dint d3tancheite en nae de maniere cue les boulons passent trovers les trous a Is base ce la cuvette. Segue la Laza de su carton. Coloqueta de pie en el suelo, alelada de la aleta. Ponga las piernas a ambos lados de la taza, levantela y llevela hasty le slats. Bajela en linea recta encirna del anilto parafinado de estancamiento,de forma que las tornillos sobresalgan por' los oriflcios de la base del inodoro. H. The next step is to attach the toilet tank to the toltet bowl. Follow the steps on this instruction sheet. La prochaine etape consiste a fixer le reservoir de chasse d'eau ala cuvette. Suivez les Stapes donnees seur peel drap d'instruction. A continuacia n se acopta la cisterna del inodoro ala laza. Siga los pesos dados en esti la hila de la instruction. Ensure bowl is square with wall. Veilleza ce que la cuvette soft d'equerre.. Asegure se de que la laza este perpendicular a la pared. Form No. 639A Rev 0/05 2. How to Attach Vitreous China Toilet Tank to the Toilet Bowl Comment Assembler le Reservoir en Porcelaine Vitreuse a Ia Cuvette COmo Acoplar una Cisterna de Porcelana Vitrea a la laza del Inodoro Tank -to -Bowl Connection Raccordement du Reservoir a la Cuvette Acoplamiento de la Cisterna a Ia Taza Watersaver Flush Valve Robinet de chasse a econornie d'eau Valvula de descarga aulornatica de ahorro de agua Bolts (3) OwIons (3) Tomillos (3) Rubber Washers (3) Rondelies en eaotechouc (3) Arandelas de caucho (3) Toilet Tank -- Reservoir Cisterna Toilet Bowl Cuvette Taza Washers (3) Rondeiles (3) Arandelas (3) Nuts (3) Ecrous (3) Tuercas (3) Tank -to -Bowl Gasket Joint d'etancheile entre le reservoireI a cuvette Guarnicion de cisterna a laza Boit cap cover, retainer plate, washer and nut assembly. Ensemble chapeaux de boulon, bagues de retenue, rondelles et ecrous. Ensamblaie de la capucha, el retell y la luerca. A. To begin, place the tank -to -bowl rubber gasket onto the locknut on the flush valve shank against the bottom of the tank. (Be sure the locknut is tight). Installez d'abord le joint en caoutchouc 5U e contre-ecrou de la tige file(ije du robins' de chasse situsous le reservoir. (Veillezi bien serrer le ,contreiiecrou,) Para empezar, instate la guamicien de acoplamiento cia caucho, que se coloca entre la cisterna y a taza, en la contratuerca del fusle de la valvula de descarga aulomalica que se encuenlra en el fond° de Is cislema. (Aseggrese de que a uerca este bien aprelada,) B. Next, place the tank in position on the bowl„ Align holes in the bottom of the tank with the holes in the bowl. Posez le reservoir sur la cuvette en allgnant les trous sous, le reservoir' ceux de la cuvette, A continuacian, ;Apnea la cisterna en posicien encirna de is laza. Alinee los orificios del tondo de la cislerna con los orificlos de la taza. C Screw the rubber washers onto the mounting bolts and insert these bogs through the holes inside the tank and down through the holes in the bowl. Glissez les condones en caoulchouc sur les boulons„ puis inserez ces boulons dans les Irous. traversant 5 reservoir et la cuvette. Atomille las araridelas de caliche a los tornillos e onserle estos allimos en los orificios que se encuentran denim de la cisterna hasta qua pasen por los aguferos de la taza. D. Assemble the washers and nuts in pairs and screw onto bolts protruding from the underside of toilet bowl ledge. Glissez une rondelle el un emu sur cheque boulon sous la cuvette, puis vissez les ecrous. Una las arandelas y las tuercas en pares e insfelelas en los tornillos que sobresalen de la parte inferior del salienle de la laza. E. Tighten all the nuts finger tight, then carefully tighten them with a wrench to make leakproof seal, DO NOT overtighten or you may fracture the toilet. Vissez d'abord les ecrous a la main, pups au moyen dune ole alin d'assurer retancheite du (accord. EVITEZ TOLITEFOIS DE TROP LES SERRER, car la cuvette pourralt se lendre. Apriele todas las tuercas a mem), y a conlinuacion siga apretando con cuidado con una lleve pars crear un sac estanco, NO las apriele en OXG550 ya que puede romper el inodoro. F. Align tank with floor or wall by tightening or loosening one or the other of the front bolls. You can tilt tank. forward or backward by adjusting back bolt. After aligning tank, check to be sure all three nuts are tight. Alignez le reservoir au planober aur au mut en serrant ou en desserrant run 01.1l'autre des boulons du de'vent. De merne, ajuslez le boulon arriere pour Incliner le reservoir vers l'arriere ou l'avaril. Lorsque le reservoir est parlaitemen1 align& veillez a cc qua les trots ecrous soient bier serres. Auricle o suelle two de los tornillos frontales pare alinear is cislema con el suelo o la pare.d. Ajuste el tomillo irasero si desea incliner la cisterna bade adelante c hada atras. Cuando haya terrainado de alinear la cisierna, asegfirese de que las hies tuercas ester, hien apreladas. G. After the toilet tank is attached to the toilet bowl, once again check the floor flange nuts for tightness. The additional, weight that the tank has added to the ,assembled toilet may require another careful tightening of the floor flange nuts. Lorsque le reservoir est bien firth. a la cuvette, verifiez a nouveau que les kraus, de le bride de 0am:her soionl hien soma's; lo pods supplemenlaire de l'assemblage pout les avoir desserres. Cuando la clsterna este acoplada a In lazavuelva s asegurarse de que isa tuercas de aleta esten bier' aurelaclas. Es posible quo et peso adicionai que supone el inodero cornpleto exile qua so vuelvan a aprotar las tuercas de la alela. H. Attach supply line to inlet of ballcock. If using the enclosed coupling nut do not tighten over 45 inch/lbs. Do not use corrugated metal supply line. Raccordez le tuyau a rentree du robinel a flotteur. Si vous utilisez l'ecrou fourni, rue serrez pas plus de 45 po/lb. N'utilisez pas de tuyau en metal nodule Ariada el tubo de abaslecirnionto a la entracte de la valvula del flotador. Si utiliza la Puerta de union cerrada, no ajusle Fries que 45 pulgillbras. No utilice un lubo cia abastecnniento de molal corrugado. I, Finally', snap the boll cap covers onto the retainer plates to finish the job. Enlin, encliquelez les chapeaux de boulo sur les bagues do retenue pour completer l'assemblage Finalmente, coloquo las capuchas de los tornillos en los retenes para acabar el had*. WARNING: The use of toilet tank type - bowl cleaners may damage rubber and/or plastic parts and void the warranty. L'AVERTISSEMENT: L"usage de nettoyeurs de bol de type de reservoir peut endommager et/ou de caoutchouc parties en matiere plastique et vide la garantie. ADVERTIR: El use de la tintoreria de Iazc n de tipo de tanque puede danar caucho yfo partes y el vacio plastics la garantia.. 08 & 88 Ballcock Robinet a Flotteur 08 et Robinet a Flat ti a Tres Faibte Debit 88 Crifos de Flotador 08 Y 88 A. Locknut Verrouiller fa noix Cierra new. B. Water level adjustment screw Vis de reglage du niveau d'eau Tornillo de graduacion del nivel de ague C. Cap & lever assembly Ensemble du capuchon e du levier Ensambfaje de capuchon y palanca D. Plunger Ptongeur Percutor E. Float rod Tge de 8 po Marina del tlolador do 8 We,. F. Upper diaphragm Membrane Superieure Dialregrna superior I. Refill tube Tube de remptlssage de 8 po Tubo de Ilenado de 8 We J. Shank gasket ,Joint de raccord Guarnicion de espiga G Lower diaphragm K, Locknut. Membrane inferieure Contre-ecrou Diairagma inferior Conlraluerca H. Refill tube connector Raccord de tube Coneclor del tuba de ilenado L. Coupling nut Ccrou-raccord Conectedor WARNING: Do not use teflon tape or pipe dope on coupling nut and shank connection.. L'AVERTISSEMENT: Ne pas utiliser dope de bande de teflon ou to sau sur ('accouplement de connexion de noix et shank. ADVERTIR: No usa droga de cinta ni tubo de teflon a emparejar nuez y conexictn de shank. Water level adjustment screw Vis de reglage du niveau d'eau Tornilto de graduacion del nivel de ague Locknu Verrouitler In noir; Ciorre nuez Refill tube Tube de remplissage Tubo de lienado Flush hand Poignee de la. chasse Manilla de descarga Ballcock - Robinet 8 flotteu Grit() del ftoledcr Coupling Nut Ecrou-raccnrd Conectador Supply line Conduile d alimenlal Float ball Flotleur Flolador Trip lever Levier de declenchement Pelanca de desenganche Flush valve Rotxnet de chase Valvula de descarga. Use, of corrugated. metal supply line voids warranty. L'utllisalton d'un tuyeu n metal ondule ennulera. arantie, El user un tubo de abastecindento de corrugado anula la Water supply valve Robinet de seciionnement de ('alimentation en eau Uvula de cierre del ague e 211 ULF Flush Valve Robinet de Chasse a Tres Faible Debit (ULF) 211 Valvula de Rescarga Autornatica 211 I A. Stop cap for plastic Capuchon de btncage (pour pieces en plestigare) Helen para plastica B. Foarn washer Rondelle en mousse Arendela de espuma. C. Trip lever connection Connexion du levier de declenchernent Conexion de la palanca de desongancrte 0. Float assembly includes plate (height, 11-112") Ensemble du ftotteur avec plaque (hauteur : 11.112 po) Ensamblaje del flotador, 'incluye place (aura. 11 112 plg.) E. Chain connection Connexion de le chainelle Enganche de la cadena F. Plate (interior, not shown) Plaque (a 1'inlerieur ; non illustree) Placa (interior, no se maestro) G. f=lush valve seal Rimer le cachet de soupape El self© parejo de la valvula H, Spud gasket ,loin! d"etancheito de raccord Guarnicion de acoplamiento 1. Locknut Conlre-ecrou Conlratuerce der acoptarnienlo Important Step Establishing the Water Line This toile! is designed to function efficiently using a predetermined amount of water and the tank has a water line marked in lire back of the Lank. This water line indicates the level of Inc proper water depth in a full tank. Etape Importante - Comment Etebtir la Llgne O'eau Conr;ue en vue de fonctionr er avec eflicacile, cette toilette so serf dune quantile d'eau determinee 8 l'avance et la ligne d'eau est indlquee a rarridre du reservoir. Celle derniere revile le niveau superrieur de to protondeur adequate de )'ecu dans un plain reservoir. Paso Importante - Fllacirn e le Leine a de Ague Este rnodora ha side disedado para tuncioner de ka rnanere m/s eficiente cuaudo contiene oro volumes determined() de agua; en fa parte posterior de to cisterna hay una Ifnea marcada con este fin. Esta Itnea de ague indica el nivel correcto de protundidad del ague. 'To adjust or achieve water level height in the lank, simply turn water level adjustment screw clockwise to lower water level, or counterclockwise to raise it. Pour reeler la hauteur du niveau d'eau dans le, reservoir ou pour I'atleindre, it suffil de tourner la vis de reglage du niveau d"eau dans le sans des eigutlles dune montre pour le faire batsser on dans to sans contraire des alguitles d'une montre pour le faire lever. Para ajustar o alcanza,r el nivel de ague corrects) en la cislerna, gire el lornillo de graduacion hacia la derecha para reducir el nivel de ague o hada to izquierda para elevarlo. Water level adjustment screw. Vis de reglage du niveau d'eau. Tornillo de graduacion del nivel de ague. nt Care and Maintenance The outside surface of your china fixture can be cleaned with mild soap and warm water using a soft doth or sponge. Do not use an abrasive cleanser or solvent ot any kind. A toilet bowl cleaner can be used to clean the inside surfaces of the toilet bowl. WARNING: Do not use an in -tank type bowl cleaner in your toilet In -tank cleansers containing chlorine (calciunri hypochlorite) can seriously damage fittings in the tank, Mansfield Plumbing will not be responsible for any tank fitting damage caused by the use of cleaners containing chlorine (calcium hypochlorite). Soinset Entretien La para i exterieure de vole appareil sanitaire en porcelaine peut etre nettoyee avec un savon doux et de Peau chaude rade dun linge doux ou d'une eponge. N'utilisez pas de nettoyant abrasif ou de solvent de quelque sorte, Un produit nettoyant de cuvette peut etre utilise pour nettoyer les profs interieures de la cuvette. MISE EN GARDE : N'utilisez pas un nettoyant de cuvette de type en - reservoir dans votre cuvette de toilette, Les produits nettoyants en - reservoir qui contiennent du chlore (hypochlorite de calcium) peuvent gravement endommager les raccords dans le reservoir, Mansfield Plumbing n'assume pas la responsabilite des dommages aux raccords de reservoir causes par l'utilisation de nettoyants contenant du chlore (hypochlorite de calcium). Cuidados ¥ fillantenimiento La superficie exterior de SUI inodoro de ceramica puede limpiarse con un patio suave 0 una esponja empapados con jaben suave y agua tibia. No use un limpiador abrasrvo ni solventes de ningrin tipo, Se puede user un Iimpiador de inodoros para limper las superficies internas de la laza. ADVERTENCIA: No use un limpiador para la taza del inodoro del tipo que se coloce en el tanque. Estos productos limpiadores contienen cloro (hipoclorito de calcio), que puede darter gravemente los herrajes del tanque. Mansfield Plumbing no se hace responsable por ningbn dano que sufran los herrajes del tanque ocasionado por el uso de limpiadores 'Winterizing' Tip If you choose to 'winterize' a toilet, here's a tip on how to drain the ballcock. After you have shut off the water supply and drained the tank, loosen the coupling nut and detach the supply time from the ballcock shank. Then, remove the locknut from the body. Lift cap and lever assembly and upper diaphragm to break the seal and allow water to drain from the ballcock. Be sure to follow the rest of your steps to winterize. Reconnect MI fittings when putting the toilet back into service. Conseil Portanat sur L'hiverisation Si vous decidez de preparer votre toilette pour l'hiver, void un petit consell qui vous aidera a purger le robinet flotteur Apres avoir coupe l'alimentation en eau et vide le reservoir, desserrez recrou-raccord, puis degagez la conduite d'alimentation du raccord du robinet a flotteur. Retirez l'ecrou borgne du robinet. Retirez alors enlever de verrouiller la noix du corps. En soulevanl l'ensemble du capuchon et le diaphragme superieur, l'etancheite sera rompue et Peau se videra du robinet flotteur, Sulvez ensuite les autres etapes relatives a l'hiverisation Retaites le raccordement de toute la tuyauterie au moment de remetire la toilette en Mat de fonctionnernent. Flush handles & I rip levers for tank -type tenets. L'Eclal controls & iro6eviers de Voyage pour tes loiiettes de 1.ype de rebervoir. El rubor maneja & palancas de viaie. para lavabos de lipo de langue. Spedal'broberberfblabbc resta..,tail, be bent le fit 'Rearms tants requirements.. Flew* ploundue speciale ,madd memodee.., Pear Otte Ode 00ta Mocinette atm treo rr rhS Oes Modevedds. Realm ptistiem especial rTrIVW, puede 6001050 (rata adeptdrue a Rag Merolla -4 oblernm.. Universal levee. Will fa &est -canned / flush val1(04 01 11 void 0ccondiel0001P / chatd Levier enwelsel. Canviunt aux lrAlir44S de Choop en raectedurnord direct mi 4 la ruPnexion du la cRqd0e4ll4, Paidnea 421'v/e50t. 0454 pala valvulas (le degeardel aulemal,e4 01 coniatte crireolo 0 wattle dcrvittorlar Ltd Of iddelilhe de cadena Hanclin 01s0110robvd Palaned rl desenganche. Includes reye.rsebbreaded abacbmeN nu' Camprerva *rue ere fivolVon IlelO (449450. ldoluve 4,1101Cd :on rosuade inverado ArdpRevleng111 trip levet can be Priam:10 Orartor, [fume direnvemirtn Irks InuRve, le levier le d4clencheraem pent Olen lo110 en +me d'rdira racceurni. Palatica de desendanche Imp pue44 401 4104144 Consejo Para el Invierno Este es un buen rnetodo para vaciar el grifo del flotador si desea preparar el inodoro para el invierno. Cuando haya cortado el suministro de agua y haya vaciado la cisterna, afloje el conectador y desconecte a linea de abastecimiento del fuste del grifo del flolador. Entonces quite el cierre nuez del cuerpo Levante el ensamblaje de capuchon y palanca y el diafragma superior para romper el sello y que el ague salga del grifo del flotador. A continuation siga todo el procedimiento de prepared& para el invierno, Vuelva a acoplar todas las piezas cuando ponga el inodoro en servicio de nuevo. 4554144. Service Kits dpi No, 630-7984 Ilcock Diaphragm ce Kit Includes. *Upper diaphragm • Lower diaphragm Mode? No. 630-0030 2101211 Flush Valve Seal Service Kit Includes: • Flush valve seal Emballage de Service N 630-7984 Pour Robiniet Florteur -06/88 L'ernballage Service Corr prericts, • Menrhraier soperieure • ltembratie interieure N 630-0030 Pour Robnets de Chasse 210/211 Liemballage de Service Comprerds7 • Joni de soupape Paquetes de Servico Paquete No, 630-7984 00/1 Grilo de Flotador Paquete de Service lecluyes: • Dialtagrria superior • Dialiagroa inferior Paquete No„ 630.0030 210/211 Valvula de Descarga Automatica Paquete de Service. Incluves • Sek de Valvula mansfield 4. Customer Assistance 877-850-3060 www.rnansfieldplurnIcong.corn E-mail, custserv@mansfieldplunnbing,com Manufacturer's Limited Lifetime Warranty All Vitreous China Products PLEASE READ CAREFULLY AND RETAIN FOR YOUR RECORDS, Mansfield Plumbing Products LLC warrants this china product, excluding plumbing fittings, toilet tank trim products flush valve, ball cock and trip lever,. see specific warranty exclusions outlined below for these products, to be free Irom detects in material or workmanship for the lifetime of this product to the purchaser starting from the date of purchase, Mansfield Plumbing Products LLC promises to provide a replacement china part for any china part of this product that proves, upon our inspection and from the date of purchase. to be defective in material or workmanship„ All labor for de -installation and re -installation and transportation costs or charges incidental to warranty service are to be borne by the owner. Mansfield Plumbing Products LLC provides no warranties, written or oral, beyond those contained on the face hereof. EXCLUSIONS In no event shall Mansfield Plumbing Products LLC be liable for incidenVal or consequential damages, for damages resulting from improper installation or for damages caused by handling, neglect, abuse or alteration. All implied warranties, Including any warranty of fitness for any particular purpose of merchantability, or those that might arise from a course of dealing with the purchaser or usages of trade, are hereby disclaimed or excluded. Mansfield Plumbing Products LLC warrants its toilet tank trim: ballcock, flush valve and trip lever and plumbing fittings products to be free from defects in material or workmanship for a period of one year from the date of purchase and Mansfield promises to provide a replacement toilet tank trim product for any tank trim product and/or plumbing fitting product that proves, upon our inspection and within one (1) year from the date of purchase to be defective in material or workmanship. All labor for de -installation and re -installation and transportation costs or charges are to be borne by the owner, Mansfield Plumbing Products LLC shall not be responsible or liable for any failure or damage to its toilet tank trim, plumbing fittings or china products caused by the use of either chloramines or high concentration of chlorine, limefiron sediments and/or other minerals not removed from public water during the treatment of public water supplies or caused by toilet tank type cleaners containing chlorine, calcium hyprochlorine and/or other chemicals. NOTE : Some states do not allow limitations on an implied warranty, arae some stales do not allow exclusions or limitations regarding incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitations may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may have other rights which vary from state to state. No person is authorized to change, add to, or create any warranty or obligation other than that set forth herein. To obtain warranty service or a copy of this product warranty, contact your local dealer and/or the contractor from whore you purchased this product, n 1994 ( Revised 2/2001) Mansfield Plumbing Products LLC Customer Assistance : 877-850-3060* ! -mail ; custsery@mansfheidptumbing.com Le Fabricant a Limite la Garantie a vie taus Produits de Chinede Vitreous S`IL VOUS PLAIT LIRE SOIGNEUSEMENT ET RETENIR POUR VOTRE DISQUE.S. Mansfield Plumbing Products LLC mi rite ca prodult do chine, le reservoir de fittings de plornberie et toilette qul exclut taflte des produils - la soupape diktat, te levier de coq de ba.fle el voyage, voir les exclusions de garantie speciliques au dessous pour ces produits, a etre fibre de defeclu.osites du materiel el defectuosrte ('execution pour la v[e de ce produil a echeteur qui commence de la date d'achat. Les promesses de Ma.nstield Plumbing Products LLC a lournil. una porde de chine de rnmplacemenf pour n'lmporle quelle partici de chine de ce produil qui prouve, sur noire inspection el de la dale d echat, a etre defecrueux dans to materiel ou f'axecution. Thule main -d'oeuvre pour fa d° -installation et cants de reinstallation et transport ou charge eccessoire au service de garantie devraienl etre porte par te proprietaire- Mansfield Plumbing Products LLC ne fournit pas de earanfie, eorifes ou orales, au dela de ces contahu sur is Ease du present document. EXCLUSIONS: Dans aucun evrinement fail de Mansfield Plumbing Products LLC est responsable pour les dernmages. accessoires eu consequents, pour les dommages qui r' suite de l'inslaltation de improper ou pour les dommages causes en cantritilanf, la negligeanco, rebus ou I'e changement, -routes garanties suggerees, y cnrnpris. n'importe quelle garantie de sante pour on but particulier de rnerchantability, ou ces que pourrait se lever dun cours de frailer ra,cheteur ou les usage de commerce, sons. par la presente disclaimed ou exult). Mansfield Plumbing Products LLC rnerite son reservoir de toilette ladle' le coq de belle, rectal levier de soupape et voyage fillings de et plomberie a est fibre de delectuoslfes du materiel ou defectuosfte ['execution pour une periode dune armee de is date de promesses d"achet. at. Mansfield a foumit. un reservoir de toilette de remplacemenl talNe Ve produit pour n'imparle que/ reservoir toile le pr'oduit et/0u Pa plam.berie muster le produil qui prouve, sur notre inspection et dans celui (11'armee de le date dachat a est defectueux dans le materiel ou l'execution. Toole main -d'oeuvre pour la d -installation el cots de reinstallation et Iranspon ou les charges. devrait etre portae par le proprielairo. Mansfield Plumbing Products LLC ne sera pas responsable ou responsable pour rechec au les dommages a son reservoir de toilette faille, les produils de Mittens de plomberie ou chine causes par 'usage de chloramines ou hautes concentrations de chlore, ellen de sediments de chaux/fer autres minrra.ux pas errleve de Neu publique pendant le trailomenl de provisions d°eau publiques nu cause par les nettoyeurs de type de reservoir do toilette contenanls le chlore, le calcium hyprochlorine et/ou ia.utrei chimiquo, LA NOTE: Quetques uns declarent ne permet pies de limitation sur one garantie .suggeree, el quelques-uns d'rclarent rte permet pas d'es clusrons rw des [imitations err ce qui concema fes. dommages accessoires au consequents„ done les limitations cl-dessus. mentionnees ne peuvent. pas s'appllqucr a vows. tette garantie vows donne des droits legaux speculicues. et vous pouvez avoir d'aufres droits qui varient de falai a i'etal. Aucune personne esi. autorisee au changement, *outer a ou creer n"importe quelle gara.nfie ou nrlmporte que le obligation aulrement que cola enoncre en ceci. A obtenir le service de garantie 00 une copie de cele garantie de produil, conlactcr sabre el/ou de mega -tient local'enirepreneur de que vous avez achete ce praduit. El Fabricante ha Limitado la Vida la Garantia Todos Productos de Vitreous China LEA POR FAVOR DETENIDAMENTE Y RETENGA PARA SUS REGISTROS, Mansfield Plumbing Products LLC juslifica este producto de china, fittings de instalaci[ n de canerias cue excluye y el lanque de lavabo recorlan los productos — valvula pareja, gatlo de pelota y palanca de viaje, ven las exclusiones especificas de is garanlia aoajo para estos productos„ al ser tlbre de detectos en la materia y la habilidad para la vide de este producto al comprador que comienza de to fecha de La compra. Mansfield Plumbing Products LLC cueda en proporciona una parte de! reemplazo china para cualquier parte de china de este producto que prueba, sabre nuestra inspecci©n y de la fecha de a compra, al ser detectuaso en la materia o la habilidad. Tido trabajo para de la instalacion y re castos de instalacian y transporle o carga casual al servicio de la garantla deberan ser soportadas par el dueno. Mansfield Plumbing Products LLC proporciona no garanttas, escrito ni oral, mos alfa de esos contenido en el hereof de la cara. Las EXCLUSIONES:. En ningen acon[ecimlento Ira ser Mansfield Plumbing Products LLC responsable para Banos casuales ni consequenles, para darts que resullan de Ia. rnstatacidn irnpropia ni para defies causados manejanda., el descuido, el abuso ni la rnodibicacion. Tbdas ga,ranllas lrnplicadas, inclusive cualquier garantia de la salud para cualquier propo;silo particular de merchanlabllity, o esos que quizas sura de un curse de Iralar con el comprador o usos del comercio, sates pot la preseide disclaimed o excluida. Mansfield Plumbing Products LLC 1ustihica su lanque de lavabo recorta: gallo de pelota, palanca parrja de valvula y viaje y fillings de instalacian de canerias al ser fibre de delectos en la materia a 1'a habilidad par un period° do un aft© de la fecha de to compra y Mansfield queda en proporciona un tongue de lavabo de reemplez:o recarla eb producto para cualquier tongue recorta el producto yl© la lnstalacien de canerias el product° que queda que prueba, sabre nuestra inspeccien ygenlra de ono (1) alto de la fecha de la compra al ser defecluoso rte la materia a la habilldad. Tod trabaja para de la instalacian y re costes de lnstal'acion y transpose o cargos deberan ser soporlados per el dueno. Mansfield Plumbing Products LLC no sera responsable ni responsable para. ningun fracas° ni el dada a su tanque del lavabo recorta, fittings de hnstalacion de canerias ni productos de china causado par el use de nl chloramines ni concentraclones atlas de clor°, la cal/sedimentos de Marro y/o afros minerales nn quitado del ague, publico duranle el tratamiento de ahastecirnienlo de ague pr blico nl causado por contener de tintoreria do Lipo de lanque de lavabo el cloro, hyprochlorine de calcio y/o otras sustancias quimicas. La NOTA: Algunos expresan no permite las limitaciones en una garantla impllcada, y algunas expresan no permite las exclusiones ni las limitacioebes con respecto a danos casuales ni consequentes, asi que el encima de limitaciones no puede aplicar a usled Esta garantla le da derechos legales especificos y usted puede loner afros derechos que varian del e,slado al estado. Minguna persona es autorizada al cambio, afrade a a ciao cualquier garantie a da obligaclgn de otra manara que asci exponen en este. A oblierre el servlcln de la gararntla o una copie de este garantla del producto, av[san so cornet -ciente local y/o al conlralista d'e quien usted oontpr© este product°. Manufacturer's Limited One Year Warranty Toilet Tank Trim & Fittings Products PLEASE READ CAREFULLY AND RETAIN FOR YOUR RECORDS. Mansfield Plumbing Products LLC warrants its plumbing fittings and toilet tank trim including: ball cock, flush valve and trip lever products to be free from defects in material or workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the dare of purchase, and Mansfield Plumbing Products LLC promises to replace any of these products that proves, upon inspection and within one (1) year from the dale of purchase la be defective In material or workmanship. All labor for de -installation and re -installation and transportation cots or charges incidental to warranty service are to be borne by the owner, Mansfield Plumbing Products LLC provides no warranties, written or oral, beyond those contained on the face herein, EXCLUSIONS: In no event shall Mansfield Plumbing Products LLC be liable for incidental or consequential damages, for damages resulting iron) improper installation, or for damages caused by handling, neglect_ abuse or alteration, Mansfield Plumbing Products LLC shall not be responsible or liable for any failure or damage to its plumbing fittings or toilet tank trim: ballcock, flush valve and/or trip lever products caused by the use of either chloramines or high concentration of chlorine, lime/iron sediments and/or other minerals not removed from public water during the treatment of public water supplies or caused by toilet tank type cleaners containing chlorine, calcium hypochlorite or other chemicals. All implied warranties, including any implied warranty of fitness for any particular purpose or merchantability, or those that might arise from a course of dealing with the purchaser or usages of trade, are hereby disclaimed and excluded, NOTE : Some states do not allow limitations on an implied warranty, and some stales do not allow exr,.lusions or limitations regarding Incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitations may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may have other rights which vary from state to state. No person is authorized to change, add to, or create any warranty or obligation other than that set forth herein. To obtain warranty service or a copy of this warranty, contact your local dealer and/or the contractor from whom you purchased this product ©1994 (Revised 2/2001) Mansfield Plumbing Products LLC Customer Assistance: 877-850.3060' E-mail:custsery@manstieldplumbing.com Le Fabricant a Limite Celui Reservoir de Toilette de Garantie d' Anntee Taille Bele et les Produits qui Ajustent SIL VOUS PLAIT LIRE SOIGNEUSEMENT ET RETENIR POUR V'OTRE DISQIJ'ES. Mansfield Plumbing Products LLC menta scan reservoir de fittings de plornberie et toilette tattle; y compris la soupape d'eclat, la belle levier de coq et voyage produits de, a etre fibre de defectuosites du materiel el defecluosite ['execution pour une periode de celui (1) r'annee de la date d'achat, et les promesses de Mansfield Plumbing Products LLC a remplace n'importe que/ de ces products qui prouve, sur rinspection et dans cefui (1) I'annee de la date d'achat, a etre defectueux dans la. main -d'oeuvre de materiel ou execution. Tout pour la d'installation et coats de reinstallation et transport ou charge accessoire au service de garantie devraient etre parte par le proprietaire. Mansfield Ptumhing Products LLC ne foumit pas do garanlle, ecrites ou orales, au dela de ces contenu sur la lace du present document. EXCLUSIONS: Dans aucun evenernent fail d'e Mansfield Plumbing Products LLC est responsable pour les dommages accessoires ou consequents, pour les dommages qui resulte de rinstallation de improper, ou pour les dommages causes en contrelant, le negligeance, Tabus ou le changemenf. Toutes garanlies suggerees, y compris n'importe quelle garantie de sante pour un but particulier de merchantability, ou ces que pourreit se lever dun coursde iraiter racheteur ou les usage de commerce, soot par to presente disclaimed et exclu. Mansfield. Plumbing Products LLC ne sera pas responsable ou responsable pour l'cchec ou les dommages a son reservoir de fittings de plornberie ou tolet taille- le coq de belle, les produits de levier de voyage de et/ou de soupape d'eclat causes par I'usage de chloramines ou haute concentration de chlore, et/ou de sediments de chaux/fer autres mineraux pas enleve de f„eau publique pendant le traitement de provisions d'eau pubfiques ou cause par la toilette reservoir type nettoyeurs contenir le chloro, le calcium hyprochtorine et/ou autre chimique, LA NOTE: Quelques-uns declarent ne permet pas de limitation sur une garantie suggeree„ et quelques-uns'declarent ne permet pas d'exclusions ou des limitations en ce qui concerne les dommages accessoires au consequents, done les limitations ci-dessus mentionnees ne peuvent pas s'applirjuer A vows, Cette garantie vous donne des droits legaux specifiques et vous pouvez avoir d°autres droits qui varient de 1'etat a fetal. Aucune personae esi autonsee au chan,gement, ajouter a ou creel n'importe quelle garantie ou n'importe quelle oblig':ation aulrement que cela enonce en tett. El Fabricante ha Limito Ono Tanque de Lavabo de Garantia de ano Recorta y los Productos APROP1ADOS LEA POR FAVOR DETENIDAMENTE Y RETENGA PARA SUS REGISTRQS, Mansfield Plumbing Products LLC justifica su fittings de instalaci6n de canerlas y el tanque de lavabo recorla; inclusive valvula pareja, Ballo de pelota y productos de palanca de viaje, para ser Maeda de defectos en la materia y la hahilidad por un perlodo de uno (1) ono de la fecha de la compra, y Mansfield Plumbing Products LLC queda en reemplazRa cualquiera de estos productos que prueba, sobre la inspection y denlro de uno (1) ono de la (eche de la compra, para ser defectuoso en la rnateria o la habilidad, Todo trabajjo para de la instalacion y re costes de instalacion y transporle o carga casual at servicio de la garantia deberan ser soportados par el dueeo. Mansfield Plumbing Products LLC proporciona no garantias, escrito ni oral„ mos alta de esos contenido en el hereof de la cava. Las EXCLUSIONES: En ntngun acontecimiento iia ser Mansfield Plumbing Products LLC responsable para danos casuales ni consequentes, para. dainos que resultan de la instatacion impropra, ni para danos causados manejando, el descuido, el abuso ni la modificace n. Todas garantias irnplicadas, inclusive cuatquier garantia de la salud para cualquier propesito particular de merchantability, o esos que quizes surja de in curse, de tratar con el comprador o Usos del corriercio, seres par la presente disclaimed y excluido. Mansfield Plumbing Products LLC no sera responsable ni responsable para ningrin fracas() ni el dafia a su fillings de fa instalacien de carieri'as ni el tanque del Inlet recorta: galla de pelota, valvula pareja y/o productos de palanca de viaje causado por el use de o chloramines o la concentration alta de cloro, la caf/sed'imentos de hierro y/o otros miner'ales no quitado del aqua pirblica durance e_l tratamiento de abastecimiento de ague publico o causado por El cloro de contener d'e tintorerda de tipo de tanque de lavabo, hyprochlorine de calcio y/o Ores sustancias quimicas. La NOTA: Algunos expresan n0 permite las limitaciones en una garanlla implicada, y algunos expresan no permite las exclusiones ni las Iimitaciones con respecto a danos casuales ni consequences, asi que el encima de limitaciones no puede aplicar a usted. Esta, garantia le da derechos legates especificos y usted puede tener otros derechos que varian del estado para expresan. Ninguna persona es autorizada para cambiar, anadir a ni crear cualquier garantia rid la obligation de otra manera que eso expnnerr en esto. Para obterier el servicio de la garantia o una copia de este garantia del producto, avisan su comerciante local y/o al contratisla de quien usted compra este produclo. PREPARATION:LA PREPARACION:PREPARATION : Wall and floor surfaces at the site where the Mustee mop service basin is to be installed should be clean, dry and free of dirt. La superficie y la pared del lugar donde se instale el lavadero de servicio de Mustee deben estar limpias y secas. La surface des murs et des plafonds de l’emplacement où le bassin d’entretien de vadrouilles Mustee sera installé devrait être propre, sèche et exempte de saletés. MODEL 62M or 63M Modelo 62M o 63M Q Modèle 62M ou 63M MODEL 65M Modelo 65M Q Modèle 65M MODEL NO. Número de Modelo N° de Modèle OVERALL DIMENSIONS: Dimensiones Totales: Q Dimensions Hors-Tout : 62M 24" x 24" x 8 1 /4" (60.96 x 60.96 x 20.96 cm) 63M 24" x 24" x 10" (60.96 x 60.96 x 25.4 cm) 65M 24" x 36" x 10" (60.96 x 91.44 x 25.4 cm) Models: Modelos: Modèles:62M 63M 65M Mop Service Basins Palangana Del Servicio De Fregona Q Bassin De Service De Balai Éponge READ ALL INSTRUCTIONS CAREFULLY AND INSPECT PRODUCT FOR DAMAGE BEFORE STARTING YOUR INSTALLATION. LEA TODAS LAS INSTRUCCIONES DETENIDAMENTE Y VERIFIQUE QUE EL PRODUCTO NO ESTÉ DAÑADO ANTES DE COMENZAR LA INSTALACIÓN. VEUILLEZ LIRE ATTENTIVEMENT TOUTES LES INSTRUCTIONS ET VÉRIFIER QUE LE PRODUIT N’EST PAS ABÎMÉ AVANT DE PROCÉDER À L’INSTALLATION. INCLUDED IN CARTON:EN EL PAQUETE SE INCLUYE:CONTENU : One (1) mop service basin (Models: 62M, 63M or 65M) Un (1) palangana del servicio de fregona (Modelos: 62M, 63M o 65M) Un (1) bassin de service de balai éponge (Modèles : 62M, 63M ou 65M) One (1) stainless steel strainer Un (1) tamiz del acero inoxidable Un (1) tamis d’acier inoxydable One (1) elastomeric drain seal, 3" diameter Un (1) sello elastomérico del dren, 3" (7.62 cm) diámetro Un (1) joint élastomère de drain, 3 po (7,62 cm) diamètre Two (2) anchoring brackets Dos (2) corchetes para asegurar Deux (2) parenthèses pour l’ancrage 65M62M / 63M ROUGH-IN Q ENCUADRE PRELIMINAR Q SCHÉMA DE MONTAGE Fig. A Cuadro A *1 Espesor del borde para el modelo… *2 Línea longitudinal *3 Estante aumentado *4 Referencia *5 Borde Le schéma A *1 Épaisseur de bordure pour le modèle… *2 Ligne centrale *3 Étagère augmentée *4 Référence *5 Bordure INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS INSTRUCCIONES PARA LA INSTALACIÓN Q INSTRUCTIONS D’INSTALLATION E.L. Mustee & Sons, Inc. 5431 West 164th St. Brook Park, OH 44142 Phone: 216.267.3100 Fax: 216.267.9997 Email: info@mustee.com Web: www.mustee.com *1 Ver Fig. D *2 De la pared *3 Lavadero de servicio *4 Tornillos de sujeción (No incluidos) *5 Aplique una capa de impermeabilizador de silicona después de instalar el lavadero de servicio. *6 Sección típica del borde del lavadero de servicio de Mustee. *7 Soporte de anclaje, Nro. de pieza 63.402 *8 Patentado pendientes *1 Voir figure D *2 Du mur *3 Bassin d’entretien de vadrouilles *4 Vis de Fixation (Vendues séparément) *5 Appliquez un bourrelet de mastic silicone une fois le bassin d’entretien installé. *6 Section sur les bordures types pour bassin d’entretien de vadrouilles Mustee. *7 Supports d’ancrage, n° pièce 63.402 *8 Brevets en attente Fig. C Q Cuadro C Q Le schéma C Fig. D Q Cuadro D Q Le schéma D INSTALLATION INSTALACIÓN INSTALLATION STEP 1:PASO 1:ÉTAPE 1 : Refer to “Rough-In” dimensions (Fig. A) and determine location of Mop Basin. Prepare a 6" diameter opening in sub-floor or slab with top of drain pipe centered 1/4" below floor surface. If slab installation, be sure to allow clearance for drain 2 1 /4" minimum depth. — See “ROUGH-IN": SLAB INSTALLATION/ SUB-FLOOR INSTALLATION (Fig. B). Consulte las dimensiones “Preliminares” (Fig. A) y determine la ubicación del lavadero. Prepare una abertura de 6" (15.24 cm) de diámetro en el contrapiso o la losa con la parte superior de la tubería de desagüe centrada 1/4" (6.35 mm) por debajo de la superficie del piso. En caso de instalar sobre losas, asegúrese de dejar un margen para el desagüe que tenga una profundidad mínima de 2 1/4" (5.72 cm). — Ver “INSTALACIÓN PREELIMINAR” EN LOSAS/CONTRAPISOS (Fig. B). Consultez les dimensions de « Plomberie brute » (Fig. A) et déterminez l’emplacement du bassin d’entretien de vadrouilles. Pratiquez une ouverture de 6 po (15,24 cm) dans le sous-plancher ou la dalle en prenant soin de bien centrer l’extrémité du tuyau d’écoulement 1/4 po (6,35 mm) sous la surface de plancher. S’il s’agit d’une installation de dalles, prévoyez un dégagement pour le drain d’une profondeur d’au moins 2 1/4 po (5.72 cm). —Voir « PLOMBERIE BRUTE » : INSTALLATION DE DALLES/SOUS-PLANCHER/ (Fig. B). STEP 2:PASO 2:ÉTAPE 2 : Set Mop Basin in place and level unit. Draw a light line on wall along the top edge/rim of Mop Basin. Temporarily remove Mop Basin. Coloque el lavadero en su lugar y nivele la unidad. Trace una línea suave en la pared a lo largo del extremo o borde superior del lavadero. Quite el lavadero provisionalmente. Installez et nivelez le bassin d’entretien de vadrouilles. Tracez un trait fin sur le mur longeant l’extrémité/bord du bassin d’entretien de vadrouilles. Retirez provisoirement le bassin d’entretien de vadrouilles. STEP 3:PASO 3:ÉTAPE 3 : Measure down 1 1/2" (1 1/4" for Model 62M ) from this line; which is the horizontal centerline for the Anchoring Brackets (Part No. 63.402). Measure in approximately 2 3 /4" from each end of the Mop Basin along the horizontal centerline. Drill pilot holes for mounting screws (not furnished) and attach Anchoring Brackets. (Figs. C & D) Set Mop Basin back into place. Mida 1 1/2" (3.81 cm) [1 1/4" (3.18 cm) para el Modelo los 62M] hacia abajo de esta línea, que es el eje longitudinal para los soportes de anclaje (Nro. de pieza 63.402). De cada extremo del lavadero mida aproximadamente 2 3 /4" (6.99 cm) hacia adentro y a lo largo del eje horizontal. Taladre agujeros guías para los tornillos de sujeción (no incluidos) y coloque los soportes de anclaje. (Figs. C y D) Vuelva a colocar el lavadero en su lugar. En partant du haut du trait, mesurez 1 1/2 po (3,81 cm) [1 1/4 po (3,18 cm) pour le Model 62M], ce qui correspondra à l’axe central horizontal pour les supports d’ancrage (n° pièce 63.402). Mesurez environ 2 3 /4 po (6,99 cm) depuis chaque extrémité du bassin d’entretien de vadrouilles longeant l’axe central horizontal. Percez des trous de guidage pour les vis de montage (non incluses) et fixez les supports d’ancrage. (Figs. C et D) Installez le bassin d’entretien de vadrouilles bien en place. Fig. B Q Cuadro B Q Le schéma B ROUGH-IN: SLAB INSTALLATION ENCUADRE PRELIMINAR: INSTALACIÓN DE LA LOSA SCHÉMA DE MONTAGE : INSTALLATION DE LA DALLE DE BÉTON ROUGH-IN: SUB-FLOOR INSTALLATION ENCUADRE PRELIMINAR: INSTALACIÓN DE BASE DEL SUELO SCHÉMA DE MONTAGE : INSTALLATION DE LA SOUS-PLANCHER *1 Suelo concreto *2 6" (15.24 cm) diámetro de la apertura *3 La parte superior de la tubería de desagüe debe estar a 1/4" (6.35 mm) por debajo del borde del contrapiso. *4 2" o 3" (5.1 o 7.62 cm) tubo de desagüe sanitario *5 2 1/4" (5.72 cm) profundidad mínima (para la separación de cuerpo del desagüe) *6 Base del suelo *7 Vigueta *1 Plancher en béton *2 6 po (15,24 cm) diamètre d’ouverture *3 Tuyau d’écoulement posé 1/4 po (6,35 mm) sous la surface du sous-plancher *4 2 ou 3 po (5,1 o 7,62 cm) drain sanitaire *5 2 1/4 po (5,72 cm) profondeur minimum (l’habilitation de corps de drain) *6 Sous-plancher *7 Poutrelle 2 *1 Lavadero de servicio *2 3" (7.62 cm) ellador para desagüe *3 Tamiz *4 6" (15.24 cm) diámetro de la apertura *5 Base del suelo *6 Tubo de desagüe del suelo *7 Los SELLOS DEL DESAGÜE opcional están disponibles para todos los modelos: Nro. de pieza 65308 para desagüe sanitario de piso SCH 40 DWN de 2" (5.1 cm) (ver ilustración) Nro. de pieza 65.311 para tubería de hierro fundido para servicio pesado (sin abocinado) de 3" (7.62 cm) *1 Bassin d’entretien de vadrouilles *2 3 po (7,62 cm) joint de drain *3 Tamis *4 6 po (15,24 cm) diamètre d’ouverture *5 Sous-plancher *6 Drain sanitaire dans le plancher *7 Les JOINTS D’ÉTANCHÉITÉ facultatif sont offerts pour tous les modèles : N° pièce 65308 pour drain de plancher de 2 po (5,1 cm), SCH., 40. évac. et vent. (voir l’image) N° pièce 65311 pour tuyau de renvoi en fonte de 3 po (7,62 cm), étanche (sans moyeu) Fig. E Q Cuadro E Q Le schéma E Fig. F Q Cuadro F Q Le schéma F MOLDED-IN DRAIN ASSEMBLY WITH 3" DRAIN SEAL (Standard all models) Conjunto De Desagüe Moldeado Con Sello Del Desagüe De 3" (7.62 cm) (Estándar todos los modelos) Assemblage De Tuyaux D’évacuation Moulés Avec Joint D’étanchéité De 3 po (7,62 cm) (Norme tous les modèles) MOLDED-IN DRAIN ASSEMBLY WITH OPTIONAL 2" DRAIN SEAL Conjunto De Desagüe Moldeado Con Sello Del Desagüe Opcional De 2" (5.1 cm) Assemblage De Tuyaux D’évacuation Moulés Avec Joint D’étanchéité Facultatif De 2 po (5,1 cm) STEP 5:PASO 5:ÉTAPE 5 : Use a quality silicone sealant (not furnished) along all edges of Mop Basin to make contact with walls. Use un impermeabilizador de silicona de calidad (no incluido) a lo largo de los bordes del lavadero para que tome contacto con las paredes. Utilisez un mastic silicone de qualité (non inclus) pour fixer toutes les bordures du bassin aux murs. CARE & CLEANING CUIDADO Y LIMPIEZA SOIN ET NETTOYAGE The surface of your DURABASE ® Mop Service Basins may be cleaned with a mild soap solution in warm water using a soft cloth. When using a cleaner product, carefully read the label to ensure that the cleaner is safe for use on the material. Stubborn stains can be cleaned using “Soft Scrub®” by Clorox®, “Tub & Tile Cleaner ®” by Lysol® or a powdered detergent such as “Spic-n-Span .” Do not allow cleaners to sit or soak on the surface. Wipe surface clean and rinse completely with water immediately after cleaner application. Rinse and dry any overspray on nearby surfaces. Never use abrasive scouring powder or steel wool pads, as they will scratch the surface. A periodic coating of a high quality marine or automotive polish will help retain the finish. La superficie de la Palangana Del Servicio De Fregona DURABASE ® puede limpiarse con un paño embebido en una solución de jabón suave y agua tibia. Si desea usar un producto de limpieza, lea atentamente la etiqueta para asegurarse de que pueda utilizarse con este material. Las manchas difíciles pueden limpiarse con “Soft Scrub®” de Clorox®, “Tub & Tile Cleaner®” de Lysol® o con un detergente en polvo, como por ejemplo, “Spic-n-Span®.” No deje que los productos de limpieza descansen sobre la superficie. Limpie las superficies con un trapo y enjuáguelas con agua de inmediato después de aplicar el producto de limpieza. Limpie y seque todas las salpicaduras que queden cerca de las superficies. Para no rayar la superficie evite el uso de polvos abrasivos y esponjas de metal. Para prolongar el acabado, coloque periódicamente una capa de cera para autos o cera marina. Pour nettoyer la surface de votre Bassin De Service De Balai Éponge DURABASE ®, utilisez un chiffon doux préalablement trempé dans de l’eau chaude légèrement savonneuse. Si vous utilisez un produit nettoyant, lisez attentivement la notice afin de vous assurer qu’il peut être utilisé sur ce type de surface. Pour venir à bout des taches résistantes, utilisez Soft Scrub® de Clorox®, Tub & Tile Cleaner® de Lysol® ou un détergent en poudre tel que Spic-n-Span®. Ne laissez pas les produits nettoyant agir ou pénétrer. Nettoyez la surface, puis rincez-la immédiatement à l’eau après l’application du produit nettoyant. Rincez et séchez tout excédent sur les surfaces adjacentes. N’utilisez jamais de poudre décapante abrasive ou d’éponges métalliques car cela rayerait la surface. L’utilisation régulière d’un produit d’entretien de marine ou de pâte à polir pour carrosserie permet de conserver une belle finition plus longtemps. STEP 4: (Figs. D & E)PASO 4:ÉTAPE 4 : Seal waste by installing Drain Seal around waste pipe (A light coating of liquid soap or silicone sealant on drain seal will make installation easier). Tamp Drain Seal in place to bottom of drain body using a 1/4" diameter rod. Make sure Drain Seal is even with top of waste pipe and in full compliance with local code regulations. Snap Strainer into place. — See 2" or 3" DRAIN ASSEMBLY illustration (Fig. E or F). Para sellar la tubería de drenado coloque el sello del desagüe alrededor de la tubería (una capa delgada de jabón líquido o impermeabilizador de silicona en el sello del desagüe hará más fácil la instalación). Introduzca a presión el sello del desagüe en la parte inferior del desagüe con una varilla de 1/4" (6.35 mm). Cerciórese de que el sello del desagüe esté a la misma altura que la tubería de desagüe, y cumpla con las regulaciones locales. Ajuste el filtro en su lugar. — Ver 2" (5.08 cm) o 3" (7.62 cm) plan del DISPOSITIVO DE DRENAJE (Fig. E o F). Installez le joint d’étanchéité autour du tuyau d’écoulement (pour faciliter l’installation, appliquez une mince couche de savon liquide ou de mastic silicone sur le joint du tuyau d’écoulement). Tassez le joint d’étanchéité dans le fond du corps du tuyau d’écoulement à l’aide d’une tige de 1/4 po (6,35 mm). Assurez-vous que le joint d’étanchéité est de niveau avec le haut du tuyau d’évacuation et qu’il est conforme aux codes et règlements municipaux. Fixez la crépine bien en place. — Voir 2 po (5,08 cm) ou 3 po (7,62 cm) plan du TUYAU D’ÉVACUATION (Fig. E ou F). 3 INSTALLATION QUESTIONS DESEA HACER ALGUNA PREGUNTA DES QUESTIONS SUR L’INSTALLATION Questions on the installation or missing parts, call 216-267-3100 or e-mail customerservice@mustee.com for assistance. Hours of operation are Monday to Friday, 8:30 a.m. to 4:30 p.m. E.S.T. Please have the installation manual available when calling. DO NOT RETURN PRODUCT TO THE PLACE OF PURCHASE. Para cualquier pregunta relacionada con la instalación o en caso que falten piezas, comuníquese con el 216-267-3100 o escriba al customerservice@mustee.com para recibir asistencia. El horario de atención es de lunes a viernes de 8:30 am a 4:30 pm E.S.T Le agradecemos tener el manual de instalación a su alcance cuando llame. NO DEVUELVA EL PRODUCTO AL SITIO DE COMPRA. Si vous avez des questions sur l’installation ou qu’il vous manque certaines pièces, composez le 216-267-3100 ou envoyez un courriel à l’adresse customerservice@mustee.com pour obtenir de l’aide. Heures d’ouverture : Du lundi au vendredi, de 8h30 à 16h30, heure de l’est des États-Unis. N’oubliez pas de vous munir du manuel d’installation lorsque vous nous appelez. IL EST INUTILE DE RAMENER LE PRODUIT DANS LE MAGASIN OÙ VOUS L’AVEZ ACHETÉ. ACCESSORIES (Order Separately) Q ACCESORIOS (Pedidos Por Separado) Q ACCESSOIRES (Vendus Séparément) Service Faucet Q Grifo Utilitario Q Robinet de Service 63.600A Model Q Modelo Q Modèle Chrome plated brass service sink faucet. Shall meet ANSI Specifications A112.1.1, Section 2.9 and A112.18.1M, CSA Listed. Lavabo de servicio de bronce recubierto de cromo. Cumple con las especificaciones establecidas por ANSI A112.1.1, Sección 2.9 y A112.18.1M, CSA. Robinet d’évier de service en laiton chromé. La pièce doit répondre aux normes ANSI A112.1.1, Section 2,9 et A112.18,1M, et être homologuée CSA. Hose and Hose Holder Q Manguera y Tenedor de la Manguera 1 Tuyau et Support de Tuyau 65.700 Model Q Modelo Q Modèle Mop Hanger Q Suspensión de la Fregona Q Cintre de Lavette 65.600 Model Q Modelo Q Modèle Bumper Guards Q Guardias del Borde Q Dispositifs Protecteurs de Bord Model Q Modelo Q Modèle High Impact-Resistant Vinyl Q Vinilo Resistente A Altos Impactos Q Vinyle Très Résistant Aux Chocs 62.401 21 1/2" Long, Fits Model 62M Q 21 1/2" (54.61 cm) Largo, Para el Modelo 62M Q 21 1/2 po (54,61 cm) de Longueur, Pour Modèle 62M 63.401 20 3/4" Long, Fits Models 63M & 65M Q 20 3/4" (52.71 cm) Largo, Para el Modelos 63M y 65M Q 20 3/4 po (52,71 cm) de Longueur, Pour Modèles 63M et 65M 65.403 32 3/4" Long, Fits Model 65M Q 32 3/4" (83.19 cm) Largo, Para el Modelo 65M Q 32 3/4 po (83,19 cm) de Longueur, Pour Modèle 65M Stainless Steel Q Acero Inoxidable Q Acier Inoxydable 63.403 20 3/4" Long, Fits Models 63M & 65M Q 20 3/4" (52.71 cm) Largo, Para el Modelos 63M y 65M Q 20 3/4 po (52,71 cm) de Longueur, Pour Modèles 63M et 65M 65.404 32 3/4" Long, Fits Model 65M Q 32 3/4" (83.19 cm) Largo, Para el Modelo 65M Q 32 3/4 po (83,19 cm) de Longueur, Pour Modèle 65M DURAGUARD™ Wall Guards Q Guardias de la Pared Q Dispositifs Protecteurs de Mur Model Q Modelo Q Modèle 67.2424 Two panels & bracket for 24" x 24" corner Q Los dos paneles y corchetes para 24" x 24" (60.96 x 60.96 cm) esquina Q Deux panneaux et parenthèses pour 24 x 24 po (60,96 x 60,96 cm) angulaire 67.2436 Two panels & bracket for 24" x 36" corner Q Los dos paneles y corchetes para 24" x 36" (60.96 x 91.44 cm) esquina Q Deux panneaux et parenthèses pour 24 x 36 po (60,96 x 91,44 cm) angulaire Optional Seals for installations with the following pipe connections: Q Sello Opcional para las instalaciones con las conexiones de tubo siguientes: Q Joint de Drain Facultatif pour des installations avec les connexions de pipe suivantes : Model Q Modelo Q Modèle 65.308 For 2" PVC, ABS and iron Q Para de hierro fundido o 2" (5.08 cm) ABS o PVC Q Pour la 2 po (5,08 cm) plastique ABS, PVC ou en fonte 65.309 For 3" PVC, ABS and iron, (Included w/mop basin) Q Para de hierro fundido o 3" (7.62 cm) ABS o PVC (Incluido con el lavabo de la fregona) Q Pour la 3 po (7,62 cm) plastique ABS, PVC ou en fonte (Inclus avec le bassin de lavette) 65.311 For 3" soil pipe (No-Hub) Q Para cañería de desagüe de 3" (7.62 cm) Ningún Eje Q Pour tuyau de renvoi de 3 po (7,62 cm) Aucun Hub For complete details on the Mop Service Basin accessories shown above, visit www.mustee.com Para obtener más información sobre los accesorios del lavadero de servicio, diríjase a www.mustee.com Pour connaître tous les détails au sujet des accessoires de bassin d’entretien de vadrouilles illustré ci-dessus, visitez le www.mustee.com SI-228 (05-10) Patented and patents pending. Made and Printed in U.S.A. Patentes y patentado pendientes. Hecho e impreso en U.S.A. Breveté et brevets en attente. Fabriqué et imprimé aux États-UnisPreferred by the “Pros” As a company committed to continuous improvement, the specifications in this installation manual are subject to change without notice. Somos una empresa comprometida con el perfeccionamiento constante, por lo que las especificaciones para la instalación de este producto podrían cambiar sin previo aviso. Notre entreprise cherchant toujours à améliorer ses produits, les spécifications de ce manuel d’installation peuvent être modifiées sans préavis. 40004 40002 47001 140998 44003 (1.5 GPM) 41089 PARTS SHEET REV 1/11 CLEVELAND FAUCET GROUP • 25300 AL MOEN DRIVE • NORTH OLMSTED, OHIO 44070 • (888) 450-5522 • www.cfgonline.com 50/50 Waste Assembly 40025 Chrome FLAGSTONE® One-Handle Lavatory Faucet MODEL HANDLE WASTE FINISH CA47711L Lever 50/50 Chrome CA47713L Lever None Chrome E J O P Q F G H B D C A I L K N M R 1 2 B A C 3 D 5 E F G J H R E I M 6 YES SÍ OUI NO NO NON 7 L K I Standard Estandar Standard Anti-vandal option Opcion antivandalismo Avec option anti-vandalisme 47711 47713 Model Number/Número de modelo/Numéro de type Installation Date/Fecha de instalación/Date d'installation For Warranty Support/Para la ayuda de la garantía/Pour l'appui de garantie 4 E R One Handle Lavatory Faucet with Waste Mezcladora para lavabo, 1 maneral, con desagüe Robinet de lavabo à une poignée avec bonde Note: Spout and handles vary by model. Nota: El surtidor y las manijas varían por el modelo. Note : Le bec et les poignées varient par le modèle. INSTA LLATION INSTRUC TIONS Manuel d’installation / Instrucciones de instalación INS1934B 25300 Al Moen Drive North Olmsted, OH 44070 (888) 450-5522 13 0 15 Sec. 30 45 14 15 8 N 11 2 P10 Q 2 11 1/2" (125mm) 1 Q 3 O 12 Hot Caliente Chaud 1-year Limited Warranty • Cleveland Faucet Group (CFG) warrants to the original consumer purchaser for a period of one (1) year from the original date of purchase (the “Warranty Period”) that this faucet will be free from defects in materials and manufacturing workmanship. If this faucet should ever evidence a defect in materials or manufacturing workmanship during the Warranty Period and under normal installation, use and service, CFG will provide a replacement or repair part FREE OF CHARGE. • Damage due to installation error, product abuse, product misuse are excluded from this warranty. CFG will not be responsible for labor charges and/or damage incurred in installation, repair or replacement, nor for any indirect, incidental or consequential damages, losses, injury or costs of any nature relating to this faucet or any replacement or repair part. • Except as provided by law, this warranty is in lieu of and excludes all other warranties, whether expressed or implied, statutory or otherwise, including without restriction those of merchantability or of fitness for use. Some states, provinces and nations do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state, province to province, nation to nation. Simply write or call, and CFG will advise you of the procedure to follow in making warranty claims. Proof of purchase (original sales receipt) must accompany all warranty claims. Garantía Limitada de por 1 Año • Cleveland Faucet Group (CFG) garantiza al consumidor-comprador original por un período de un (1) año desde la fecha original de compra (el "Periodo de Garantía"), que esta mezcladora será libre de defectos de material y mano de obra de fabricación. En caso que esta mezcladora empiece en algún momento a gotear, fugar agua o demonstrar que tiene cualquier defecto bajo instalación, uso y servicio normal, CFG le enviará GRATIS las partes necesarias para dejar la mezcladora en buen condición de funcionamiento. • Sin embargo, los daños causados por un error de instalación, abuso del producto, mal uso del producto o el uso de limpiadores que contengan abrasivos, alcohol u otros solventes orgánicos, se excluyen de esta garantia. CFG no será responsable de costos laborales y/o daños producidos durante la instalacion, reparación u cualquier daño incidental o consiguiente, pérdidas, herídas u costos de caulquier naturaleza relacionados con esta mezcladora, su reemplazo y sus partes. • Salvo como previsto por la ley, esta garantiá reemplaza y excluye todas las otras garantías, condiciones y afirmaciones, ya sea expresadas o implicítas, legales u otras, incluyendo sin restricción alguna aquellas de comercialización o aptitud para el uso. Algunos estados, provincias y naciones no permiten la exclusión o limitación de daños incidentales o consiguientes y por este motivo las sobrecitados limitaciones posiblemente no le afectan. • Esta garantía le otorga derechos legales específicos y Ud. posiblemente también tiene otros derechos que cambian de un estado a otro, de una provincia a otra, de una nación a otra. Solamente llame o escriba y CFG le avisará cual procedimiento debe seguir en cuanto haga una reclamación bajo garantia. El comprobante de compra (recibo original de la venta) del consumidor debe acompañar todas las reclamaciones de garantia, Garantie Limitée de 1 An • Le groupe Cleveland Faucet (GCF) garantit à l’acheteur original, pour une période d’un (1) an à partir de la date d’achat (la “Période de Garantie”), que ce robinet sera exempt de tout défaut de matériaux et de fabrication. Si ce robinet devait avoir un défaut de matériaux ou de fabrication durant la Période de Garantie, et sous installation, usage et service normaux, GCF procurera un remplacement ou les pièces de réparation gratuitement. • Des dommages dus à une erreur d’installation ou à un usage abusif ou incorrect, sont exclus de cette garantie. GCF ne sera pas responsable des frais de main-d’œuvre, et/ou de dommages encourus pendant l’installation, la réparation ou le remplacement, ni pour des dommages, pertes, blessures ou coûts indirects ou accessoires, reliés à ce robinet ou tout remplacement ou pièce de réparation. • Excepté là où la loi le permet, cette garantie remplace et exclut toute autre garantie, qu’elle soit exprimée ou légale, statuée ou autre, incluant sans restrictions celles de valeurs commerciales ou d’utilisation juste. Certains états, provinces ou nations ne permettent pas l’exclusion ou la limitation de dommages-intérêts accessoires, donc les limitations et exclusions ci-dessus peuvent ne pas s’appliquer à vous. Cette garantie vous donne des droits légaux spécifiques et vous pouvez aussi avoir d’autres droits qui varient d’état à état, de province à province, et de nation à nation. Écrivez ou appelez, et CGF vous avisera de la procédure à suivre pour faire une réclamation de garantie. Une preuve d’achat (reçu d’achat original) doit être annexée à toute réclamation de garantie. If you need installation assistance, replacement parts or have questions regarding our warranty, please call our product consultants at: US: 1-800-450-4910 Canada: 1-800-465-6130 Mexico: 01-800-718-4345 ©2009 C leveland Faucet Group A Moen Incorporated Brand 25300 Al Moen Drive North Olmsted, OH U.S.A. 44070-8022 1-888-450-5522 www.cfgonline.com INS1934B 9 O Q For Models prior to 7/1/2010 40004 40002 40013 40013SL 42094 42094SL 44078 – White 44031 – Black 10085 105527 O-ring service kit 44011 (1.5 GPM) 44011SL (1.5 GPM) 40011 (2.2 GPM) 40011SL (2.2 GPM) 40078 – White 40031 – Black For Models prior to 9/1/2011 40039 40012 40012SL PA RTS SHEET Rev. 1/13 CLEVELAND FAUCET GROUP • 25300 AL MOEN DRIVE • NORTH OLMSTED, OHIO 44070 • (888) 450-5522 • www.cfgonline.com CORNERSTONE One-Handle Kitchen Faucet with Side Spray MODEL HANDLE/SIDE SPRAY FINISH CA40511 Lever / None Chrome CA40511SL Lever / None Stainless CA40513 Lever / White Chrome CA40513B Lever / Black Chrome CA40513SL Lever / Stainless Stainless One Handle Kitchen Faucet Mezcladora para cocina, 1 maneral, de mangrea Robinet de cuisine à une poignée à levier Note: Spout and handles vary by model. Nota: El surtidor y las manijas varían por el modelo. Note : Le bec et les poignées varient par le modèle. INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS Manuel d’installation / Instrucciones de instalación INS10227 - 10/13 25300 Al Moen Drive North Olmsted, OH 44070 (888) 450-5522 40511/40512 40513/40514/40523 40515/40510 F D G A H B E C A I A1 A A1 A2 C C B B E E If no spray, go to Para instalar sin rocío lateral, vaya a Pour une installation sans rince- légumes latéral, aller à A7 1 F G A3 F H H A4 F Model Number/Número de modelo/Numéro de type Installation Date/Fecha de instalación/Date d'installation For Warranty Support/Para la ayuda de la garantía/Pour l'appui de garantie B1 A1 or o ou D A7 D D 1 2 A Go to Step 8Vaya al paso Passez à l'étape G B D B E C H I A A B1 C B E B2 C B E 1 G B3 G 2 A7 A Go to Step 8Vaya al paso Passez à l'étape 1 1 3or o ou 1 A A6 H 2 I I Push until a “click” is heard. Tug downward to test engagement. Empuje hasta oír un clic. Tire hacia abajo para probar si está enganchada. Pousser jusqu’à ce que vous entendiez un « clic ». Tirer vers le bas pour tester l’enclenchement. A5 I H Discard Descarte Jeter 1 2 B7 A A D D D 2 8 A 1 1 3 9 0 15 Sec. 30 45 10 11 H B4 INS10227 - 10/13 I H Discard Descarte Jeter 1 2 B5 1 A B6 H 2 I I Push until a “click” is heard. Tug downward to test engagement. Empuje hasta oír un clic. Tire hacia abajo para probar si está enganchada. Pousser jusqu’à ce que vous entendiez un « clic ». Tirer vers le bas pour tester l’enclenchement. 10-year Limited Warranty • Cleveland Faucet Group (CFG) warrants to the original consumer purchaser for a period of ten (10) years from the original date of purchase (the “Warranty Period”) that this faucet will be free from defects in materials and manufacturing workmanship. If this faucet should ever evidence a defect in materials or manufacturing workmanship during the Warranty Period and under normal installation, use and service, CFG will provide a replacement or repair part FREE OF CHARGE. • Damage due to installation error, product abuse, product misuse are excluded from this warranty. CFG will not be responsible for labor charges and/or damage incurred in installation, repair or replacement, nor for any indirect, incidental or consequential damages, losses, injury or costs of any nature relating to this faucet or any replacement or repair part. • Except as provided by law, this warranty is in lieu of and excludes all other warranties, whether expressed or implied, statutory or otherwise, including without restriction those of merchantability or of fitness for use. Some states, provinces and nations do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state, province to province, nation to nation. Simply write or call, and CFG will advise you of the procedure to follow in making warranty claims. Proof of purchase (original sales receipt) must accompany all warranty claims. Garantía Limitada de por 10 Años • Cleveland Faucet Group (CFG) garantiza al consumidor- comprador original por un período de diez (10) años desde la fecha original de compra (el “Periodo de Garantía”), que esta mezcladora será libre de defectos de material y mano de obra de fabricación. En caso que esta mezcladora empiece en algún momento a gotear, fugar agua o demonstrar que tiene cualquier defecto bajo instalación, uso y servicio normal, CFG le enviará GRATIS las partes necesarias para dejar la mezcladora en buen condición de funcionamiento. • Sin embargo, los daños causados por un error de instalación, abuso del producto, mal uso del producto o el uso de limpiadores que contengan abrasivos, alcohol u otros solventes orgánicos, se excluyen de esta garantia. CFG no será responsable de costos laborales y/o daños producidos durante la instalacion, reparación u cualquier daño incidental o consiguiente, pérdidas, herídas u costos de caulquier naturaleza relacionados con esta mezcladora, su reemplazo y sus partes. • Salvo como previsto por la ley, esta garantiá reemplaza y excluye todas las otras garantías, condiciones y afirmaciones, ya sea expresadas o implicítas, legales u otras, incluyendo sin restricción alguna aquellas de comercialización o aptitud para el uso. Algunos estados, provincias y naciones no permiten la exclusión o limitación de daños incidentales o consiguientes y por este motivo las sobrecitados limitaciones posiblemente no le afectan. • Esta garantía le otorga derechos legales específicos y Ud. posiblemente también tiene otros derechos que cambian de un estado a otro, de una provincia a otra, de una nación a otra. Solamente llame o escriba y CFG le avisará cual procedimiento debe seguir en cuanto haga una reclamación bajo garantia. El comprobante de compra (recibo original de la venta) del consumidor debe acompañar todas las reclamaciones de garantia. Garantie Limitée de 10 Ans • Le groupe Cleveland Faucet (CFG) garantit à l’acheteur original, pour une période de dix (10) ans à partir de la date d’achat (la “Période de Garantie”), que ce robinet sera exempt de tout défaut de matériaux et de fabrication. Si ce robinet devait avoir un défaut de matériaux ou de fabrication durant la Période de Garantie, et sous installation, usage et service normaux, CFG procurera un remplacement ou les pièces de réparation gratuitement. • Des dommages dus à une erreur d’installation ou à un usage abusif ou incorrect, sont exclus de cette garantie. CFG ne sera pas responsable des frais de main-d’œuvre, et/ou de dommages encourus pendant l’installation, la réparation ou le remplacement, ni pour des dommages, pertes, blessures ou coûts indirects ou accessoires, reliés à ce robinet ou tout remplacement ou pièce de réparation. • Excepté là où la loi le permet, cette garantie remplace et exclut toute autre garantie, qu’elle soit exprimée ou légale, statuée ou autre, incluant sans restrictions celles de valeurs commerciales ou d’utilisation juste. Certains états, provinces ou nations ne permettent pas l’exclusion ou la limitation de dommages- intérêts accessoires, donc les limitations et exclusions ci-dessus peuvent ne pas s’appliquer à vous. Cette garantie vous donne des droits légaux spécifiques et vous pouvez aussi avoir d’autres droits qui varient d’état à état, de province à province, et de nation à nation. Écrivez ou appelez, et CFG vous avisera de la procédure à suivre pour faire une réclamation de garantie. Une preuve d’achat (reçu d’achat original) doit être annexée à toute réclamation de garantie. If you need installation assistance, replacement parts or have questions regarding our warranty, please call our product consultants at: US: 1-800-450-4910 Canada: 1-800-465-6130 Mexico: 01-800-718-4345 ©2013 Cleveland Faucet Group A Moen Incorporated Brand 25300 Al Moen Drive North Olmsted, OH U.S.A. 44070-8022 1-888-450-5522 www.cfgonline.com INS10227 - 10/13